ML16260A190

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
2016-09-DRAFT Operating Test
ML16260A190
Person / Time
Site: Arkansas Nuclear Entergy icon.png
Issue date: 09/01/2016
From: Vincent Gaddy
Operations Branch IV
To:
Entergy Operations
References
Download: ML16260A190 (629)


Text

ES-301 Administrative Topics Outline Form ES-301-1 Facility: ____ANO-1_______________________ Date of Examination: __8/22/2016__

Examination Level: RO SRO Operating Test Number: _2016-1__

Administrative Topic (see Note) Type Describe activity to be performed Code*

A1 Given their work history, select the eligible Conduct of Operations R, N operators to fill vacancy due to illness of KA - 2.1.5, Importance rating 2.9 the on watch ATC.

(RO/SRO)

A2 Perform calculation for makeup to the Conduct of Operations R, D,P Spent Fuel Pool KA- 2.1.23, Importance 4.3 RO/SRO A3 Determine the mechanical and electrical Equipment Control R, N boundary isolations for P-36B Makeup KA - 2.2.13, Importance 4.1 Pump seal leak. (Do not need to drain the RO pump)

A4 Given a survey map and associated RWP, Radiation Control R, N determine the entry requirements to KA - 2.3.7, Importance 3.5 perform a task in the P-34A Decay Heat RO Removal Pump Room.

Not used Emergency Plan NOTE: All items (five total) are required for SROs. RO applicants require only four items unless they are retaking only the administrative topics (which would require all five items).

  • Type Codes & Criteria: (C)ontrol room, (S)imulator, or Class(R)oom (D)irect from bank ( 3 for ROs; 4 for SROs & RO retakes)

(N)ew or (M)odified from bank ( 1)

(P)revious 2 exams ( 1; randomly selected)

ES-301 Administrative Topics Outline Form ES-301-1 Facility: ____ANO-1_______________________ Date of Examination: __8/22/2016__

Examination Level: RO SRO Operating Test Number: __2016-1__

Administrative Topic (see Note) Type Describe activity to be performed Code*

Given their work history, select the eligible A5 R, N operators to fill vacancy due to illness of Conduct of Operations the on watch ATC.

KA - 2.1.5, Importance rating 3.9 (RO/SRO)

Perform calculation for makeup to the A6 R, D,P Spent Fuel Pool Conduct of Operations KA- 2.1.23, Importance 4.4 RO/SRO A7 Review and approve the tagout provided Equipment Control R, N for P-36B Makeup Pump seal leak. If not KA - 2.2.13, Importance 4.3 approved, provide the reasons why.

SRO A8 Provided with the dose history for each Radiation Control R, N individual. Determine which of the 5 are KA - 2.3.4, Importance 3.7 eligible for performing the task during an SRO emergency situation.

A9 R, D Determine the correct PAR and Emergency Plan evacuation/sheltering required for a given KA - 2.4.44, Importance 4.4 GE.

SRO NOTE: All items (five total) are required for SROs. RO applicants require only four items unless they are retaking only the administrative topics (which would require all five items).

  • Type Codes & Criteria: (C)ontrol room, (S)imulator, or Class(R)oom (D)irect from bank ( 3 for ROs; 4 for SROs & RO retakes)

(N)ew or (M)odified from bank ( 1)

(P)revious 2 exams ( 1; randomly selected)

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A1

1 of 6 UNIT: 1 REV # 0 DATE: ______________________________

TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS TASK: PERFORM WORKING HOUR HISTORY REVIEW AND SELECT ELIGIBLE OPERATORS TO FILL VACANCY DUE TO ILLNESS OF THE ONCOMING ATC WATCH JTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-195/ANO-SRO-ADMIN-NORM-191 KA VALUE RO: 2.9 SRO: 3.9 KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.5 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO: X TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM: PERFORM POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________ SRO:___________

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:______ LAB:_____

TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): EN-OM-123, REV. 12 EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 6 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power operations. The scheduled day-shift oncoming ATC operator has called in and stated he will not be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness.

The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met. PQ&S Computer program is not available.

TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly selected operators A, C and E that are available to come in to fill the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> dayshift ATC watch vacancy in accordance with the work hour limits for covered individuals and correctly stated why operators B and D cannot come in.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: Working Hour History for the last 14 days for Operators A,B,C,D, and E

3 of 6 INITIATING CUE:

The Shift Manager has directed you to review the work history of five eligible qualified operators and determine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATC vacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordance with the Fatigue Management Program. Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.

CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT NOTE: Provide examinee with a copy of the work history or the five eligible candidates.

1. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator A is (C) Operator A. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any _____ _____ _____

working hour limits.

2. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator B is NOT (C) Operator B. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC _____ _____ _____

watch vacancy because the operator will exceed the Maximum of 72 work hours in any 7 day period working hour limit.

3. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator C is (C) Operator C. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any _____ _____ _____

working hour limits.

4. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator D is NOT (C) Operator D. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy because the operator _____ _____ _____

will not have had a Minimum 34-hour break in any 9-day period working hour limit.

5. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator E is (C) Operator E. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits.

NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END

4 of 6 EXAMINER ANSWER KEY Operator Eligible/Not Eligible Reason (if not eligible)

Operator A Eligible (C)

Operator B Not Eligible (C) Will Exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period. (C)

Operator C Eligible (C)

Operator D Not Eligible (C) No 34 hour3.935185e-4 days <br />0.00944 hours <br />5.621693e-5 weeks <br />1.2937e-5 months <br /> break in a 9 day period. (C)

Operator E Eligible (C)

5 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • The plant is at 100% power operations.
  • The scheduled day-shift oncoming ATC operator has called in and stated he will not be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness.
  • The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met.
  • PQ&S computer program is not available.

INITIATING CUE:

The Shift Manager has directed you to review the work history of five eligible qualified operators and determine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATC vacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordance with the Fatigue Management Program.

Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.

6 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY Operator Eligible/Not Eligible Reason (if not eligible)

Operator A Operator B Operator C Operator D Operator E

Operator A 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'A'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule D OFF OFF OFF N N N OFF OFF D D D D Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator B 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'B'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule OFF D D OFF OFF OFF OFF N N N N N N Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator C 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'C'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule OFF OFF D D D D Off OFF N N N N Off Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator D 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'D'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule N OFF OFF OFF D D D OFF D D D D D Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator E 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'E'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule D D OFF OFF OFF N N N OFF OFF D D D Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A2

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2) PAGE 1 OF 5 UNIT: 1 REV #: 1 DATE:

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: Conduct of Operations TASK: Perform Spent Fuel Pool Makeup Calculation.

JTA#: ANO1-RO-SFC-NORM-17 KA VALUE RO: 4.6 SRO: 4.6 KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.20 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO: x TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: Classroom: Perform POSITION EVALUATED: RO: SRO:

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE: Classroom:

TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE: PERFORM: X APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 20 Minutes REFERENCE(S): 1104.003, Att. C2 EXAMINEE'S NAME: Logon ID:

EVALUATOR'S NAME:

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY: UNSATISFACTORY:

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

Start Stop Total Time Time Time SIGNED: DATE:

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2) PAGE 2 OF 5 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Given the following Plant conditions:

  • Plant is in refueling Outage 1R26
  • SF Pool level is -0.4 ft.
  • SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm.
  • BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm.
  • Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed.
  • Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is Closed TASK STANDARD:

Determined initial SF Pool volume is 362,843 gallons from Table 2.

Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.

Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.

Determined final SF Pool level is 0.0 +/- 0.1 ft.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

1104.003, Attachment C2 SIMULATOR SETUP:

NA EXAMINER'S NOTES:

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2) PAGE 3 OF 5 INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SFP to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm. Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed. Determine final SFP Volume and Level.

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARDS (Circle One)

(C) 1. Determine initial SF Pool Determined volume is 362,843 N/A SAT UNSAT volume from Table 2. gallons from Table 2.

2. Record data. Recorded data. N/A SAT UNSAT (C) 3. Determine feed volume to be Determined feed volume to be N/A SAT UNSAT added to SF Pool. 3684 +/- 2 gallons.

(C) 4. Determine final SF Pool Determined final SF Pool volume N/A SAT UNSAT volume. to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.

(C) 5 Determine final SF Pool level Determined final SF Pool level is N/A SAT UNSAT from 0.0 +/- 0.1 ft.

END

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2) PAGE 4 OF 5 ANSWER KEY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Given the following Plant conditions:

  • Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26.
  • SF Pool level is -0.4 ft.
  • SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm.
  • BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm.
  • Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed.
  • Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is Closed INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SFP to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.

Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.

Determine final SF Pool volume.

Determine final SF Pool level.

Document the results of the review below:

(C) Determined initial SF Pool volume is currently 362,843 gallons from Table 2.

(C) Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.

(C) Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.

(C) Determined final SF Pool level is from 0.0 +/- 0.1 ft.

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2) PAGE 5 OF 5 EXAMINEEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Given the following Plant conditions:

  • Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26.
  • SF Pool level is -0.4 ft.
  • SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm.
  • BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm.
  • Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed.
  • Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is Closed INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SF Pool to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.

Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.

Determine final SF Pool volume.

Determine final SF Pool level.

Document the results of the review below:

PROC.IWORK PLAN NO. PROCEDUREIWORK PLAN TITLE:

I PAGE: 62 of 153 1104.003 CHEMICAL ADDITION CHANGE: 054 ATTACHMENT 02 Page 1 of 7 SF POOL FEED CALCULATIONS TABLE 1 Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume/Ft Depth SF Pool SF Pool SF Pool + Cask Pit Refueling Incore SF Pool + Cask Pit + Tilt Pit + Tilt Pit Canal Tank (gal/ft) (gallft) (gal/ft) (gal/ft) (gal/ft) (gal/ft) 7,570 8,349 8,845 9,624 11,070 1,141 TABLE 2 Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume (gallons)

SF Pool Elev. Ll-2004 SF Pool SF Pool SF Pool + Cask Pit Refueling Incore (1)

(ft) + Cask Pit + Tilt Pit 4- Tilt Pit Canal Tank 401.5 4-lOft 298,120 330,899 343,537 376,316 401.4 +0.9 ft 297,363 330,064 342,653 375,354 During refueling, 401.3 +0.8ft 296,606 329,229 341,768 374,392 canal level must be 401.2 +O.7ft 295,849 328,394 340,884 373,429 maintained 401.1 +0.6ft 295,092 327,559 339,999 372,467 between -0.5 and 401.0 +0.5ft 294,335 326,725 339,115 371,504 0.OontheSFP Level indicator 400.9 +0.4 ft 293,578 325,890 338,230 370,542 (Ll-2004).

400.8 +0.3 ft 292,821 325,055 337,346 369,580 400.7 +0.2 ft 292,064 324,220 336,461 368,617 400.6 o.ff 291,307 323,385 335,577 367,655 400.5 0.Oft 290,550 322,550 334,692 366,692 342,800 27,400 289,793 321,715 333,808 365.730 341,693 27,286 289 036 320 880 332 923 364 768 340 583 27 172 4002 U3tt 288,2 9 .320 045 t 36b 39 20 33 208..4 403 0A ft 287 522 219.210 33 1541 2 26944 05 28665 3i8,36 33C3 65 otL 28cCu ol 54 329 85 360 9 336 158 1 26.715 83 GE.. 328 95 335 O5fT 26601 ft 444 32 e 93 3334T 26A87 23 3 3.3 6 ...2 3 t 332 83f 26373 3 33 730 26259 r 22J.23 3,3$ 334 9t3 E6 Q 145 846( 31 324 8 16 26,031

, 3992 . 1 3 t 280.109 3 1696J 323,194 354,181 328,409 25,917 ti 4 ft 3991 279,952 , 3iT 322,309 1 353,219 327,302 25,803 399.0 -1.5 ft 279,195 j 310,026T 321,425 j 352,256 326,195 25,689 (1) Tilt Pit volume from CR-ANO-1-2008-1859-CA2,

I PROC.IWORKPLANNO.

I PROCEDIJREIWORKPLANTITLE: I PAGE: 63of153 1104.003 CHEMICAL ADDITION CHANGE: 054 IJTACHMENT P2 Page 2 of 7 CT+/-O Prforoance of this section requirs vication that feed voluoe will not resuit in overflowing of the SFP oer attached <<olumes.

  • It is necessary to coordinate with<p Fuel Personnel when <aking up to the Spent- Fuei Pool durIng try Ful tpertions.
  • Step 1.0 is sZe1y perforoed to deterrrine <;o+/-uo.e of boric acid at a knoin concentration to achieve a desired final SFP boron concentration, and eneral1y would not he used.

o) IF it is desired to calculate the voiume of boric acid required to V achieve a desired final SFP concentration, THEN perform the following:

Determine initial SF Pool volume from TABLE 2. Interpolate if necessary.

1.1.1 iF appropriate, THEN add Refueling Canal and Ircore Tank volume.

v = Initial 1olume from TABLE u

<1.2 Record <he folowin data:

ppnB Initial SF Po1 oncentration P

JQ 3ga

i PROCJWORK PLAN NO.

1104.003 PROCEDUREIWORKPLANTITLE:

CHEMICAL ADDITION I PAGE: 64of 153 I I CHANGE: 054 ATLAIRHEIJI 22 Page 3 Df 7 1.4 Derernine final SF Pool voume nirl volume = ( ) + ( 1 V

Final volune = 3 ) + 3I He If final SF Pool level is deterninedfibe grefier than -f 1. 2 ft or greater than zero when refuelina, hen ode addition will ha-re to be vaSe in separare operations.

1 5 Deterine final SF Pool level from TABLE 2, interpolate as necessary.

IF final volume greater than table values 1 II THEN a second addition will have to be done following a level reduction.

lie other sections of his Aliachnent as recited.

li needed, THEN finS the vluve of feed Vrj, ANL use TABLE 1 for SF Poi gal ft.

ES Refueling loyal or Incore lirk 1s nnec-i li SF Too inc Systm liEd id the prpniat zaVf o lie SF Pool al/fi.

d Foi v ia eI] /

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A3

1 of 6 UNIT: 1 REV # 0 DATE: ______________________________

TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - EQUIPMENT CONTROL TASK: PERFORM IDENTIFICATION OF COMPONENTS THAT NEED TO BE ISOLATED AND DANGER TAGGED FOR AN INBOARD SEAL LEAK ON MAKEUP PURIFICATION PUMP P-36A JTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-078 KA VALUE RO: 4.1 SRO: 4.3 KA

REFERENCE:

2.2.13 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO:

TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:_ PERFORM_

POSITION EVALUATED: RO: : X SRO:___________

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:_____ CLASSROOM: X TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM: X APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): EN-OP-102, REV. 18, PROTECTIVE AND CAUTION TAGGING; P&ID M-231; ELECTRICAL PRINT E-5 ONE LINE DRAWING FOR ENGINEERED SAFEGUARD BUSES A3 AND A4.

EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 6 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power. A bad inboard seal leak is present on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A. A Danger Tag will need to be generated to isolate this inboard seal leak.

No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.

TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly identified the fluid boundary isolations and electrical power required to isolate the inboard seal leak on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: P&ID M-231 Makeup & Purification System Drawing; Electrical Print E-5 one line drawing for Engineered Safeguard Buses A3 and A4.

3 of 6 INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS has directed you to identify the components that need to be danger tagged to electrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A to isolate this seal leak. Also provide the component danger tag position required.

CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT NOTE: Provide examinee with a copy of E-Print E-5 and P&ID M-231

1. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that Electrical Circuit (C) to determine source of power to P- Breaker A-306 will need to be 36A to add to the tagout (E-Print E- Breaker Racked Down and added _____ _____ _____

5 or OP-1107.002 Attachment A) to the tagout.

Note: The Candidate may add a Caution Tag to be placed on the MU Purification Pump P-36A Remote Hand Switch.

2. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that P-36A Discharge (C) to determine the P-36A pump Isolation MU-20A will need to be _____ _____ _____

discharge Isolation will need to be Closed and added to the tagout.

added to the tagout (P&ID M-231)

3. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that a P-36A Minimum (C) to determine that a P-36A minimum Recirc Isolation MU 21A will need to recirc isolation will need to be be Closed and added to the tagout. _____ _____ _____

added to the tagout (P&ID M-231)

4. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that P-36A Suction (C) to determine the P-36A pump Isolation MU-18A will need to be suction Isolation will need to be Closed and added to the tagout. _____ _____ _____

added to the tagout (P&ID M-231)

NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END

4 of 6 EXAMINER ANSWER KEY Component # Component Name Component Position A-306 MU Pump P-36A Electrical Circuit Breaker Breaker Racked Down MU-20A MU Pump P-36A Discharge Isolation Valve Closed MU-21A MU Pump P-36A Minimum Recirc Isolation Valve Closed MU-18A MU Pump P-36A Suction Isolation Valve Closed

5 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • The plant is at 100% power.
  • A bad inboard seal leak is present on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A.
  • A Danger Tag will need to be generated to isolate this inboard seal leak.
  • No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.

INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS has directed you to identify the components that need to be danger tagged to electrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A to isolate the seal leak.

Also provide the component danger tag position required.

6 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY Component # Component Name Danger Tag Position

EPrint E-5 Sheet 1 M231, sh. 1 Page 1 of 5 ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE UNIT: 1 REV # 1 DATE: ______________________________

JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - Radiation Control TASK: Ability to comply with radiation work permit requirements JTA#: ANO1-RO-DHR-NORM-2 KA VALUE RO: 3.5 SRO: 3.6 KA

REFERENCE:

2.3.7 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO:

TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR:_________ CLASSROOM: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE:_____________ SIMULATOR: Classroom: ________X_______

POSITION EVALUATED: RO:____X______ SRO:___________

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:______ Classroom:__X___

TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___X________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): RWP 2016-1002, P-34A survey map, EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

Page 2 of 5 ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

INITIAL PLANT CONDITIONS Decay Heat Removal Pump P-34A has indications of a leak on the pump inboard seal.

The SM/CRS has directed you to quantify the leakage from the P-34A pump inboard seal.

Your total dose for the year is currently 1950 mrem.

You are a qualified CAT 3 Advanced Rad Worker.

TASK STANDARD:

Referred to the attached RWP, 2016-1002 Task 1 and P-34A pump room survey map.

Using the above information, determined:

MAXIMUM stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area is 26.1 minutes.

Required protective clothing requirements are single set of anti-Cs.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: RWP 2016-1002, P-34A survey map .

SIMULATOR SETUP: NA

Page 3 of 5 ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE INITIATING CUE:

Use the attached RWP, 2016-1002 Task 1.

Using the above information, determine your MAXIMUM stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area and the required protective clothing for entry.

(C) PERFORMANCE STEP PERFORMANCE STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT

1. Reviews P-34A Pump survey Examinee determined dose rate of map to determine dose rates in 115 mR/hr at the inboard pump seal.

the vicinity of the inboard pump seal.

(C) 2. Determines stay time based on Examinee determined stay time the given dose in the pump based on RWP limits of 50 mrem inboard seal area not to would allow him to stay at the pump exceed the RWP limits. inboard seal area for 26.1 minutes (-

0.1 minutes).

50 mR X 60 min = 26.1 minutes 115 mR/hr 1 hr (C) 3. Reviews P-34A Pump survey Examinee identified the map for contamination smear contamination levels are > 1000 data to determine the dpm/100 cm 2 but less than 100,000 _____ _____ _____

protective clothing (PC) dpm/100 cm 2; therefore, a single set requirements for this task. of Anti-Cs is required to enter into the P-34A pump room.

END

Page 4 of 5 ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE ANSWER KEY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Decay Heat Removal Pump P-34A has indications of a leak on the pump inboard seal.

The SM/CRS has directed you to quantify the leakage from the P-34A seal.

Your total dose for the year is currently 1950 mrem.

You are a qualified CAT 3 Advanced Rad Worker.

INITIATING CUE:

Refer to the attached RWP, 20161002 Task 1 and the P-34A pump room survey map.

Using the above information, determine:

Your MAXIMUM stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area.

50 mR X 60 min = 26.1 minutes (-0.1 minutes) (C) 115 mR/hr 1 hr Your Protective Clothing requirements:

Single set of Anti-Cs (C)

Page 5 of 5 ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Decay heat Removal Pump P-34A has indications of a leak on the pump inboard seal.

The SS/CRS has directed you to quantify the leakage from the P-34A seal.

Your total dose for the year is currently 1950 mrem.

You are a qualified CAT 3 Advanced Rad Worker.

INITIATING CUE:

Refer to the attached RWP, 20161002 Task 1 and the P-34A pump room survey map.

Using the above information, determine:

Your MAXIMUM stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area.

Your Protective Clothing requirements:

Survey: ANO-1606-0004 ANO Thursday, June 30, 2016 Template: 1a1-05_jpg Page 1 of 1 Details Smear Data (DPM/100cm2) 1 20000 DPM Unit: 1 2 25000 DPM Building: RAB 3 30000 DPM Elevation: 317 4 35000 DPM Room: 13 RxPwr: 100 LAS Data (ccpm/LAS)

Template: 1a1-05_jpg 1 6000 ccpm/LAS Frequency: 10CFR50.75G Decomm 2 <100 ccpm/LAS Survey Date: 08/22/2016 15:58 3 <100 ccpm/LAS Status: In-Progress 4 <100 ccpm/LAS Rwp: 20161001 B/G to Alpha Ratio Hydro Inj Rate: NA Surveyed By: Harrell, John Alpha Data (DPM/100cm2) Badge: 20970 Reviewed By:

DPM Notes:

Instruments Used Instrument: LM-177 CHP-CR-148 Cal Due Date: 7/31/2016 SrcChk Date: 6/29/2016 DC & Bkg: NA NA MDA: NA Instrument: 9-3 CHP-DR-331 Cal Due Date: 12/31/2016 SrcChk Date: 6/29/2016 DC & Bkg: NA NA MDA: NA

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information RWP

Title:

OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES UNIT-1 RWP No.:

20161002 Rev. 00 Comments:

  • 20161002*

RWP Type: SPECIFIC RWP Status: Begin Date: Close On Date:

ACTIVE 1/1/2016 12/31/2016 Prepared By: NICKELS, THOMAS W Job Supervisor: Jeff Horton Estimated Dose: Estimated Hours: Actual Dose: Actual Hours:

528 mrem 14,400.00 293 mrem 9,041.99 Locations Buildings Elevations Rooms LOW LEVEL RADWASTE BUILDING 354 NON-LOCKED HIGH RADIATION AREA OLD RADWASTE BUILDING 354 NON-LOCKED HIGH RADIATION AREA OUTSIDE CONTROLLED ACCESS ALL OUTSIDE CONTROLLED ACCESS UNIT 1 AUXILIARY BUILDING ALL NON-LOCKED HIGH RADIATION AREA Radiological Conditions Description Value Unit Smear data is in dpm/100 cm2 unless otherwise noted. <1K - 40K DPM/100CM2 General area gamma dose rates are in mrem/hour unless otherwise noted. 0.1 - 200 MILLIREM/HOUR Tasks Task Description Status 1 OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES UNIT-1 Active 2 OPERATIONS TRAINEE ACTIVITIES UNIT-1 Active Requirements Requirement Groups Requirement Descriptions N/A Additional Instructions Instruction 1:

Instruction 2:

Instruction 3:

Approvals Approver Title Name Date ALARA REVIEW STELL, RANDALL E 12/22/2015 RWP PREPARER STELL, RANDALL E 12/22/2015 RP SUPERVISOR LYNCH, BERT A 12/22/2015 Attachments N/A Page 1 of 7

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information RWP No.: 20161002 Task Number: 1 Rev.: 00 Task

Description:

OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES UNIT-1 Task Status: Active Estimate Dose: 420.00 Estimate Hours: 12,000.00 Hot Particle: Hi-Contamination:

Hi-Rad: Yes No Locked Hi-Rad: No No Alarm Settings Dose Alarm (mrem) 50.00 Dose Rate (mrem/hr) 150.00 Requirements Requirement Groups Requirement Descriptions Contamination Control All materials are required to be surveyed in a small articles monitor or hand frisked by RP (with RP Supervisor approval) PRIOR TO unconditional release from a Radiologically Controlled Area.

IF the RCA is a satellite RCA and a "Contamination Area" is entered, THEN the radworker should perform a whole body frisk and proceed to the nearest whole body contamination monitor (PCM-1B or equivalent).

IF the RCA is a satellite RCA with no whole body contamination monitor available, THEN the radworker should: a) perform a hand and foot frisk. b) IF the frisk indicates contamination is present, THEN contact RP. c) IF the frisk DOES NOT indicate the presence of contamination, THEN proceed to the nearest whole body contamination monitor and gamma sensitive monitor.

Notify RP prior to exposing a contaminated surface or opening a contaminated system.

Obey the monitoring instructions posted at the RCA exit point Upon exit of an RCA, whole body monitoring is required utilizing a whole body contamination monitor (PCM-1B or equivalent). A whole body gamma monitor must also be cleared (PM-7 or equivalent).

Upon exiting areas posted as "Contamination Area", perform a hand and foot frisk at the designated frisker location.

Use RP approved mats or pads when kneeling, sitting or laying in contaminated areas.

Use face shield for activities that have increased risk of facial contamination. These activities include working with contaminated components overhead, or having a body position that presents the potential for facial contamination.

With RP approval, reaching across a contamination boundary is permitted using surgeon's gloves OR cotton liners with rubber gloves. When reaching into the area of higher contamination, gloves must be removed when hands are returned to the lower level side of the boundary.

Dosimetry Requirements FOR WORK IN HIGH RADIATION AREAS - If your work conditions are in OR will cause hearing impairment (such as work in a high noise area, use of a communications headset, etc.)

THEN the use of an EAD amplifying device (PAM) is required.

If an EAD dose alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Immediately leave the RCA. 3) Notify RP.

If an EAD dose rate alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Back out of the immediate area until the alarm clears. 3) Notify others in your work crew. 4) Immediately notify RP for further instructions.

Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areas where your ability to hear is diminished.

Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areas where your ability to hear is diminished.

Whole body DLR and EAD required for entry.

Additional Instructions Page 2 of 7

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information Instruction 1:

RWP No.: 20161002 Task Number: 1 Rev.: 00 Requirements Requirement Groups Requirement Descriptions Engineering Controls When venting or draining, monitor the rate of system drain to ensure the rate of drain does NOT exceed the capacity of the floor drain.

Exposure Reduction Use Low Dose Waiting Areas whenever possible to minimize exposure.

Protective Requirements All joints between Anti-C gloves /sleeves and Anti-C ankles/ booties must be taped.

Entry into Contamination Areas require single Anti-Cs.

Entry into High Contamination Areas require double Anti-Cs .

RP Coverage A "Cat 3 Advanced Radworker" may enter posted High Radiation Areas using a gamma sensitive RP instrument to monitor dose rates. (NOTE: An EAD is NOT an appropriate survey instrument. LHRA/ VHRA entry requires continuous RP coverage.).

Contact RP Supervisor or RP tech prior to entry to verify adequate RP coverage and contamination controls for your work activity. RP is not required to be notified for entries to the Auxiliary Building to perform routine activities that do not involve High Radiation Areas, Contamination Areas, overhead entry or system breaches.

Entry into High Radiation Areas requires a radiological brief from RP, AND an electronic alarming dosimeter (EAD) to meet Tech Spec monitoring requirements.

Initial / Intermittent RP coverage is required for entry into High Radiation Areas.

Notify RP when performing operations activities which could change plant radiological conditions. For example venting/draining radioactive systems, performing degas or decay heat/shutdown cooling operations, or other non routine system functions.

Radiological Conditions Contact Radwaste Personnel for radiological conditions in the Radwaste Buildings.

Radiological conditions should be reviewed to ensure awareness of conditions in your work area. This information can be obtained from either a Status Board or RP personnel.

Respiratory Protection Based on historical and current data, the airborne radioactivity is less than 30 percent of a DAC. Respiratory protection is not required unless otherwise directed by RP Supervision.

Special Radiological Requirements Critical Step - Prior to movement of irradiated fuel or other irradiated materials, notify RP Shift Tech or RP Supervisor that movement of fuel / irradiated components is going to occur.

DO NOT move fuel or irradiated components near cask loading gate or tilt pit gate when the adjacent pit is drained as this can result in high general area dose rates.

The prerequisite for a secondary resin transfer include 1) Secure the fill head such that changes in pressure will not cause a spill. 2) Conduct a walkdown (pre-transfer) to ensure that hose connections and leak integrity is satisfactory. 3) Construct a berm sufficient to contain the material being transferred.

Additional Requirement: -Critical Step - Ensure ARM is installed on the bridge and is operation prior to performing any fuel movements. The ARM alarm set point is determined by RP supervision.

Stop Work Criteria Critical Step - Indications either from local samples or remote indication (CAM) of airborne radioactivity in quantities in excess of 30 percent of a DAC.

Critical Step - Loss of control of radioactive material such that loose surface contamination outside of any protective measures is greater than area postings Critical Step - Radiation dose rates in the immediate area are greater than the EAD dose rate alarm set point.

CRitical Step - Work involving alpha contamination greater than or equal to 100 dpm/100cm2 CAN NOT be worked on a General RWP.

Page 3 of 7

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information RWP No.: 20161002 Task Number: 1 Rev.: 00 Additional Instructions Instruction 1:

Instruction 2:

Instruction 3:

Instruction 4:

Instruction 5:

Attachments N/A Page 4 of 7

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information RWP No.: 20161002 Task Number: 2 Rev.: 00 Task

Description:

OPERATIONS TRAINEE ACTIVITIES UNIT-1 Task Status: Active Estimate Dose: 108.00 Estimate Hours: 2,400.00 Hot Particle: Hi-Contamination:

Hi-Rad: Yes No Locked Hi-Rad: No No Alarm Settings Dose Alarm (mrem) 10.00 Dose Rate (mrem/hr) 100.00 Requirements Requirement Groups Requirement Descriptions Contamination Control All materials are required to be surveyed in a small articles monitor or hand frisked by RP (with RP Supervisor approval) PRIOR TO unconditional release from a Radiologically Controlled Area.

IF the RCA is a satellite RCA and a "Contamination Area" is entered, THEN the radworker should perform a whole body frisk and proceed to the nearest whole body contamination monitor (PCM-1B or equivalent).

IF the RCA is a satellite RCA with no whole body contamination monitor available, THEN the radworker should: a) perform a hand and foot frisk. b) IF the frisk indicates contamination is present, THEN contact RP. c) IF the frisk DOES NOT indicate the presence of contamination, THEN proceed to the nearest whole body contamination monitor and gamma sensitive monitor.

Notify RP prior to exposing a contaminated surface or opening a contaminated system.

Obey the monitoring instructions posted at the RCA exit point Upon exit of an RCA, whole body monitoring is required utilizing a whole body contamination monitor (PCM-1B or equivalent). A whole body gamma monitor must also be cleared (PM-7 or equivalent).

Upon exiting areas posted as "Contamination Area", perform a hand and foot frisk at the designated frisker location.

Use RP approved mats or pads when kneeling, sitting or laying in contaminated areas.

Use face shield for activities that have increased risk of facial contamination. These activities include working with contaminated components overhead, or having a body position that presents the potential for facial contamination.

With RP approval, reaching across a contamination boundary is permitted using surgeon's gloves OR cotton liners with rubber gloves. When reaching into the area of higher contamination, gloves must be removed when hands are returned to the lower level side of the boundary.

Dosimetry Requirements FOR WORK IN HIGH RADIATION AREAS - If your work conditions are in OR will cause hearing impairment (such as work in a high noise area, use of a communications headset, etc.)

THEN the use of an EAD amplifying device (PAM) is required.

If an EAD dose alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Immediately leave the RCA. 3) Notify RP.

If an EAD dose rate alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Back out of the immediate area until the alarm clears. 3) Notify others in your work crew. 4) Immediately notify RP for further instructions.

Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areas where your ability to hear is diminished.

Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areas where your ability to hear is diminished.

Whole body DLR and EAD required for entry.

Additional Instructions Instruction 1:

Page 5 of 7

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information RWP No.: 20161002 Task Number: 2 Rev.: 00 Requirements Requirement Groups Requirement Descriptions Engineering Controls When venting or draining, monitor the rate of system drain to ensure the rate of drain does NOT exceed the capacity of the floor drain.

Exposure Reduction Use Low Dose Waiting Areas whenever possible to minimize exposure.

Protective Requirements All joints between Anti-C gloves /sleeves and Anti-C ankles/ booties must be taped.

Entry into Contamination Areas require single Anti-Cs.

Entry into High Contamination Areas require double Anti-Cs .

RP Coverage A "Cat 3 Advanced Radworker" may enter posted High Radiation Areas using a gamma sensitive RP instrument to monitor dose rates. (NOTE: An EAD is NOT an appropriate survey instrument. LHRA/ VHRA entry requires continuous RP coverage.).

Contact RP Supervisor or RP tech prior to entry to verify adequate RP coverage and contamination controls for your work activity. RP is not required to be notified for entries to the Auxiliary Building to perform routine activities that do not involve High Radiation Areas, Contamination Areas, overhead entry or system breaches.

Entry into High Radiation Areas requires a radiological brief from RP, AND an electronic alarming dosimeter (EAD) to meet Tech Spec monitoring requirements.

Initial / Intermittent RP coverage is required for entry into High Radiation Areas.

Notify RP when performing operations activities which could change plant radiological conditions. For example venting/draining radioactive systems, performing degas or decay heat/shutdown cooling operations, or other non routine system functions.

Radiological Conditions Contact Radwaste Personnel for radiological conditions in the Radwaste Buildings.

Radiological conditions should be reviewed to ensure awareness of conditions in your work area. This information can be obtained from either a Status Board or RP personnel.

Respiratory Protection Based on historical and current data, the airborne radioactivity is less than 30 percent of a DAC. Respiratory protection is not required unless otherwise directed by RP Supervision.

Special Radiological Requirements Critical Step - Prior to movement of irradiated fuel or other irradiated materials, notify RP Shift Tech or RP Supervisor that movement of fuel / irradiated components is going to occur.

DO NOT move fuel or irradiated components near cask loading gate or tilt pit gate when the adjacent pit is drained as this can result in high general area dose rates.

The prerequisite for a secondary resin transfer include 1) Secure the fill head such that changes in pressure will not cause a spill. 2) Conduct a walkdown (pre-transfer) to ensure that hose connections and leak integrity is satisfactory. 3) Construct a berm sufficient to contain the material being transferred.

Additional Requirement: -Critical Step - Ensure ARM is installed on the bridge and is operation prior to performing any fuel movements. The ARM alarm set point is determined by RP supervision.

Stop Work Criteria Critical Step - Indications either from local samples or remote indication (CAM) of airborne radioactivity in quantities in excess of 30 percent of a DAC.

Critical Step - Loss of control of radioactive material such that loose surface contamination outside of any protective measures is greater than area postings Critical Step - Radiation dose rates in the immediate area are greater than the EAD dose rate alarm set point.

CRitical Step - Work involving alpha contamination greater than or equal to 100 dpm/100cm2 CAN NOT be worked on a General RWP.

Page 6 of 7

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear One RADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT

          • NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****

Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit Information RWP No.: 20161002 Task Number: 2 Rev.: 00 Additional Instructions Instruction 1:

Instruction 2:

Instruction 3:

Instruction 4:

Instruction 5:

Attachments N/A Page 7 of 7

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A5

1 of 6 UNIT: 1 REV # 0 DATE: ______________________________

TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A5)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - CONDUCT OF OPERATIONS TASK: PERFORM WORKING HOUR HISTORY REVIEW AND SELECT ELIGIBLE OPERATORS TO FILL VACANCY DUE TO ILLNESS OF THE ONCOMING ATC WATCH JTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-195/ANO-SRO-ADMIN-NORM-191 KA VALUE RO: 2.9 SRO: 3.9 KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.5 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO: X TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM: PERFORM POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________ SRO:___________

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:______ LAB:_____

TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): EN-OM-123, REV. 12 EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 6 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power operations. The scheduled day-shift oncoming ATC operator has called in and stated he will not be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness.

The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met. PQ&S Computer program is not available.

TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly selected operators A, C and E that are available to come in to fill the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> dayshift ATC watch vacancy in accordance with the work hour limits for covered individuals and correctly stated why operators B and D cannot come in.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: Working Hour History for the last 14 days for Operators A,B,C,D, and E

3 of 6 INITIATING CUE:

The Shift Manager has directed you to review the work history of five eligible qualified operators and determine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATC vacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordance with the Fatigue Management Program. Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.

CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT NOTE: Provide examinee with a copy of the work history or the five eligible candidates.

1. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator A is (C) Operator A. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any _____ _____ _____

working hour limits.

2. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator B is NOT (C) Operator B. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC _____ _____ _____

watch vacancy because the operator will exceed the Maximum of 72 work hours in any 7 day period working hour limit.

3. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator C is (C) Operator C. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any _____ _____ _____

working hour limits.

4. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator D is NOT (C) Operator D. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy because the operator _____ _____ _____

will not have had a Minimum 34-hour break in any 9-day period working hour limit.

5. Review working hour history for Determines that Operator E is (C) Operator E. eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits.

NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END

4 of 6 EXAMINER ANSWER KEY Operator Eligible/Not Eligible Reason (if not eligible)

Operator A Eligible (C)

Operator B Not Eligible (C) Will Exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period. (C)

Operator C Eligible (C)

Operator D Not Eligible (C) No 34 hour3.935185e-4 days <br />0.00944 hours <br />5.621693e-5 weeks <br />1.2937e-5 months <br /> break in a 9 day period. (C)

Operator E Eligible (C)

5 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • The plant is at 100% power operations.
  • The scheduled day-shift oncoming ATC operator has called in and stated he will not be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness.
  • The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met.
  • PQ&S computer program is not available.

INITIATING CUE:

The Shift Manager has directed you to review the work history of five eligible qualified operators and determine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATC vacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordance with the Fatigue Management Program.

Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.

6 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY Operator Eligible/Not Eligible Reason (if not eligible)

Operator A Operator B Operator C Operator D Operator E

Operator A 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'A'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule D OFF OFF OFF N N N OFF OFF D D D D Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator B 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'B'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule OFF D D OFF OFF OFF OFF N N N N N N Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator C 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'C'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule OFF OFF D D D D Off OFF N N N N Off Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator D 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'D'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule N OFF OFF OFF D D D OFF D D D D D Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123 Operator E 14 Day work hour history for a covered worker 'E'. In the following Table Day 1 is Today, Day 2 is Yesterday, etc.

DAY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shift Schedule D D OFF OFF OFF N N N OFF OFF D D D Hours Worked 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 TODAY For Shift Schedule 'D' is for day-shift schedule, 'N' is for night-hift schedule Reference EN-OM-123

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A6

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A6) PAGE 1 OF 5 UNIT: 1 REV #: 1 DATE:

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: Conduct of Operations TASK: Perform Spent Fuel Pool Makeup Calculation.

JTA#: ANO1-RO-SFC-NORM-17 KA VALUE RO: 4.6 SRO: 4.6 KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.20 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO: x TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: Classroom: Perform POSITION EVALUATED: RO: SRO:

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE: Classroom:

TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE: PERFORM: X APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 20 Minutes REFERENCE(S): 1104.003, Att. C2 EXAMINEE'S NAME: Logon ID:

EVALUATOR'S NAME:

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY: UNSATISFACTORY:

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

Start Stop Total Time Time Time SIGNED: DATE:

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A6) PAGE 2 OF 5 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Given the following Plant conditions:

  • Plant is in refueling Outage 1R26
  • SF Pool level is -0.4 ft.
  • SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm.
  • BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm.
  • Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed.
  • Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is Closed TASK STANDARD:

Determined initial SF Pool volume is 362,843 gallons from Table 2.

Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.

Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.

Determined final SF Pool level is 0.0 +/- 0.1 ft.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

1104.003, Attachment C2 SIMULATOR SETUP:

NA EXAMINER'S NOTES:

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A6) PAGE 3 OF 5 INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SFP to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm. Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed. Determine final SFP Volume and Level.

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARDS (Circle One)

(C) 1. Determine initial SF Pool Determined volume is 362,843 N/A SAT UNSAT volume from Table 2. gallons from Table 2.

2. Record data. Recorded data. N/A SAT UNSAT (C) 3. Determine feed volume to be Determined feed volume to be N/A SAT UNSAT added to SF Pool. 3684 +/- 2 gallons.

(C) 4. Determine final SF Pool Determined final SF Pool volume N/A SAT UNSAT volume. to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.

(C) 5 Determine final SF Pool level Determined final SF Pool level is N/A SAT UNSAT from 0.0 +/- 0.1 ft.

END

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A6) PAGE 4 OF 5 ANSWER KEY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Given the following Plant conditions:

  • Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26.
  • SF Pool level is -0.4 ft.
  • SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm.
  • BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm.
  • Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed.
  • Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is Closed INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SFP to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.

Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.

Determine final SF Pool volume.

Determine final SF Pool level.

Document the results of the review below:

(C) Determined initial SF Pool volume is currently 362,843 gallons from Table 2.

(C) Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.

(C) Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.

(C) Determined final SF Pool level is from 0.0 +/- 0.1 ft.

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A6) PAGE 5 OF 5 EXAMINEEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Given the following Plant conditions:

  • Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26.
  • SF Pool level is -0.4 ft.
  • SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm.
  • BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm.
  • Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed.
  • Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is Closed INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SF Pool to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.

Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.

Determine final SF Pool volume.

Determine final SF Pool level.

Document the results of the review below:

PROC.IWORK PLAN NO. PROCEDUREIWORK PLAN TITLE:

I PAGE: 62 of 153 1104.003 CHEMICAL ADDITION CHANGE: 054 ATTACHMENT 02 Page 1 of 7 SF POOL FEED CALCULATIONS TABLE 1 Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume/Ft Depth SF Pool SF Pool SF Pool + Cask Pit Refueling Incore SF Pool + Cask Pit + Tilt Pit + Tilt Pit Canal Tank (gal/ft) (gallft) (gal/ft) (gal/ft) (gal/ft) (gal/ft) 7,570 8,349 8,845 9,624 11,070 1,141 TABLE 2 Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume (gallons)

SF Pool Elev. Ll-2004 SF Pool SF Pool SF Pool + Cask Pit Refueling Incore (1)

(ft) + Cask Pit + Tilt Pit 4- Tilt Pit Canal Tank 401.5 4-lOft 298,120 330,899 343,537 376,316 401.4 +0.9 ft 297,363 330,064 342,653 375,354 During refueling, 401.3 +0.8ft 296,606 329,229 341,768 374,392 canal level must be 401.2 +O.7ft 295,849 328,394 340,884 373,429 maintained 401.1 +0.6ft 295,092 327,559 339,999 372,467 between -0.5 and 401.0 +0.5ft 294,335 326,725 339,115 371,504 0.OontheSFP Level indicator 400.9 +0.4 ft 293,578 325,890 338,230 370,542 (Ll-2004).

400.8 +0.3 ft 292,821 325,055 337,346 369,580 400.7 +0.2 ft 292,064 324,220 336,461 368,617 400.6 o.ff 291,307 323,385 335,577 367,655 400.5 0.Oft 290,550 322,550 334,692 366,692 342,800 27,400 289,793 321,715 333,808 365.730 341,693 27,286 289 036 320 880 332 923 364 768 340 583 27 172 4002 U3tt 288,2 9 .320 045 t 36b 39 20 33 208..4 403 0A ft 287 522 219.210 33 1541 2 26944 05 28665 3i8,36 33C3 65 otL 28cCu ol 54 329 85 360 9 336 158 1 26.715 83 GE.. 328 95 335 O5fT 26601 ft 444 32 e 93 3334T 26A87 23 3 3.3 6 ...2 3 t 332 83f 26373 3 33 730 26259 r 22J.23 3,3$ 334 9t3 E6 Q 145 846( 31 324 8 16 26,031

, 3992 . 1 3 t 280.109 3 1696J 323,194 354,181 328,409 25,917 ti 4 ft 3991 279,952 , 3iT 322,309 1 353,219 327,302 25,803 399.0 -1.5 ft 279,195 j 310,026T 321,425 j 352,256 326,195 25,689 (1) Tilt Pit volume from CR-ANO-1-2008-1859-CA2,

I PROC.IWORKPLANNO.

I PROCEDIJREIWORKPLANTITLE: I PAGE: 63of153 1104.003 CHEMICAL ADDITION CHANGE: 054 IJTACHMENT P2 Page 2 of 7 CT+/-O Prforoance of this section requirs vication that feed voluoe will not resuit in overflowing of the SFP oer attached <<olumes.

  • It is necessary to coordinate with<p Fuel Personnel when <aking up to the Spent- Fuei Pool durIng try Ful tpertions.
  • Step 1.0 is sZe1y perforoed to deterrrine <;o+/-uo.e of boric acid at a knoin concentration to achieve a desired final SFP boron concentration, and eneral1y would not he used.

o) IF it is desired to calculate the voiume of boric acid required to V achieve a desired final SFP concentration, THEN perform the following:

Determine initial SF Pool volume from TABLE 2. Interpolate if necessary.

1.1.1 iF appropriate, THEN add Refueling Canal and Ircore Tank volume.

v = Initial 1olume from TABLE u

<1.2 Record <he folowin data:

ppnB Initial SF Po1 oncentration P

JQ 3ga

i PROCJWORK PLAN NO.

1104.003 PROCEDUREIWORKPLANTITLE:

CHEMICAL ADDITION I PAGE: 64of 153 I I CHANGE: 054 ATLAIRHEIJI 22 Page 3 Df 7 1.4 Derernine final SF Pool voume nirl volume = ( ) + ( 1 V

Final volune = 3 ) + 3I He If final SF Pool level is deterninedfibe grefier than -f 1. 2 ft or greater than zero when refuelina, hen ode addition will ha-re to be vaSe in separare operations.

1 5 Deterine final SF Pool level from TABLE 2, interpolate as necessary.

IF final volume greater than table values 1 II THEN a second addition will have to be done following a level reduction.

lie other sections of his Aliachnent as recited.

li needed, THEN finS the vluve of feed Vrj, ANL use TABLE 1 for SF Poi gal ft.

ES Refueling loyal or Incore lirk 1s nnec-i li SF Too inc Systm liEd id the prpniat zaVf o lie SF Pool al/fi.

d Foi v ia eI] /

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A7

1 of 6 UNIT: 1 REV # 0 DATE: ______________________________

TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - EQUIPMENT CONTROL TASK: PERFORM REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF COMPONENT LIST AND SEQUENCE OF TAGGING FOR A INBOARD SEAL LEAK ON MAKEUP PURIFICATION PUMP P-36A JTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-076 KA VALUE RO: 4.1 SRO: 4.3 KA

REFERENCE:

2.2.13 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: SRO: X TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:_ PERFORM_

POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________ SRO: X ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:_____ CLASSROOM: X TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): EN-OP-102, REV. 18, PROTECTIVE AND CAUTION TAGGING; P&ID M-231; ELECTRICAL PRINT E-5 ONE LINE DRAWING FOR ENGINEERED SAFEGUARD BUSES A3 AND A4.

EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 6 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power. A bad inboard seal leak is present on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A. An off shift RO has identified a list of components needed to isolate P-36A to stop the seal leak. No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.

TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly identify three errors on the provided list and should not approve of sending this list to the tagging group.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: P&ID M-231 Makeup & Purification System Drawing; Electrical Print E-5 one line drawing for Engineered Safeguard Buses A3 and A4.

3 of 6 INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS has directed you to review the list of components needed to generate the tagout to electrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A. Also review the tag hanging sequence. Either approve this list and provide it to the tagging group to prepare a tagout or identify and markup any errors, provide correction comments, and return them to be corrected.

CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT NOTE: Provide examinee with a copy of E-Print E-5 and P&ID M-231

1. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that P-36A Discharge (C) to determine if Tag Sequence Item Isolation MU-20A instead of MU-20B 1 MU-20B should be added to the should be added to the tagout.

requested tagout. (P&ID M-231) _____ _____ _____

Note: The Candidate may direct that a Caution Tag be added to be placed on the MU Purification Pump P-36A Remote Hand Switch.

2. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that P-36A Suction to determine if Tag Sequence Item Isolation MU-18A should be Closed 2 MU-18A should be added to the and added to the tagout.

tagout. (P&ID M-231) _____ _____ _____

3. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that Electrical Circuit (C) to determine if Tag Sequence Item Breaker A-306 will need to be 3 A-306 should be added to the Breaker Racked Down and added tagout. (E-Print E-5 or OP- to the tagout. However, the breaker 1107.002 Attachment A) should be the first tag hung in the tagging sequence instead of third.
4. Reviews controlled documentation Determines that P-36A Minimum (C) to determine if any other Items Recirc Isolation MU-21A should be should be added to the requested added to the tagout in the Closed tagout. (P&ID M-231) position. _____ _____ _____

(C) 5. After review of the tagging list, Determines that the errors need to be decides to approve or disapprove corrected and should NOT be the suggested tagging list and approved and sent to the tagging sequence. group for tagout preparations. _____ _____ _____

NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END

4 of 6 EXAMINER ANSWER KEY Correct Tag Component # Component Name Component Sequence Sequence Danger Tag Position 2 1 MU Pump P-36A MU-20B(1) Discharge Isolation Closed Valve 3 2 MU Pump P-36A MU-18A (2) Closed Suction Isolation Valve 1 3 MU Pump P-36A Breaker Racked A-306(3) Electrical Circuit Down Breaker Approved and sent to tagging group for tagout preparation: YES ______ NO ______(5)

If NO Why Not? (6)

(1) In Tag Sequence 1 MU-20A should be added instead of MU-20B (C)

(2) No errors associated with Tag Sequence 2 but should be on the tagout.

(3) Breaker should be the first component in the tagging sequence instead of third (see Correct Sequence) (C)

(4) Should Determine that P-36A Minimum Recirc Isolation MU-21A should be added to the tagout in the Closed position. (C)

(5) NO Should be selected (C)

(6) Typos, error in the sequence of items, and missing a required component.

5 of 6 EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • The plant is at 100% power.
  • A bad inboard seal leak is present on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A.
  • An off shift RO has identified a list of components needed to generate a tagout to isolate P-36A to stop the seal leak.
  • No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.

INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS has directed you to review the list of components needed to generate the tagout to electrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A.

Also review the tag hanging sequence.

Either approve this list and provide it to the tagging group to prepare a tagout or identify and markup any errors, provide correction comments, and return them to be corrected.

EXAMINEES COPY

6 of 6 Tag Component # Component Name Component Sequence Danger Tag Position MU Pump P-36A Discharge 1 MU-20B Closed Isolation Valve MU Pump P-36A Suction 2 MU-18A Closed Isolation Valve MU Pump P-36A Electrical Breaker Racked 3 A-306 Circuit Breaker Down Approved and sent to tagging group for tagout preparation: YES ______ NO_______.

If NO Why Not?

M231, sh. 1 EPrint E-5 Sheet 1 Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A8

1 of 7 UNIT: 1 REV # 0 DATE: ______________________________

TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - RADIATION CONTROL TASK: PROVIDED WITH THE DOSE HISTORY FOR 5 INDIVIDUALS DETERMINE WHICH OF THE 5 ARE ELIGIBLE FOR PERFORMING A CONTAINMENT ENTRY DURING AN UNUSUAL EVENT.

JTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-189 KA VALUE RO: 3.2 SRO: 3.7 KA

REFERENCE:

2.3.4 APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: SRO: X TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: X SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:_ PERFORM_

POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________ SRO:___________

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:_____ CLASSROOM: X TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM: X APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 20 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): EN-RP-201 REV. 04, DOSIMETRY ADMINISTRATION; EN-RP-203 REV. 07, DOSE ASSESSMENT; OP-1903.033 CHANGE 023, PROTECTIVE ACTION GUIDELINES FOR RESCUE REPAIR &

DAMAGE CONTROL TEAMS.

EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 7 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: Unit 1 is at 100% Power. There are indications of a 30 gpm RCS leak in the Pressurizer area. Unit 1 has declared an Unusual Event for this condition.

Radiation Protection has completed a containment entry to assess the radiological conditions in the area of an isolation valve that can be used to isolate the leak on a PZR Pressure instrument tubing. Radiological conditions are as follows: General area external whole body dose rates near the isolation valve is 200 mrem/hour.

Dose due to airborne radioactivity in the area of the isolation valve has been assessed using EN-OP-203 and will provide 0.1 ALI/hour (Annual Limit on Intake) of Committed Effective Dose Equivalent (CEDE. The task to isolate the leak will take 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />. No extension of any dose limits has been approved for this task. Operator E is a Declared Pregnant Woman (DPW). All of the potential operators being accessed for this task have a NRC form 4 on file for all past exposure. All of the potential operators have a Lifetime TEDE (Total Effective Dose Equivalent) of Less than 10 Rem.

TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly identified that operators C and D can go into the Containment and isolate the 30 gpm RCS leak without exceeding their annual Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) limit .

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: Dose history for five operators with a spreadsheet to use in determining eligibility.

3 of 7 INITIATING CUE:

The Shift Manager has directed you to review the dose history of five Waste Control Operators and determine which one(s) have the available dose margin to go into Containment and isolate the RCS leak without exceeding the whole body TEDE required site dose limit for these plant conditions. Assume all dose is received at the valve during the isolation task. Assume no respiratory protection will be used for this task.

CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT NOTE: Provide examinee with the dose history spreadsheet attached to this JPM.

1. Reviews controlled Determines that the Routine Annual documentation to determine what Administrative Guidelines of EN-RP-the required TEDE dose limits are 201 are in effect and the TEDE dose for the plant conditions. limit is 2000 mrem for operators A through D and 50mrem/month or 400 mrem/gestation period for operator E. _____ _____ _____
2. Calculates the effective whole Determines that the external whole (C) body external dose for this task body dose for this will be 200 based on the general area dose mrem/hour x 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> = 100 mrem.

rates of 200 mrem/hour. _____ _____ _____

3. Calculates what the CEDE for 0.1 Determines that the airborne CEDE for (C) ALI/hour (Annual Limit on Intake) the area will be 0.1 x 5 Rem = 500 will be for the 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> task mrem/hour. Therefore the CEDE for completion time. this task will be 500 x 0.5 hour5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> = 250 mrem. _____ _____ _____
4. Calculates the whole body TEDE Determines that whole body TEDE dose (C) for the task by adding the is equal to 100 mrem + 250 mrem =

external whole body dose and the 350 mrem.

internal dose. _____ _____ _____

5. Calculates the accumulated dose (Operator A) 1800 + 350 = 2150 mrem (C) each operator would have if they (Operator B) 1700 + 350 = 2050 mrem completed the required isolation (Operator C) 1600 + 350 = 1950 mrem task. (Operator D) 1500 + 350 = 1850 mrem (Operator E) 200 + 350 = 550 mrem _____ _____ _____

4 of 7 (C) 6. Reviews what each operators A) 2150 mrem > 2000 mrem final whole body TEDE dose therefore Operator A IS NOT would be if they performed the eligible.

task and compares this dose to B) 2050 mrem > 2000 mrem the required limit for each therefore Operator B IS NOT operator and determines which eligible.

ones are eligible or not eligible. C) 1950 mrem < 2000 mrem (2000 mrem for operators A Therefore Operator C IS through D and 50mrem/month or eligible.

400 mrem/gestation period for D) 1850 mrem < 2000 mrem operator E) Therefore Operator D IS eligible.

E) 550 mrem > 50mrem/month and >400 mrem/gestation period Therefore Operator E is NOT eligible. _____ _____ _____

NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END

5 of 7 EXAMINER ANSWER KEY Operator Accumulated Accumulated Eligible/Not Eligible dose for the dose if task is current Year performed by operator Operator A 1800 mrem 2150 mrem Not Eligible (C)

Operator B 1700 mrem 2050 mrem Not Eligible (C)

Operator C 1600 mrem 1950 mrem Eligible (C)

Operator D 1500 mrem 1850 mrem Eligible (C)

Operator E 200 mrem 550 mrem Not Eligible (C)

Routine Annual Administrative Guidelines of EN-RP-201 are in effect and the whole body TEDE dose limit is 2000 mrem for operators A through D and 50 mrem/month or 400 mrem/gestation period for operator E.

6 of 7 EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • Unit 1 is at 100% Power.
  • There are indications of a 30 gpm RCS leak in the Pressurizer area.
  • Unit 1 has declared an Unusual Event for this condition.
  • Radiation Protection has completed a containment entry to assess the radiological conditions in the area of an isolation valve that can be used to isolate the leak on a PZR Pressure instrument tubing.
  • Radiological conditions are as follows:

o General area external whole body dose rates near the isolation valve is 200 mrem/hour.

o Dose due to airborne radioactivity in the area of the isolation valve has been assessed using EN-OP-203 and will provide 0.1 ALI/hour (Annual Limit on Intake) of Committed Effective Dose Equivalent (CEDE).

  • The task to isolate the leak will take 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />.
  • No extension of any dose limits has been approved for this task.
  • Operator E is a Declared Pregnant Woman (DPW).
  • All of the potential operators being accessed for this task have a NRC form 4 on file for all past exposure.
  • All of the potential operators have a Lifetime TEDE (Total Effective Dose Equivalent) of Less than 10 Rem.

INITIATING CUE:

The Shift Manager has directed you to review the dose history of five Waste Control Operators and determine which one(s) have the available dose margin to go into Containment and isolate the RCS leak without exceeding the whole body TEDE required site dose limit for these plant conditions.

Assume all dose is received at the valve during the isolation task.

Assume no respiratory protection will be used for this task.

7 of 7 EXAMINEES COPY Operator Accumulated Accumulated Eligible/Not Eligible dose for the dose if task is current Year performed by operator Operator A 1800 mrem Operator B 1700 mrem Operator C 1600 mrem Operator D 1500 mrem Operator E 200 mrem

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A9

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Page 1 of 5 UNIT: 1 REV # 0 DATE: ______________________________

TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)

SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES/PLAN TASK: DETERMINE A PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATION JTA#: ANO-SRO-EPLAN-EMERG-301, Issue Protective Action Recommendation to Offsite Authorities KA VALUE RO: 2.4 SRO: 4.4 KA

REFERENCE:

2.4.44 Knowledge of E Plan PAR APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: SRO: X TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: X OUTSIDE CR:_________ BOTH:________

SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):

PLANT SITE:______ SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:____X_____

POSITION EVALUATED: RO:____N/A___ SRO:_____X_____

ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT:

PLANT SITE:______ SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:________

TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTES REFERENCE(S): 1903.011 REV. 50 and 1903.010 REV. 52 EXAMINEE'S NAME:________________________________ Logon ID: _______________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________

THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:

SATISFACTORY:________________ UNSATISFACTORY:_________________

PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

_____________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time ____________ Total Time SIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________

SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY A QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Page 2 of 5 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:A Failed Fuel condition has occurred on Unit One two hours ago.

The EOF has been activated and is operational. A General Emergency has been declared per FG1, Loss of ANY two barriers AND loss or potential loss of third barrier, two minutes ago. Fuel failure is estimated to be 20%. A release is in progress. Wind direction is from 225 degrees. Dose assessment reports that dose_rates at site boundary are expected to exceed EPA protective action guidelines within 30 minutes based on greater than 1,000 mrem TEDE. THIS JPM IS TIME CRITICAL. _______

TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly chosen and recommended PAR 7 with an _____

evacuation of zones G and K; shelter zones J, L, and M and go indoors for zones H, I, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, and U within or equal to 15 minutes.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: 1903.011 Attachment 6

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Page 3 of 5 INITIATING CUE:

You are the EAL reviewer in the EOF and you are directed to recommend a Protective Action Recommendation to the EOF Director.

CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C) 2, 3 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSAT

1. Consult Attachment 6 of Turned to Attachment 6 of 1903.011, Emergency 1903.011, Protective Action Response/Notifications. Recommendations (PAR) for _____ _____ _____

General Emergency.

(C) 2. Recommend PAR based on Selected PAR No. 7 due to event conditions.

1) First PAR for the event
2) LOSS of the containment fission product barrier based on Dose Assessment reports
3) Expected to exceed 1,000 mrem TEDE in 30 minutes (C) 3. Recommend PAR based on Stated, due to wind direction, event conditions. evacuate zones G and K shelter zones J, L and M go indoors zones H, I, N, O, P, _____ _____ _____

Q, R, S, T, and U NOTE: PAR 7 states that the EOF will recommend Evacuate 5-10 Miles Downwind when safer to do so.

Examinee may state that zones J, L, and M will be evacuated when safer to do so.

(C) 4. Provides the PAR PAR recommendations provided recommendations within the within or equal to 15 minutes of procedural required time limit. the start of the JPM after reading and understanding the Initiating _____ _____ _____

cue.

END

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Page 4 of 5 KEY PAR Recommendation ____7_________ (C)

Evacuate Zones __G and K ________________________ (C)

Shelter Zones ___J, L, and M_______________________ (C)

Go indoors Zones _H, I, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, and U__(C)

JPM Start Time (after candidate understands the initiating cue) ___________.

JPM Stop Time ____________

JPM Duration ______________ (C) ( 15 minutes)

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Page 5 of 5 EXAMINEES COPY JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • A Failed Fuel condition has occurred on Unit One two hours ago.
  • The EOF has been activated and is operational.
  • A General Emergency has been declared per FG1, Loss of ANY two barriers AND loss or potential loss of third barrier, two minutes ago.
  • Fuel failure is estimated to be 20%.
  • A release is in progress.
  • Wind direction is from 225 degrees.
  • Dose assessment reports that dose rates at site boundary are expected to exceed EPA protective action guidelines within 30 minutes based on greater than 1,000 mrem TEDE.
  • THIS JPM IS TIME CRITICAL INITIATING CUE:

You are the EAL reviewer in the EOF and you are directed to recommend a Protective Action Recommendation to the EOF Director and the initial zones to be evacuated, sheltered or go indoors.

Time starts after reading the INITIATING CUE PAR Recommendation ______________

Evacuate Zones __________________________________________

Shelter Zones ____________________________________________

Go indoors Zones _________________________________________

ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 Facility: __Arkansas Nuclear One - Unit 1___ Date of Examination: _8/22/2016_

Exam Level: RO SRO-I SRO-U Operating Test No.: __2016-1__

Control Room Systems:* 8 for RO; 7 for SRO-I; 2 or 3 for SRO-U System / JPM Title Type Code* Safety Function S1 API-RPI Comparison 014 A1.02 (RO 3.2 / SRO 3.6) N/S 1 RO S2 Throttle HPI following ESAS Actuation 013 A4.01 (RO 4.5 / SRO 4.8) A/M/EN/L/S 2 RO / SRO-U / SRO-I S3 Manually Control RCS Pressure with a Pressurizer Spray Valve Failure A/D/S 3 010 A3.02 (RO 3.6 / SRO 3.5)

RO / SRO-I S4 Shutdown RCP P-32A at Power 003 A2.02 (RO 3.7 / SRO 3.9) A/D/E/S 4P RO / SRO-I S5 Pump the Quench Tank 007 A1.01 (RO 2.9 / SRO 3.1) D/S 5 RO / SRO-I S6 Transfer Buses From Unit Aux Transformer to a Startup Transformer A/N/S 6 062 A4.07 (RO 3.1 / SRO 3.1)

RO / SRO-I S7 Verify Main Condenser Process Radiation Monitor (RI3632) Alarm Setpoint A/L/N/S 7 073 A4.02 (RO 3.7 / SRO 3.7)

RO / SRO-U / SRO-I

ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 S8 Shift ICW Pumps 008 A4.01 (RO 3.3 / SRO 3.1) D/S 8 RO / SRO-I In-Plant Systems* (3 for RO); (3 for SRO-I); (3 or 2 for SRO-U)

P1 Purge the Main Generator During Emergency Conditions (A1JPM-RO-GEN02)

A/M/E/L 8 055 EA1.04 (RO 3.5 / SRO 3.9)

RO / SRO-U / SRO-I P2 Respond to Control Rod Drive Stator High Temperature (A1JPM-RO-CRD04)

D/E 1 001 A2.01 (RO 3.1 / SRO 3.7)

RO / SRO-U / SRO-I P3 Align T-16A (Treated Waste Monitoring Tank) for Recirc / Sample N/R 9 068 A2.02 (RO 2.7 / SRO 2.8)

RO / SRO-U / SRO-I

  • All RO and SRO-I control room (and in-plant) systems must be different and serve different safety functions; all five SRO-U systems must serve different safety functions; in-plant systems and functions may overlap those tested in the control room.
  • Type Codes Criteria for RO / SRO-I / SRO-U A)lternate path 4-6 (6) / 4-6 (6) / 2-3 (3)

(C)ontrol room 8 (8) / 7 (7) / 2-3 (2)

(D)irect from bank 9 (5) / 8 (5) / 4 (1)

(E)mergency or abnormal in-plant 1 (3) / 1 (3) / 1 (2)

(EN)gineered safety feature 1 (1) / 1 (1) / 1 (1) (control room system)

(L)ow-Power / Shutdown 1 (3) / 1 (3) / 1 (3)

(N)ew or (M)odified from bank including 1(A) 2 (6) / 2 (5) / 1 (4)

(P)revious 2 exams 3 (0) / 3 (0) / 2 (0) (randomly selected)

(R)CA 1 (1) / 1 (1) / 1 (1)

(S)imulator

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam In-plant JPM P1

Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 1 Date:

JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-GEN02 (P1)

System/Duty Area: Turbine Generator Gas System Task: Purging Hydrogen with C02 During Emergency Conditions (Station Blackout)

JTA# ANO1-RO-EOP-EMERG-36 and ANO1-SRO-EOP-EMERG-37 KA Value RO 3.5 SRO 3.9 KA Reference 055 EA1.04 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR: Outside CR: X Both:

Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulate Simulator: Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Simulator : Plant Site: X Lab:

Testing Method: Simulate: X Perform:

Approximate Completion Time In Minutes: 20 Minutes Reference(s): 1106.002 Generator Hydrogen System Examinee's Name: Logon ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date:
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-GEN02 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

A station blackout is in progress and it is necessary to reduce loads on the station batteries.

To accomplish this, it is necessary to purge the hydrogen from the generator with C02 to secure the Seal Oil System DC pump.

TASK STANDARD:

Main generator was purged with 15 bottles of C02. Generator pressure is ~zero.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

1106.002 Generator Hydrogen System, Section 15.0 Purging Hydrogen with C02 During Emergency Conditions.

This is an alternate path JPM

Page 3 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-GEN02 INITIATING CUE: The SM/CRS directs you to purge the Main Generator with 15 bottles of C02 per 1106.002 Section 15.0.

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT TRANSITION NOTE: The examinee should proceed to the Isophase bus deck on 354 elevation of the turbine building.

EXAMINER NOTE: During a Blackout, generator pressure may be read on the following:

  • Gen H2 Cond Mon Press (PI-9003), located beside the Generator Condition Monitor (AI-9002).
  • Main Generator Pressure (PI-8370), located inside upper door of H2 Control Panel (M-27).
  • Gen H2/Fan Press on front of H2 Control Panel (M-27).

15.1.1. Verify H2 Supply to Top of Generator valve Operator verified H2 Supply is closed. to Top of Generator valve (H2-132) is closed. ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

H2-132 is closed.

15.1.2. Open H2 Vent, Lead Box valve H2-113. Operator opened H2 Vent, Lead Box valve H2-113.

POSITIVE CUE:

C H2-113 is open. ____ ____ ____

NEGATIVE CUE:

H2 pressure is NOT lowering on any working pressure indicator.

15.1.3. Open H2 Vent from Top of Generator Operator opened H2 Vent valve, H2-112. from Top of Generator valve H2-112.

C POSITIVE CUE:

H2-112 is open. Generator pressure is lowering. ____ ____ ____

NEGATIVE CUE:

H2 pressure is NOT lowering on any working pressure indicator.

EXAMINER NOTE: To facilitate the next step inform the examinee that generator pressure is 0 psig when the examinee checks generator pressure.

Page 4 of 6 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 15.2. When generator pressure lowers to ~0 When generator pressure is psig, close H2-113. given as ~0 psig, operator closed H2-113. ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

H2-113 is closed.

15.3.1. Open CO2 Supply Isolation to Unit 1 Opened CO2 Supply Isolation Generator on Isophase Bus Deck (CO2-66). to Unit 1 Generator on C Isophase Bus Deck (CO2-66). ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

CO2-66 is open.

TRANSITION NOTE: The examinee should proceed to the generator gas house.

15.3.2. Open PCV-8303 Inlet Isolation valve (CO2- Opened PCV-8303 Inlet 8311). Isolation valve (CO2-8311).

C ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

CO2-83ll is open.

15.3.3. Verify 15 CO2 manifold valves open. Verified 15 CO2 manifold valves are open.

POSITIVE CUE:

15 CO2 manifold valves are open.

15.3.4. Open up to 15 CO2 Bottle Isolation Valves Opened 15 CO2 Bottle associated with the open CO2 manifold valves. Isolation Valves associated C with the open CO2 manifold ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE: valves.

15 C02 bottle isolation valves are open.

15.3.5. Adjust CO2 Supply Pressure Regulator Adjusted CO2 Supply (PCV-8303) clockwise NOT to exceed 80 psig. Pressure Regulator (PCV-Do not allow generator pressure to exceed 3 8303) clockwise and did NOT psig. exceed 80 psig. Did not allow C generator pressure to exceed POSITIVE CUE: 3 psig. ____ ____ ____

CO2 outlet pressure is ~75 psig. Generator pressure is ~1 psig.

NEGATIVE CUE:

CO2 outlet pressure is 0 psig.

Page 5 of 6 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER NOTE: When the above steps have been accomplished inform examinee that flow has stopped and PCV-8303 is frosted over.

15.3.6. Open CO2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Adjust CO2 Supply Pressure Bypass (CO2-8303-3) as needed to continue using Regulator Bypass (CO2-purge while maintaining <80 psig on PCV- 8303-3) counterclockwise and 8303 Outlet Pressure Indicator (PI-8303). did NOT exceed 80 psig. Did C not allow generator pressure POSITIVE CUE: to exceed 3 psig. ____ ____ ____

CO2 outlet pressure is ~75 psig. Generator pressure is ~2 psig.

NEGATIVE CUE:

CO2 outlet pressure is 0 psig.

EXAMINER NOTE: When the above steps have been accomplished inform examinee that 15 bottles have been added to the generator.

15.3.7. When all 15 bottles have been added, Called SM/CRS by telephone notify the SM/CRS. or radio and reported all 15 bottles added to generator. ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

All 15 bottles added and SM/CRS notified.

END

Page 6 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-GEN02 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

  • A station blackout is in progress and it is necessary to reduce loads on the station batteries.
  • To accomplish this, it is necessary to purge the hydrogen from the generator with C02 to secure the Seal Oil System DC pump.

INITIATING CUE:

SM/CRS directs you to purge the Main Generator with 15 bottles of C02 per 1106.002 Section 15.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 37 of 107 1106.002 GENERATOR HYDROGEN SYSTEM CHANGE: 036 15.0 Purging Hydrogen with CO2 During Emergency Conditions 15.1 Perform the following to depressurize generator:

15.1.1 Verify H2 Supply to Top of Generator (H2-132) closed.

15.1.2 Open H2 Vent, Lead Box (H2-113).

15.1.3 Open H2 Vent from Top of Generator (H2-112).

NOTE During a blackout, generator pressure may be read on the following:

Gen H2 Cond Mon Press (PI-9003), located beside the Generator Condition Monitor (AI-9002)

Main Generator Pressure (PI-8370), located inside upper door of H2 Control Panel (M-27)

Gen H2/Fan Press on front of H2 Control Panel (M-27) 15.2 WHEN generator pressure is 0 psig, THEN close H2 Vent, Lead Box (H2-113).

15.3 Perform the following to purge generator:

15.3.1 Open CO2 Supply Isolation to Unit 1 Generator on Isophase Bus Deck (CO2-66).

15.3.2 Open CO2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Inlet Isol (CO2-8311).

NOTE The alignment of 15 CO2 cylinders at one time is based on purging the generator with 1.5 times its internal volume with CO2.

15.3.3 Verify 15 CO2 manifold valves open.

15.3.4 Open the 15 CO2 Bottle isolation Valves associated with the open CO2 manifold valves.

15.3.5 Admit CO2 to generator by adjusting CO2 Supply Pressure Regulator (PCV-8303) clockwise NOT to exceed 80 psig.

Do NOT allow generator pressure to exceed 3 psig.

15.3.6 IF PCV-8303 freezes and stops flow, THEN open CO2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Bypass (CO2-8303-3) as needed to continue purge while maintaining 80 psig on PCV-8303 Outlet Pressure Indicator (PI-8304).

15.3.7 WHEN all 15 bottles have been added, THEN notify CRS/SM.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 38 of 107 1106.002 GENERATOR HYDROGEN SYSTEM CHANGE: 036 15.4 Perform the following to align Purity Meter (AIS-8310) for CO2:

15.4.1 Open the following valves:

Purity Meter Sample Return Isol to Top of Generator (H2-114)

Purity Meter Sample Supply Isol from Top of Generator (H2-116) 15.4.2 Close the following valves:

Purity Meter Sample Return Isol to Bottom of Generator (H2-115)

Purity Meter Sample Supply Isol from Bottom of Generator (H2-117) 15.5 Perform the following to check purity:

15.5.1 IF electrical power available to Purity Meter Blower (VSF-31),

THEN read Purity Meter (AIS-8310).

15.5.2 IF Purity Meter NOT available OR as desired, THEN request Chemistry sample of generator.

Chemistry ____________________________

15.6 Continue purging generator as required to obtain 95% CO2.

15.6.1 Replace CO2 bottles as necessary.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 39 of 107 1106.002 GENERATOR HYDROGEN SYSTEM CHANGE: 036 15.7 WHEN CO2 purity 95%,

THEN perform the following:

15.7.1 Close H2 Vent from Top of Generator (H2-112).

15.7.2 Close CO2 Bottle isolations.

15.7.3 Purge low points by opening H2 Vent, Lead Box (H2-113) for 2 minutes.

A. WHEN purge is complete, THEN close H2 Vent, Lead Box (H2-113).

15.7.4 Close CO2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Inlet Isol (CO2-8311).

15.7.5 Verify CO2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Bypass (CO2-8303-3) closed.

15.7.6 Replace used CO2 bottles.

15.7.7 Close CO2 Supply Isolation to Unit 1 Generator on Isophase Bus Deck (CO2-66).

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam In-plant JPM P2

Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 9 Date:

JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD04 System/Duty Area: Control Rod Drive System/Emergency and Abnormal Operations Task: Respond to High Temperature on one or more Control Rod Drive Stators JTA# ANO1-RO-AOP-OFFNORM-394 KA Value RO 3.1 SRO 3.7 KA

Reference:

001 A2.01 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR Outside CR X Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulate Simulator: Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site X Simulator Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate X Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): 1203.003 Section 7 CRD Stator Temperature High and Exhibit A CRD Fuse Location Reference Examinee's Name: Logon ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD04 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • Group 7 Rod 2 control rod stator temperature computer alarm is in alarm with an indicated temperature of 197°F.
  • Reactor power is ~35% with the Reactor Demand and Diamond stations in manual.
  • Group 7 Rod 2 has been transferred to the AUX power supply.

TASK STANDARD:

Group 7 Rod 2 is de-energized and the AUX Programmer is energized.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

Copy of AOP 1203.003 Section 7, Picture of inside Cabinet C72, and Exhibit A.

Page 3 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD04 INITIATING CUE: The CRS/SM directs you to de-energize CRD Group 7 Rod 2 and re-energize the AUX Programmer per 1203.003, Section 7, Step 4 (perform steps 4.E through 4.I).

UN C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT SAT EXAMINER NOTE: Do not let examinee open cabinet. Use Programmer Power Supply picture to identify fuses to be pulled once the proper cabinet has been identified.

E. In computer room at the Auxiliary Power Supply Opened C72 A cabinet door A cabinet (C72), remove the following fuses and removed fuses 120 V ABT from the programmer control assembly to and 120 V Bus 2.

de-energize auxiliary power supply and drop C affected rod. ____ ____ ____

1) 120 V ABT
2) 120 V Bus 2 POSITIVE CUE:

Fuses 120 V ABT and 120 V Bus 2 removed.

EXAMINER NOTE: Simulate communications with control room. If required, inform examinee that the control room is handling the appropriate Technical Specification actions.

F. Verify IN LIMIT lamp on for selected rod (Group Called the control room and 7 Rod 2) on PI Panel (C13). verified Group 7 Rod 2 IN LIMIT lamp is lit. ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

Control Room reports Group 7 Rod 2 IN LIMIT light is lit.

F. 1) Declare rod inoperable AND refer to Called the control room and applicable TS 3.1.4, and TS 3.1.5 reported to declare rod inoperable AND refer to ____ ____ ____

2) IF required to perform SR 3.2.5.1, applicable TS 3.1.4 and TS THEN perform Power Peaking check 3.1.5.

(1103.019).

POSITIVE CUE:

Control Room reports referring to TS 3.1.4, 3.1.5.

and SR 3.2.5.1

Page 4 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD04 UN C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT SAT NOTE The CRD stator fuses are mounted in groups of three on fuse blocks, two fuse blocks per stator.

G. Using Control Rod Stator Fuse Location Used Exhibit A to determine Reference (Exhibit A) of this procedure, identify correct fuses and location are the fuse blocks and CRD transfer cabinet FB17 and FB18 in C55.

associated with the affected rod (Group 7 Rod 2). ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

Identified FB17 and FB18 in C55. 1 EXAMIINER NOTE: For the purpose of the JPM the examinee should discuss proper electrical safety and the gear required and the location (per Exhibit A) of the fuses which should be pulled. Warning in procedure states Personnel should use proper electrical safety gear (face shield, rubber gloves and fuse pullers as a minimum) when removing fuses.

EXAMINER NOTE: Do not let examinee open cabinet. Use Fuse Block picture to identify fuses to be pulled once the proper cabinet has been identified.

WARNING CRD transfer cabinet will be energized.

H. Using proper electrical safety precautions (face Using proper electrical safety shield, rubber gloves, fuse pullers, etc.), remove gear removed FB17 and FB18 C the six stator fuses associated with the affected rod in C55. ____ ____ ____

(Group 7 Rod 2).

(Examinee should not open cabinet. Use Exhibit to discuss where these fuses would be located inside the cabinet.)

POSITIVE CUE:

FB17 and FB18 removed.

I. Re-install the Auxiliary Power Supply 120-V ABT and 120V Bus 2 programmer assembly fuses removed from C72. fuses installed in Aux Programmer.

C 1) 120 V ABT ____ ____ ____

2) 120 V Bus 2 (Use picture again)

POSITIVE CUE:

Fuses are re-installed in the Aux Programmer.

(Use picture again)

END

Page 5 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD04 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

  • Group 7 Rod 2 control rod stator temperature computer alarm is in alarm with an indicated temperature of 197°F.
  • Reactor power is ~35% with the Reactor Demand and Diamond stations in manual.
  • Group 7 Rod 2 has been transferred to the AUX power supply.

INITIATING CUE:

The CRS/SM directs you to de-energize CRD Group 7 Rod 2 and re-energize the AUX Programmer per 1203.003, Section 7, Step 4 (perform steps 4.E through 4.I).

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam In-plant JPM P3

Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 0 Date: 3/8/2016 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-LRW02 System/Duty Area: Liquid Radwaste System Task: Perform Sampling TWMT (T-16A/B)

JTA# ANO1-WCO-CZ-NORM-25 KA Value RO 2.7 SRO 2.8 KA

Reference:

068 A2.02 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR Outside CR X Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulate Simulator: Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site Simulator Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 5 Minutes Reference(s): OP-1104.020, CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION Examinee's Name: Logon ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-LRW02 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Unit 1 is at 100% power.

RI-4642 is INOPERABLE P-3A, B, and C Circulating Water Pumps are running.

P-3D Circulating Water Pump is idle.

Average CW discharge pressure is 3.8 psig T-16A level is 85% by local indication and is no longer filling.

TASK STANDARD:

Align T-16A per Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Section 18.0 of 1104.020.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

OP-1104.020 Section 18.0 Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A.

Page 3 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-LRW02 INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to perform Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Section 18.0 of 1104.020.

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT

1. Verify closed Treated Waste Monitor T-16A CZ-47A verified closed.

(C) Inlet (CZ-47A). ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

CZ-47A chain operated in the clockwise direction and did not move. Valve stem is in the full in position.

2. Install Sample Tag on Treated Waste Monitor Tag installed through the chain (C) T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A) operator such that the valve ____ ____ ____

cannot be operated without POSITIVE CUE: removing the tag.

Tag installed through the chain operator such that the valve cannot be operated without removing the tag.

3. Verify Suction Crossover on Treated Waste CZ-50 Verified Closed Monitor Pumps (CZ-50) closed. ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

CZ-50 handwheel operated in the clockwise direction and did not move. Valve stem is in the full in position.

Place Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A on short path recirc as follows:

4. Verify Treated Waste Discharge Valve to CZ-55 Verified Closed.

Header from P-47A (CZ-55) closed. ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

CZ-55 handwheel operated in the clockwise direction and did not move. Valve stem is in the full in position.

Page 4 of 5

5. Open Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A CZ-54A Verified Open.

(C) Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A) ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

CZ-54A handwheel operated in the counter clockwise direction until it stopped. Valve stem is in the full out position.

6. Start Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) P-47A started (C) using one of the following handswitches:
  • HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)
  • HS-4637 local handswitch POSITIVE CUE:

Red light ON, Green light OFF for P-47A NEGATIVE CUE:

Green light ON, Red light OFF for P-47A.

7. Complete Section 1.0, Request, of Applicant should record the Attachment B1, Treated Waste Monitor Tank T- following information:

16A Liquid Release Permit.

  • Todays date and current time ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

  • 85% for T-16A level No cue given, if applicant asks for any of the
  • Circle local for information you can remind him to reference the indication used initial conditions of the JPM
  • Notify Chemistry that RI-4642 is INIOPERABLE
  • 3 Circ Water Pumps running
  • 3.8 psig discharge pressure
  • Todays date and current time
  • Sign for Performed By
8. Submit Attachment B1 to Chemistry for section Applicant should state that he 2.0, Analysis. would take the Attachment B1 ____ ____ ____

to Chemistry.

POSITIVE CUE:

Chemistry has accepted Attachment B1 END

Page 5 of 5 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-LRW02 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

Unit 1 is at 100% power.

RI-4642 is INOPERABLE P-3A, B, and C Circulating Water Pumps are running.

P-3D Circulating Water Pump is idle.

Average CW discharge pressure is 3.8 psig T-16A level is 85% by local indication and is no longer filling.

INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to:

Align T-16A per Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Section 18.0 of 1104.020.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 40 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 18.0 Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A CRITICAL STEP 18.1 Verify closed Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).

18.1.1 Install Sample Tag on Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).

18.2 Verify Suction Crossover on Treated Waste Monitor Pumps (CZ-50) closed.

18.3 Place Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A on short path recirc as follows:

18.3.1 Verify Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47A (CZ-55A) closed.

18.3.2 Open Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A).

18.3.3 Start Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch 18.4 Complete Section 1.0, "Request", of Attachment B1, Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Liquid Release Permit.

18.5 Submit Attachment B1 to Chemistry for section 2.0, "Analysis".

Chemist ________________________

18.6 WHEN sampling and neutralizing operations are complete, THEN perform the following:

18.6.1 Stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch 18.6.2 Close Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 191 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 1 of 12 TREATED WASTE MONITOR TANK T-16A LIQUID RELEASE PERMIT PERMIT #____________________(Assigned by Chemistry) ______________

Date 1.0 REQUEST (Operations) 1.1 Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) taken out of service and placed on recirc for sampling and release:

Date __________ Time _________.

NOTE Sample Tag contains information to remind personnel that tank is isolated for chemistry sample.

1.2 Verify Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A) closed.

1.2.1 Verify Sample Tag installed on handwheel OR chain operator.

1.3 Initial Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) level _________________%.

1.3.1 Circle indication used:

Local Remote 1.4 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is available, THEN perform the following:

1.4.1 Check Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) operability status by performing one of the following:

A. IF monitor count rate is 1000 cpm, THEN perform the following:

1. Verify no Liquid Release in progress using Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642).
2. Select "Check Source" on Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor AND check that the monitor responds to check source with a count rate rise >100 cpm.

B. IF monitor count rate >1000 cpm, THEN check that count rate is <4.22E6 cpm.

1.4.2 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is operable, THEN record Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) background counts AND continue. ___________ cpm A. Record Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) initial setpoint: ________________ cpm

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 192 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 2 of 12 1.4.3 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable, THEN notify Chemistry AND continue.

1.5 Record the following:

Number of Circ Water Pumps running ____

Circ Water pump Disch Press _______ psig 1.6 Submitted to Chemistry for Analysis, Section 2.0:

Date _______________ Time _____________

Section 1.0 Performed By ____________________________________________

2.0 ANALYSIS (Chemistry) 2.1 Sample Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) for release analysis using Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A/B) (1607.009).

Date/Time___________/__________

2.2 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable as identified in either "Request", or "Verification of Pre-Release Requirements" sections of this permit, THEN obtain independent sample of tank contents for analysis.

Date/Time___________/__________

Chemistry______________________

2.3 Record selected tank pH ____________.

2.4 Review gamma spectroscopy report and Tritium analysis.

2.5 IF release is radioactive AND release desired, THEN generate Preliminary Release Report.

2.6 Check sample results indicate that release of total tank contents will not violate ANO radioactive effluent discharge limit.

2.7 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable as identified in either "Request", or "Verification of Pre-Release Requirements" section of this permit, THEN perform independent analysis of computer data input.

Date/Time___________/__________

Chemistry______________________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 193 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 3 of 12 2.8 IF pH is NOT between 6.0 and 9.0, THEN perform the following:

2.8.1 Adjust per Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A/B) (1607.009).

2.8.2 Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) post-neutralization pH ______.

2.8.3 IF pH is NOT between 6.0 and 9.0, THEN re-perform adjustment and analysis sequence until pH is between 6.0 and 9.0.

2.9 Preliminary Release Report and/or Permit returned to Control Room.

Performed by________________________ Date/Time___________/__________

3.0 Verification of Pre-Release Requirements (Operations)

NOTE If adjustments are made to Circ Water flow, then the release permit calculations are inaccurate and the release must be terminated.

3.1 Check Circ Water flow/configuration recorded in initial release submittal data is still valid.

3.2 Verify appropriate signatures on the Open EMS Liquid Permit Pre-Release Data Report.

3.3 Obtain CRS/SM approval to proceed with release.

CRS/SM ___________________________________

3.4 Provide a copy of the Monitor Setpoints section from Open EMS Liquid Permit Pre-Release Data Report to Control Room Operators.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 194 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 4 of 12 3.5 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is operable AND available, THEN verify proper operation of radiation monitor and interlocks as follows (ODCM S2.1.1.4):

3.5.1 Check Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) available by one of the following methods:

IF monitor count rate is 1000 cpm, THEN select CHECK SOURCE on Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) and check that the monitor responds to check source with a count rate rise >100 cpm.

IF monitor count rate >1000 cpm, THEN check that count rate is <4.22E6.

3.5.2 Verify the following valves closed:

FWMT Disch to CW Flumes (DZ-25)

LZ Drain Pump P-45 Discharge to Flume (LZ-5)

Treated Waste Discharge to Circ Water Flume (CZ-58) 3.5.3 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 handswitch (HS-4642) to OPEN.

3.5.4 Verify CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) in Manual.

3.5.5 Fully open Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) by turning CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) Manual Adjust knob clockwise.

3.5.6 Lower Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) alarm setpoint until HIGH RAD alarm actuates.

3.5.7 Check that Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) indicating lights show CV-4642 tripped closed.

3.5.8 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 handswitch (HS-4642) to CLOSED position.

A. Turn CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642)

Manual Adjust knob fully counter-clockwise to the closed position.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 195 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 5 of 12 3.5.9 Adjust Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint to the value listed in the Monitor Setpoints section of Liquid Permit Pre-Release Data Report for total Circ Water flow. (Round setpoint down for conservatism).

3.5.10 Verify a Licensed Operator, other than individual who initially set Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint, has independently verified that Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint is correct for total circ water flow.

3.5.11 Reset Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) HIGH RAD alarm by taking HS to ALARM RESET and releasing.

3.6 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable, THEN verify requirements specified in "Analysis" section of this permit for Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) inoperable OR unavailable have been performed.

Section 3.0 Performed By ____________________________________________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 196 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 6 of 12 4.0 Release (Operations)

CAUTION Unauthorized discharge to Lake Dardanelle via the flume shall be avoided.

4.1 Verify Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) closed.

4.2 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) stopped.

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch NOTE Sample Tag contains information to remind personnel that tank is isolated for chemistry sample.

4.3 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A) closed AND Sample Tag installed.

4.3.1 IF Sample Tag is missing OR has been removed since tank was last sampled, THEN perform the following:

A. Terminate this release.

B. Install Sample Tag on Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).

C. Submit new release permit to Chemistry.

4.4 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Outlet (CZ-48A) open.

4.5 Verify Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) in-service by performing the following:

4.5.1 Verify the following valves open:

LRW Disch Filter F-560 Inlet (CZ-74)

LRW Disch Filter F-560 Outlet (CZ-77) 4.5.2 Verify LRW Disch Filter F-560 Bypass (CZ-83) closed.

4.6 Verify Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47B (CZ-55B) closed.

4.7 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A) closed.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 197 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 7 of 12 4.8 Open Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47A (CZ-55A).

4.9 Open Treated Waste Discharge to Circ Water Flume (CZ-58).

4.10 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Pump Discharge to Clean Waste Tanks (CZ-57) closed.

4.11 Verify Unit 1/Unit 2 Liquid Radwaste Manifold Isol (CZ-87) closed.

4.12 Verify Suction Crossover on Treated Waste Monitor Pumps (CZ-50) closed.

4.13 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable, THEN perform the following (ODCM L2.1.1 A):

4.13.1 Verify FWMT Disch to CW Flumes (DZ-25) closed.

4.13.2 Verify LZ Drain Pump P-45 Discharge to Flume (LZ-5) closed.

4.13.3 Person qualified as Waste Control Operator, independently verify release path valve alignment prior to release (ODCM L2.1.1 A.2.2.3).

Verified by ______________________

4.14 Notify Control Room of intent to begin release.

4.15 Commence Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release as follows:

4.15.1 Start Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch 4.15.2 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) handswitch to OPEN.

CAUTION Use of flow rate greater than allowable by the release permit may violate ODCM limits for release and may be NRC reportable.

NOTE Allowable Release Flow Rate is listed in the "Max Waste (GPM)" column of the Preliminary Report.

4.15.3 Note Max Flow rate from Preliminary Report (______gpm).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 198 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 8 of 12 4.15.4 Open/throttle open Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) by turning CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) Manual Adjust knob clockwise to commence release, while NOT exceeding Max Flow rate entered in step 4.15.3.

4.16 WHEN release has started, THEN perform the following:

4.16.1 Perform one of the following:

IF Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642) is operable, THEN Control Room personnel shall observe Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642) AND verify release flow rate is allowable release flow rate for total circ water flow.

(Ref. ODCM S2.1.1.1)

IF Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642) is inoperable, THEN release may continue provided:

Estimate flow rate at least once every four hours during release.

Refer to ODCM L2.1.1 B.

Document occurrence with a Condition Report.

NOTE If a Plant Computer tabular Log (DUMP) is used instead of Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830), then the tabular log shall contain at least points R4642, R3618 and be set at 5 minute intervals and cover the duration of the release.

4.16.2 IF Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830) is available, THEN verify the following data recorded on Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830).

OTHERWISE verify Plant Computer tabular log is activated and record data on it.

A. Release start time ________ Date ________

B. Release permit number ________________

C. Name and number of tank being released: "Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A)"

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 199 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 9 of 12 4.16.3 Notify RP technician that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release has started and Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) should be periodically monitored for rad levels.

4.16.4 Notify Chemistry that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release has started.

CAUTION Pumping radioactive liquid tanks empty can cause sediment in bottom of tank to be deposited in discharge piping. This can produce higher radiation areas in the vicinity of the discharge piping than previously existed.

4.17 Check Treated Waste Monitor Tanks (T-16A/B) levels AND verify only Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) is being released.

NOTE Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) inlet press should not exceed 25 psig.

4.17.1 Monitor Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) during release for a rise in inlet pressure.

4.17.2 IF LRW Disch Filter F-560 Inlet Press (PI-4606)

>25 psig, THEN perform the following:

A. Stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch B. Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) handswitch to Close.

C. Perform "Backflushing the Liquid Radwaste Discharge Filter (F-560)" section of this procedure.

D. WHEN backflush is complete, THEN recommence release at step 4.15 of this attachment.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 200 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 10 of 12 NOTE OP-1203.007 Liquid Waste Discharge Line High Radiation directs the re-establishing of the liquid release if process monitor trips due to a confirmed instantaneous spike.

4.17.3 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) trips due to an instantaneous spike, THEN perform the following:

A. Stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch B. Verify Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) reset.

C. Notify Control Room of intent to recommence release.

D. Recommence release by returning to step 4.15.

4.18 WHEN release is complete, THEN perform the following:

4.18.1 Perform one of the following to verify Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) stopped:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112) in normal-after-stop Local indication pump stopped at HS-4637 4.18.2 Verify discharge flow zero gpm.

4.18.3 Notify RP technician that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release is complete AND that Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) should be surveyed for rad levels to determine the need to back flush Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560).

4.18.4 Back flush Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) as necessary per Radiation Protection survey.

4.19 Notify control room that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release is complete.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 201 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 11 of 12 4.20 IF Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830) is available, THEN record the following data on Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830).

OTHERWISE record on Plant Computer tabular logsheets.

Release stop time __________ Date _________

Release permit number _____________

4.21 Flush clean waste to discharge flume piping as follows:

4.21.1 Verify Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 open.

4.21.2 Close Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47A (CZ-55A) 4.21.3 Close Treated Waste Discharge to Circ Water Flume (CZ-58).

4.21.4 Align demineralized water to discharge piping by opening Condensate Flush Disch Hdr (CS-256).

4.21.5 WHEN piping flushed 4-5 minutes, THEN close Condensate Flush to Disch Header (CS-256).

4.22 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 handswitch (HS-4642) to CLOSE.

4.22.1 Check Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) indicating lights show valve closed.

4.23 Verify CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) in manual.

4.24 Turn CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) Manual Adjust knob fully counter-clockwise to the CLOSED position.

4.25 IF HS-4637 used to stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A),

THEN verify HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112) in normal-after-stop.

4.26 Record final Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) level ________%

4.27 Remove Sample Tag from Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).

4.28 Inform control room that Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint may be returned to the value listed in step 1.4.2.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 202 of 236 1104.020 CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 12 of 12 4.29 Return release permit with all attachments to CRS/SM.

Performed by __________________________________ Date _____________

Reviewed by CRS/SM ____________________________ Date _____________

4.30 Return the following to Chemistry:

This attachment Release permit Tabular logsheets, if used.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S1

Page 1 of 10 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 0 Date: 6/14/2016 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 System/Duty Area: Rod Position Indication System (RPIS)

Task: Perform Absolute And Relative Position Indication Comparison JTA# ANO1-RO-CRD-SURV-13 KA Value RO 3.2 SRO 3.6 KA

Reference:

014-A1.02 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR X Outside CR Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site Simulator Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): OP-1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE SUPPLEMENT 1 (REV. 51)

Examinee's Name: ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Unit 1 is at 100% power.

No control rod motion expected for the duration of the test TASK STANDARD:

Complete Section 3.0 of 1105.009 Supplement 1, as necessary to verify operability of API and RPI.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

OP-1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE SUPPLEMENT 1 (REV. 51)

INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to perform ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE POSITION INDCIATION COMPARISON per Supplement 1 of OP-1105.009 using the plant computer.

Suggested simulator setup:

100% power steady state with no expected rod motion Verify PI Panel selected to ABSOL, especially during reset in between JPMs.

Page 3 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to perform ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE POSITION INDCIATION COMPARISON per Supplement 1 of OP-1105.009 using the plant computer.

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.1.1. Using the Plant Computer, obtain an Applicant may reference (C) API/RPI printout by performing Obtaining OP-1105.009 Section 19.0 or ____ ____ ___

API/RPI Printout section of OP-1105.009 may perform from memory the following steps to obtain a POSITIVE CUE: printout of both the API and API/RPI printout obtained per OP-1105.009. RPI reports for comparison.

(Informational Use)

EXAMINER NOTE: There are two different ways to obtain the printout for this JPM. The hot key function (Method 2) is simpler and provides a better print out for the comparison. The following steps describe both methods and either one can be performed without referencing the procedure.

FYI - EC60523 is NOT installed.

METHOD 1 (Plant Computer) 19.1.1. IF desired to use the NASP function, Applicant obtains printout for THEN perform the following: currently selected REL and ____ ____ ___

A. Note position of PI Panel POSITION ABSOL.

SELECT switch: ABSOL or REL.

B. On PMS, select NAS.

C. On PMS, select N4.

D. Depress F4 E. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).

F. Depress Enter to print.

G. Depress Enter to select local printer.

H. Obtain printout.

I. Verify the following on printout:

  • Correct time
  • Correct date J. Mark printout with appropriate position:

ABSOL or REL.

K. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to opposite position: REL or ABSOL.

L. Depress F4 M. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).

N. Depress Enter to print.

Page 4 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT (Continued)

O. Depress Enter to select local printer.

P. Obtain printout. Applicant obtains printout for Q. Mark printout with appropriate position: currently selected REL and ____ ____ ___

REL or ABSOL. ABSOL.

R. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

POSITIVE CUE:

Printout obtained for the currently selected REL or ABSOL.

METHOD 2 (Hot Key) 19.1.2. IF desired to use function hot key, THEN perform the following: Applicant obtains printout for A. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch currently selected REL and ____ ____ ___

in ABSOL. ABSOL.

B. Depress the API/RPI labeled hot key.

C. Depress ENTER to select each default value.

D. Enter PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch position.

E. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to REL.

F. Select YES.

G. Select F3 to print.

H. Obtain printout.

I. Verify the following on printout:

  • Correct time
  • Correct date J. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

POSITIVE CUE:

Printout obtained for the currently selected REL or ABSOL.

EXAMINER NOTE: The applicant should return to Supplement 1

Page 5 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.1.2 Compare RPI printout with RPI PI meter Applicant selects REL on the (C) indications and determine if > 4% PI panel and verifies all RPI ____ ____ ___

difference exists for any control rod. printout readings are within 4%

of RPI PI meter indications.

POSITIVE CUE:

REL selected on the PI panel and verifies all RPI printout readings are within 4% of RPI PI meter indications.

2.1.3 Perform API comparison as follows: Applicant selects ABSOL on (C) A. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT the PI panel and verifies all switch to ABSOL. API printout readings are B. Compare API printout with API PI within 4% of API PI meter meter indications and determine if indications. ____ ____ ___

> 4% difference exists for any control rod.

POSITIVE CUE:

ABSOL selected on the PI panel and verifies all API printout readings are within 4% of API PI meter indications.

Page 6 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.1.4 Compare API and RPI computer printout Applicant compares API and (C) and determine if ³ 2% difference exists RPI computer printout and between individual API and RPI rod determine if >2% difference ____ ____ ___

positions. exists between individual API and RPI rod positions.

A. Record results of RPI comparison, API comparison, and API/RPI comparison in Section 3.0.

POSITIVE CUE:

API and RPI computer printouts are within 2% of each other for all rods.

2.2 Compare API for each control rod to the Applicant compared API for (C) associated Group Average by using plant each control rod to the ____ ____ ___

computer or PI meter indication and associated Group Average by determine if ³ 3% difference exists. using plant computer or PI meter indication and determine 2.2.1 Record results in Section 3.0. if >3% difference exists and recorded results of RPI POSITIVE CUE: comparison, API comparison, All API and Group Averages are within 3% of and API/RPI comparison in each other. Section 3.0 Recorded results of RPI comparison, API comparison, and API/RPI comparison in Section 3.0 EXAMINER NOTE: This next step is N/A 2.3 IF neither the plant computer nor SPDS is Applicant will N/A this step available, THEN use PI Panel indication to ____ ____ ___

determine if ³4% difference between API and RPI exists for any control rod.

2.3.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

POSITIVE CUE:

Plant Computer is available.

Page 7 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.4. Check each safety rod fully withdrawn by Applicant verified either 100%

(C) one of the following: indication lamp on PI Panel is ____ ____ ___

  • 100% indication lamp on PI Panel is lit. lit OR >98.5% withdrawn by
  • >98.5% withdrawn by available API. available API and recorded results in Section 3.0.

2.4.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

POSITIVE CUE:

All 100% indication lamps lit on PI Panel for safety rods.

Recorded results of Safety Rods fully withdrawn in Section 3.0 2.5. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to Applicant selects ABSOL on ABSOL. the PI panel. ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE:

ABSOL selected on the PI panel.

2.6. Test PI Panel lamps. Applicant tests all lamps on the 2.6.1. Record results of PI Panel light test in PI panel and recorded results ____ ____ ___

Section 3.0. of PI Panel light test in Section 3.0.

POSITIVE CUE:

All PI panel lights lit during testing and results recorded n Section 3.0

Page 8 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.7 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within Applicant verified all (C) the sequence and overlap limits specified in the Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 ____ ____ ___

COLR. within the sequence and 2.7.1 Record results overlap limits specified in the POSITIVE CUE: COLR and recorded results of All Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within the Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 sequence and overlap limits specified in the within the sequence and COLR and results recorded in Section 3.0 overlap limits specified in the COLR. in Section 3.0 2.8 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 meet Applicant verified all (C) the insertion limits specified in the COLR. Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 ____ ____ ___

2.8.1 Record results in Section 3.0 meet the insertion limits specified in the COLR and POSITIVE CUE: recorded results of Regulating All Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within the Groups 5, 6, and 7 within the insertion limits specified in the COLR and results insertion limits specified in the recorded in Section 3.0. COLR in Section 3.0.

Page 9 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.9 Verify APSRs within acceptable limits Applicant verified all APSRs (C) specified in the COLR. within acceptable limits ____ ____ ___

2.9.1 Record results in Section 3.0 specified in the COLR and recorded results of APSRs POSITIVE CUE: being within acceptable limits All APSRs within acceptable limits specified in specified in the COLR in the COLR and recorded in Section 3.0 Section 3.0.

2.10 If a known rod inoperability condition exists, Applicant will place a check THEN document in Section 3.0. mark in Section 3.0 indicating ____ ____ ___

no other known conditions POSITIVE CUE: exist.

No other known conditions exist.

Applicant will sign and date for performing Applicant signed and dated for Section 3.0 performing Section 3.0 ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE:

Section 3.0 properly filled out, signed and dated EXAMINER NOTE: If asked inform the applicant that the CRS will complete Section 4.0 JPM is complete.

END

Page 10 of 10 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-CRD07 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

Unit 1 is at 100% power.

No control rod motion expected for the duration of the test INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to perform:

ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE POSITION INDCIATION COMPARISON per Supplement 1 of OP-1105.009 using the plant computer.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 117 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 1 of 7 ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE POSITION INDICATION COMPARISON This test demonstrates operability of control rod drive system absolute and relative rod position indication, verifies that safety rods are fully withdrawn, and verifies that all rods are within 6.5% of their group average. This test satisfies SR 3.1.4.1, SR 3.1.5.1, SR 3.1.6.1, SR 3.1.7.1 , SR 3.2.1.1 , SR 3.2.1.2 and SR 3.2.2.1.

1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS 1.1 Control rod drive system is energized.

1.2 At least one of the following satisfied:

Plant conditions are such that no control rod motion is expected for the duration of the test.

Diamond Panel is in MANUAL.

2.0 TEST METHOD CAUTION The Plant Computer program for API/RPI comparison has default values for deviation limits. It is permissible for the operator to adjust the limits; however, the limits shall be equal to or less than the limits specified in this surveillance.

NOTE If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs prior to completing printout to PI meter comparisons, new printouts should be obtained.

If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs while obtaining API and RPI printouts, new printouts should be obtained.

Plant Computer compares API to RPI, and both API and RPI to the Group Avg. Deviations greater than the limits are flagged with ">>>>>". Bad signals are flagged as "B" and their deviations are flagged "****".

Asymmetric rods, >6.5% are flagged "!!!!!" and the value will not be used in the Group Avg.

A rod is considered inoperable if it can not be located with API, RPI or IN/OUT-LIMIT lights. Refer to TS 3.1.7.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 118 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 2 of 7 NOTE Completion of step 2.1 or 2.3 satisfies shiftly rod checks per SR 3.1.4.1, SR 3.1.6.1, and SR 3.1.7.1.

2.1 IF either the plant computer or SPDS is available, THEN perform API/RPI comparison as follows.

OTHERWISE N/A this section.

2.1.1 Obtain an API/RPI printout from either the plant computer or SPDS by performing Obtaining API/RPI Printout section of this procedure.

2.1.2 Compare RPI printout with RPI PI meter indications and determine if > 4% difference exists for any control rod.

2.1.3 Perform API comparison as follows:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

A. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to ABSOL.

B. Compare API printout with API PI meter indications and determine if > 4% difference exists for any control rod.

2.1.4 Compare API and RPI computer printout and determine if 2% difference exists between individual API and RPI rod positions.

A. Record results of RPI comparison, API comparison, and API/RPI comparison in Section 3.0.

NOTE Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003) has direction for Control rod misalignments >5%.

2.2 Compare API for each control rod to the associated Group Average by using plant computer or PI meter indication and determine if 3% difference exists.

2.2.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 119 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 3 of 7 NOTE Printouts are not needed for records.

If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

2.3 IF neither the plant computer nor SPDS is available, THEN use PI Panel indication to determine if 4% difference between API and RPI exists for any control rod.

2.3.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly safety rod checks per SR 3.1.5.1.

2.4 Check each safety rod fully withdrawn by one of the following:

100% indication lamp on PI Panel is lit.

98.5% withdrawn by available API.

2.4.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

2.5 Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

2.6 Test PI Panel lamps.

2.6.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly verification of regulating groups within sequence and overlap limits per SR 3.2.1.1.

2.7 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within the sequence and overlap limits specified in the COLR.

2.7.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 120 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 4 of 7 NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly verification of regulating groups meeting insertion limits per SR 3.2.1.2.

2.8 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 meet the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

2.8.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly verification of APSRs within acceptable limits per SR 3.2.2.1.

2.9 Verify APSRs within acceptable limits specified in the COLR.

2.9.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

2.10 IF a known rod inoperability condition exists, THEN document in Section 3.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 121 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 5 of 7 3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Limiting Range Is Data Within Limiting Measured Test Quantity For Range?

Values Operability (Circle YES, NO or N/A)

RPI printout to ( ) if 4%

PI Comparison difference YES N/A (1) NO 4% difference

( )

API printout to ( ) if 4%

PI Comparison difference YES N/A (1) NO 4% difference

( )

API to RPI ( ) if 2%

printout difference 2% difference YES N/A (1) NO Comparison ( )

API to Group ( ) if < 3%

Average difference < 3% difference YES NO Comparison ( )

API to RPI Meter ( ) if 4%

Comparison difference YES N/A (2) NO 4% difference

( )

Safety Rod ( ) if ALL fully ALL status withdrawn fully withdrawn YES NO

( )

PI Panel Lamp ( ) if ALL Lamps Test light N/A N/A

( )

( ) if Reg Groups Reg Groups within Regulating Group within sequence sequence and alignment and overlap overlap limits in YES NO limits in COLR COLR

( )

( ) if Reg Groups Reg Groups Groups Regulating Group meet Insertion meet Insertion insertion limits in COLR YES NO limits in COLR

( )

( ) if APSRs are positioned per APSRs are APSR position COLR positioned per COLR YES NO

( )

Other known ( ) if NO known inoperability conditions exist No known condition YES NO condition ( )

Note 1 - Data Within Limiting Range will be N/A only if Plant Computer or SPDS is unavailable.

Note 2 - Data Within Limiting Range will be N/A if Plant Computer or SPDS is available.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 122 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 6 of 7 3.1 IF NO is circled in table above, THEN take one of the following actions:

3.1.1 IF any safety rod is NOT fully withdrawn, THEN refer to TS 3.1.5.

3.1.2 IF the condition has been previously identified, THEN verify the condition and the corrective action taken are documented in section 4.0.

3.1.3 IF the condition has NOT been previously identified, THEN perform the following:

A. Correct the condition per the applicable step below, if possible:

IF rod is misaligned, THEN realign using Attachment C, Adjusting Control Rod/APSR Position For Improved Alignment of this procedure for misalignments <5% OR Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003) if 5%.

IF RPI is misaligned or a rod is realigned per step A above, THEN correct RPI position indication per "Relative Position Indication Adjustment" section of this procedure.

IF other unsatisfactory condition is discovered, THEN initiate corrective action.

B. Record both the condition and the corrective action taken in section 4.0.

3.1.4 IF any rod can NOT be located with API, RPI, or IN/OUT LIMIT light, THEN immediately notify CRS/SM and initiate a Condition Report. Reference TS 3.1.7.

3.1.5 IF all lamps did NOT illuminate during PI Panel Lamp Test, THEN initiate corrective action.

Performed By ___________________________ Date ______________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 123 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 7 of 7 4.0 SUPERVISOR REVIEW AND ANALYSIS (circle one) 4.1 Have the "Acceptance Criteria" in section 3.0 been satisfied? YES NO 4.2 IF answer to 4.1 is "NO",

THEN describe the action taken below.

4.3 Has this equipment been proven operable per the Acceptance Criteria?

.............................................................YES NO 4.4 IF this surveillance found a condition that has NOT been previously identified, THEN verify a copy of this surveillance is forwarded to Reactor and System Engineers.

SUPERVISOR _____________________________________ DATE ___________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 92 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 19.0 Obtaining API/RPI Printouts (Informational use)

CAUTION The Plant Computer program for API/RPI comparison has default values for deviation limits. It is permissible for the operator to adjust the limits; however, the limits shall be equal to or less than the limits specified in this surveillance.

NOTE If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs prior to completing printout to PI meter comparisons, new printouts should be obtained.

If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs while obtaining API and RPI printouts, new printouts should be obtained.

Plant Computer compares API to RPI, and both API and RPI to the Group Avg. Deviations greater than the limits are flagged with ">>>>>". Bad signals are flagged as "B" and their deviations are flagged "****".

Asymmetric rods, >6.5% are flagged "!!!!!" and the value will not be used in the Group Avg.

A rod is considered inoperable if it can not be located with API, RPI or IN/OUT-LIMIT lights. Refer to TS 3.1.7.

19.1 IF desired to use plant computer, THEN perform one of the following:

19.1.1 IF desired to use the NASP function, THEN perform the following:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

A. Note position of PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch:

ABSOL or REL.

B. On PMS, select NAS.

C. On PMS, select N4.

D. Depress F4 E. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).

F. Depress Enter to print.

G. Depress Enter to select local printer.

H. Obtain printout.

PROC./WORK PLAN N

O. PROCEDURE

/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 93 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 I. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct date J. Mark printout with appropriate position:

ABSOL or REL.

K. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to opposite position: REL or ABSOL.

L. Depress F4 M. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).

N. Depress Enter to print.

O. Depress Enter to select local printer.

P. Obtain printout.

Q. Mark printout with appropriate position: REL or ABSOL.

R. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 94 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 19.1.2 IF desired to use function hot key, THEN perform the following:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

A. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

B. Depress the API/RPI labeled hot key.

C. Depress ENTER to select each default value.

D. Enter PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch position.

E. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to REL.

F. Select YES.

G. Select F3 to print.

H. Obtain printout.

I. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct date J. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 95 of 137 1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 051 19.2 IF SPDS report desired, THEN perform the following:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

19.2.1 Note position of PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch:

ABSOL or REL.

19.2.2 Open a tabular trend.

19.2.3 Search for Z1*.

19.2.4 Depress the CONTROL key.

19.2.5 Select each of the control rods.

19.2.6 Click SELECT.

19.2.7 Print tabular trend.

A. Mark the report with appropriate position: ABSOL or REL.

B. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct date 19.2.8 Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to opposite position:

REL or ABSOL.

19.2.9 Print tabular trend.

A. Mark the report with appropriate position: REL or ABSOL.

B. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct date 19.2.10 Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S2

Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 6 Date: 3/9/2016 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ESAS1 System/Duty Area: ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM Task: Verify Proper ESAS Actuation (and Perform ESAS Operation After Actuation)

JTA# ANO1-RO-ESAS-NORM-5 KA Value RO 4.5 SRO 4.8 KA Reference 013 A4.01 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR: X Outside CR: Both:

Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Simulator : Plant Site: Lab:

Testing Method: Simulate: Perform:

Approximate Completion Time In Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): 1202.012, RT-10, Verify proper ESAS actuation (Revision 16)

Examinee's Name: ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date:
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ESAS1 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

ESAS has actuated on low RCS pressure.

Reactor Coolant Pumps have been tripped due to LOSM.

CV-1206 (RCP Seal INJ Block) is open in OVRD.

TASK STANDARD:

LPI Pump P-34B must be secured HPI Block valve CV-1278 throttled back so that its flow is within ~20 gpm of the next highest flow HPI flow.

This is an alternate success path JPM.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

1202.012, RT-10, Verify proper ESAS actuation.

SUGGESTED SIMULATOR SETUP:

Use any at power IC.

Align P-36C as the ES Pump and P-36A as OP HPI Pump.

IMF CV063 (C Makeup/HPI Pump Trip P-36C).

IMF CV1408 (CV-1408 fails to open on ESAS CH 2 and 4)

Place CV-1206 in override and verify open.

IMF RC462 2.5 (RCS leak downstream of MU45A) (RCS leak causes ESAS to actuate on low RCS pressure.

CV-1278 will have to be throttled back to within 20 gpm of the next highest HPI flow).

Trip all RCPs.

Verify that CV-1278 should be throttled per RT10.

Snapshot can now be made.

Revision 6 Note:

Added failure of CV-1408 to make the JPM have more than one critical step.

Updated for procedure revision.

Page 3 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ESAS1 INITIATING CUE: The SM/CRS directs you to perform RT-10 (Verify proper ESAS actuation).

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT

1. Verify BWST Outlets open: On panel C16 recognized CV-
  • CV-1407 1408 closed. On panel C18
  • CV-1408). verified CV-1407 open.

NEGATIVE CUE:

CV-1407 has red light ON, green light OFF.

CV-1408 had green light ON, red light OFF.

EXAMINER CUE: Acknowledge that the applicant has ask permission to override and stop P-34B and P-36C C A. IF BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or On panel C16 placed P-34B CV-1408) fails to open, and P-36C in override and THEN override AND stop associated stopped.

HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failed valve is opened: P-35B does not have an actuation signal and is POSITIVE CUE: therefore N/A HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps in override and stopped as appropriate.

2. Verify service water to DG1 and DG2 coolers On panel C19, verified service open: water to DG1 and DG2 coolers
  • CV-3806 open, CV-3806 and CV-3807.
  • CV-3807 ____ ____ ____

POSITIVE CUE:

Red lights ON, green lights OFF for CV-3806 and CV-3807.

EXAMINER NOTE: Step 3. of RT10 is N/A due to RCPs off.

3. IF any RCP is running, THEN perform the N/A, all RCPs were secured following: due to LOSM.

POSITIVE CUE:

All RCPs are off.

Page 4 of 6 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT

4. Verify proper ESAS channels tripped. Verified that ESAS Channels 1-4 are tripped by observing POSITIVE CUE: that annunciators K11-A2 (HPI Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are tripped. Channel 1), K11-A3 (HPI Channel 2), K11-B2 (LPI Channel 3) and K11-B3 (LPI Channel 4) in alarm or by observing appropriate components have repositioned on C16 and C18.
5. Perform the following:

A. Verify each component properly On panels C16/18, verified actuated on C16 and C18, except those each component in its proper overridden in previous steps. ES position except that P-36C B. Verify proper ES system flow rates. and P-34B are off.

1. IF any of the following conditions exist:
  • A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4)
  • B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5)
  • A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4)
  • B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4)
  • A RB SPRAY FLOW HI/LO (K11-C4)
  • B RB SPRAY FLOW HI/LO (K11-C5)

POSITIVE CUE:

All ES components on C16 and C18 are in their proper position except P-34B and P-36C.

EXAMINER NOTE: The only ES flows that are in service at this time will be HPI flow from the A HPI pump P-36A. RCS pressure is too high for LPI flow and RB Spray has not actuated. LPI flow low alarm cannot be corrected by ACA at current RCS pressure.

Page 5 of 6 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER CUE: Acknowledge that the applicant has ask permission to override and throttle closed on CV-1278 5.

C. If only one train of HPI is available (C) AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN On panel C18, depressed throttle HPI Block valve with the highest MAN pushbutton associated flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest with CV-1278. Throttled HPI flow. block valve CV-1278 back so that its flow is within ~20 gpm of the next highest flow POSITIVE CUE: indicated on FIRS-1209 (on MAN switch backlit (White). C18) or on SPDS HPI P-36A ____ ____ ____

All HPI flows from P-36A are within 20 gpm of Diagnostic screen.

each other.

NEGATIVE CUE:

AUTO switch backlit (Red).

ESAS components are not properly adjusted.

EXAMINER CUE: Notify applicant that the JPM is complete after he balances flow per the standard above.

NOTES:_________________________________________________________________________________

END

Page 6 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ESAS1 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

ESAS has actuated on low RCS pressure.

Reactor Coolant Pumps have been tripped due to LOSM.

CV-1206 (RCP Seal INJ Block) is open in OVRD.

INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS directs you to perform RT10 (Verify proper ESAS actuation).

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 31 of 100 Page 1 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION NOTE Obtain Shift Manager/CRS permission prior to overriding ES.

1. Verify BWST T3 Outlets open:

CV-1407 CV-1408 A. IF BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) fails to open, THEN override AND stop associated HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failed valve is opened:

CV-1407 CV-1408 P34A P34B P36A/B P36C/B P35A P35B

2. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open:

CV-3806 CV-3807 1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 32 of 100 Page 2 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

3. IF any RCP is running, THEN perform the following:

A. IF ES Channel 5 or 6 has actuated, THEN perform the following:

1) IF SCM is adequate, THEN trip all running RCPs due to loss of ICW:

P32A P32C P32B P32D

2) IF SCM is not adequate, THEN check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM AND perform the following:

a) IF 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN trip all RCPs:

P32A P32C P32B P32D b) IF > 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN perform the following:

(1) Leave currently running RCPs on.

(2) IF RCS press > 150 psig, THEN notify CRS to GO TO 1202.002, LOSS OF SUBCOOLING MARGIN procedure.

(3) Restore RCP services per RT-8 while continuing.

B. IF neither ES channel 5 nor 6 has actuated, THEN dispatch an operator to perform Service Water And Auxiliary Cooling System (1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW Following ES Actuation" while continuing.

1) WHEN ICW Cooler SW Outlets and Bypasses are aligned per 1104.029, Exhibit B, THEN override AND open one Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply (CV-3811 or CV-3820).

1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 33 of 100 Page 3 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

4. Verify proper ESAS Channels tripped:

Condition Channels Actuated RCS press 1550 psig 1,2,3,4 RB press 18.7 psia 1,2,3,4,5,6 RB press 44.7 psia 7,8,9,10

5. Perform the following:

A. Verify each component properly actuated on C16 and C18, except those overridden in previous steps.

B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.

NOTE During ESAS actuation, low LPI flow is expected until RCS depressurizes below LPI pump shutoff head.

During large break LOCAs, high LPI flow can be experienced. Flow must be throttled to ensure ECCS flows are maintained within assumptions of calculations.

1. IF any of the following conditions exist:

A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4)

B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5)

A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4)

B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B5)

A RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C4)

B RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C5)

THEN use Annunciator K11 Corrective Action (1203.012J) to clear unexpected alarms.

C. IF only one train of HPI is available AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 34 of 100 Page 4 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

6. On C10, perform the following:

Verify DGs operating within normal limits:

DG 1 DG 2 4100 to 4200 V 4100 to 4200 V 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 2750 KW 2750 KW Verify the following breakers open:

A3-A4 Crossties:

A-310 A-410 B5-B6 Crossties:

B-513 B-613 Unit AUX feeds to A1 and A2:

A-112 A-212 Verify the following breakers closed:

A3 Feeds to B5:

A-301 B-512 A4 Feeds to B6:

A-401 B-612

7. On C09, perform the following:

A. Check AUX Cooling Water header depressurized.

B. IF proper EFW actuation and control has not already been verified, THEN verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 35 of 100 Page 5 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

8. On C19, perform the following:

A. Verify LPI (Decay Heat) Room Cooler running in each Decay Heat Room:

P34A Room P34B Room VUC1A or B VUC1C or D B. IF RB Spray has actuated, THEN verify SW to RB Spray P35A and P35B LO CLRs open:

CV-3804 CV-3805

9. IF all RCPs are off AND RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) is closed, THEN place RCP Seal Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE:

SV-1271 SV-1273 SV-1270 SV-1272

10. IF leakage into the RB is indicated, THEN verify RB cooling maximized:

A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D B. Verify RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves open:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815 C. Verify key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers unlatched:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 36 of 100 Page 6 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

11. Initiate RB H2 sampling using Containment Hydrogen Control (1104.031), Exhibit A.
12. Verify each component properly actuated on C26.
13. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26:

Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814)

Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816)

Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)

14. Verify the following High Point Vents closed:

Reactor A Loop B Loop Pressurizer Vessel SV-1081 SV-1091 SV-1071 SV-1082 SV-1092 SV-1072 SV-1077 SV-1083 SV-1093 SV-1073 SV-1079 SV-1084 SV-1094 SV-1074

15. IF AUX Lube Oil pump for running HPI pump fails to stop after 20 second time delay, THEN within one hour of ESAS actuation dispatch an operator to stop AUX Lube Oil pump locally at breaker while continuing:

P64A P64B P64C B5721 B5722/B6515 B6514

16. Place running Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pump (P34A/P34B) hand switches in NORMAL-AFTER-START to enable DECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP (K09-A7) alarm:

P34A P34B

17. Monitor ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM alarms on K11.

1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

CHANGE 1202.012 REPETITIVE TASKS 016 PAGE 37 of 100 Page 7 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

18. IF any of the following components/systems are in service:

Condensate Pumps Condenser Vacuum Pumps Waterbox Vacuum Pumps Seal Oil System Control Room Chillers THEN coordinate with CRS/SM to secure components and/or systems, as time permits.

19. Coordinate with CRS/SM to re-verify component actuation with another operator.

END 1202.012 RT-10 Rev 3-1-13

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S3

Page 1 of 7 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 4 Date:

JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 System/Duty Area: Pressurizer Pressure Control System Task: Respond to Pressurizer Spray Valve Failure JTA# ANO1-RO-AOP-OFFNORM-115, ANO1-SRO-AOP-OFFNORM-114 KA Value RO 3.9 SRO 3.9 KA

Reference:

010 A2.02 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR X Outside CR Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site Simulator Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): 1103.005 PZR Operation (Section 8.2, Rev 45), 1203.015 PZR Systems Failure (Section 6, Rev 21)

Examinee's Name: ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 7 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • The plant is at steady state power operations with no load transients anticipated.
  • Chemistry reports a Pressurizer Boron sample 60 ppm higher than RCS Boron (this has been confirmed with a backup sample).
  • An SRO has verified that the full reactivity effect of the equalization will be a boration of 5 ppm.
  • The RCS has been diluted to achieve ~289% rod index.

TASK STANDARD:

Performed the following in accordance with the applicable procedures.

  • Pressurizer boron equalization started per 1103.005
  • CV-1009 (Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve) closed per 1203.015 TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

1103.005 Section 8.2 and 1203.015 Section 6 This JPM is an Alternate Success Path JPM.

SIMULATOR SETUP:

100% power with rod index at ~289%.

Close RC4 Pressurizer spray minimum flow.

When CV-1008 is cracked open, insert command to fail Pressurizer Spray Valve CV-1008 to full open .

Page 3 of 7 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 INITIATING CUE:

The CRS/SM directs you to equalize Pressurizer and RCS boron concentrations per 1103.005 Pressurizer Operation beginning at step 8.2.6.

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 8.2.6 Place Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) On panel C04, placed in manual and open slightly while maintaining HS-1003 in Manual position target pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig. and placed CV-1008 in (C) throttled open position. ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE:

CV-1008 is in manual and throttled open.

8.2.7 To maximize PZR recirc flow and minimize Placed some PZR heaters in RCS pressure fluctuations, perform the manual (SAT if examinee following: places any of the heaters in manual).

A. Operate PZR heaters in MANUAL as needed.

B. Maintain below applicable 480V bus current limits.

POSITIVE CUE:

PZR heater banks are in manual and 480V bus currents within limits EXAMINER NOTE: Fail CV-1008 100% open (wait until Step 8.2.7 has been done.)

BOOTH: Insert malfunction to fail CV-1008 full open.

8.2.8 Throttle spray flow to hold steady Monitored RCS pressure, (C) pressure while maintaining target noticed RCS pressure pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig. dropping and/or Pressurizer Spray Valve CV-1008 full FAULTED CUE: open.

RCS pressure is dropping and CV-1008 is full open.

Page 4 of 7 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 INITIATING CUE:

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 8.2.9 IF any upset occurs while equalizing Applicant transitions to Step boron, THEN GO TO step 8.2.13. 8.2.13 POSITIVE CUE:

Applicant transitions to Step 8.2.13.

8.2.13 WHEN boron differential is £ 50 ppm, OR an upset occurs while May attempt to close equalizing, THEN verify controls in Pressurizer Spray Valve AUTO, or ON as follows: CV-1008.

Place CV-1008 to AUTO to

  • Pressurizer Spray Control AUTO see if valve will close.
  • Bank 1 Proportional Heaters AUTO Return pressurizer heaters to
  • Bank 2 Proportional Heaters AUTO AUTO.
  • Bank 4 Heaters AUTO
  • Bank 3 Heaters AUTO
  • Bank 5 Heaters AUTO
  • Group 5 Heaters ON ____ ____ ___

A. IF an upset occurred that exceeded Tech Spec 3.4.1 minimum steady state RCS pressure limits, THEN initiate a condition report.

POSITIVE CUE:

CV-1008 will not close (red light ON, green light OFF).

Pressurizer heaters are in automatic

Page 5 of 7 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 INITIATING CUE:

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER NOTE: Expect RCS Pressure Lo alarm. The following steps are from the ACA for K09-C1.

1. Confirm alarm by comparing RC pressure indications on C04. Applicant verifies alarm is valid
  • RC Pressure Narrow Range Loop A by checking RCS pressure recorder (PR-1023) less than 2055 psig
  • RC Pressure Narrow Range Loop B recorder (PR-1038)
  • RC Pressure Wide Range Loop B recorder (PI-1041)
  • RC Pressure Wide Range Loop B ____ ____ ___

indicator (PR-1042)

POSITIVE CUE:

RCS Pressure is less than 2055 psig and lowering

2. Refer to COLR Figures for RC pressure limits. Applicant informs CRS of need to reference COLR Figures or POSITIVE CUE: actually refers to the COLR.

CRS acknowledges need to reference COLR ____ ____ ___

Figures.

3. IF RC pressure is confirmed low, THEN perform the following:

A. Verify all pressurizer heaters on.

B. Verify Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) closed.

C. Verify ERV (PSV-1000) closed.

D. Refer to Pressurizer Systems Failure (1203.015).

POSITIVE CUE:

All appropriate heaters are energized CV-1008 is OPEN PSV-1000 is closed Refers to 1203.015 EXAMINER NOTE: The applicant may not reference the ACA, but proceed directly to the 1203.015 AOP, or may take prudent action and close the Spray Isolation Valve prior to referencing either procedure.

Page 6 of 7 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 INITIATING CUE:

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINERE NOTE: Applicant will transition to 1203.015, Pressurizer System Failures, Section 6.

Step 1 attempts to close the Pressurizer Spray Valve CV-1008 in manual, which was already attempted previously. (Step 1.A is below)

EXAMINER CUE: If asked the CRS does NOT desire to torque CV-1009 closed.

A. IF CV-1008 will not close, THEN close On panel C04, closed Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009). Valve CV-1009.

1) IF CRS/SM desires, THEN override CV-1009 torque switch by holding the handswitch in the desired position.
2) IF CV-1009 will not close AND if time permits, THEN perform the following:
a. Dispatch an operator to Pressurizer Spray Block CV-1009 (B5534).

C ____ ____ ___

b. Attempt to close CV-1009 using local handswitch on breaker.

B. Verify Pressurizer heaters return RCS pressure to normal.

POSITIVE CUE:

CV-1009 is closed (green light indication ON, red light OFF).

NEGATIVE CUE:

RCS pressure is 2000 psig and lowering.

END

Page 7 of 7 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-PZR02 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

  • The plant is at steady state power operations with no load transients anticipated.
  • Chemistry reports a Pressurizer Boron sample 60 ppm higher than RCS Boron (this has been confirmed with a backup sample).
  • An SRO has verified that the full reactivity effect of the equalization will be a boration of 5 ppm.
  • The RCS has been diluted to achieve ~289% rod index.
  • Reactivity Management Brief has been completed per COPD-030.

INITIATING CUE:

  • The CRS/SM directs you to equalize Pressurizer and RCS boron concentrations per 1103.005 Pressurizer Operation beginning at step 8.2.6.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 15 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 CAUTION R The following section has been determined to have a Reactivity A Addition Potential (RAP) and this activity is classified as a P Risk Level R2.

8.0 Normal Operation NOTE ERV and code safety leakage may be detected by pressurizer relief valve monitoring system (See Pressurizer Relief Valve Monitoring System (1105.013)) or by observing the following downstream temperature elements:

Valve Element SPDS Point PSV-1000 TE-1025 T1025 PSV-1001 TE-1026 T1026 PSV-1002 TE-1027 T1027 8.1 Observe that pressurizer heaters cycle at proper setpoints as listed in the "Setpoints" section of this procedure.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 16 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 NOTE From 220" PZR level, assuming boron will be completely equalized, RCS concentration change is estimated by dividing the difference between PZR and RCS concentrations by a factor of 12. Examples:

(PZR conc - RCS conc) / 12 = RCS concentration change

( 700 - 640 ) / 12 = 5 causing a 5 ppm boration

( 300 - 324 ) / 12 = -2 causing a 2 ppm dilution For a given spray flow, the greater the difference between PZR and RCS boron, the greater the rate of change in reactivity effects.

During steady state power operations, it is desirable to equalize boron before 50 ppm difference is reached in order to lessen reactivity effects of the evolution.

8.2 WHEN PZR water space sampling indicates a difference of >50 ppm boron concentration between reactor coolant and PZR, OR when directed by the CRS/SM AND the following conditions are present:

Unit at stable conditions No load transients anticipated, THEN equalize concentrations as follows:

8.2.1 Using formula above, estimate full reactivity effect from boron equalization:

(circle one) boration / dilution of ________ ppm A. Obtain SRO review of calculation.

8.2.2 IF equalization will cause a boration, THEN consider diluting the RCS to obtain a rod index near the lower end of the CRD operating band prior to continuing.

8.2.3 IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT been conducted, THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief per COPD-030 with an SRO.

8.2.4 IF equalization will cause a dilution, THEN verify power 99.75%.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 17 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 NOTE The Tech Spec 3.4.1 minimum steady state RCS pressure limits are as follows (Ref. COLR):

4-RCP minimum limit: 2082.2 psig 3-RCP minimum limit: 2120.4 psig in the 1-pump loop 2081.2 psig in the 2-pump loop COLR assumes these indications from PMS are used (or their equivalent):

Loop A Loop B P1021, P1023 P1038, P1039 8.2.5 Setup PMS trend for the following points if available:

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop A (P1021)

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop A (P1023)

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop B (P1038)

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop B (P1039)

A. Setup a programmable alarm on at least one of the above points.

8.2.6 Place Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) in manual and open slightly while maintaining target pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig.

8.2.7 To maximize PZR recirc flow and minimize RCS pressure fluctuations, perform the following:

A. Operate PZR heaters in MANUAL as needed.

B. Maintain below applicable 480V bus current limits.

8.2.8 Throttle spray flow to hold steady pressure while maintaining target pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig.

8.2.9 IF any upset occurs while equalizing boron, THEN GO TO step 8.2.13.

8.2.10 Monitor RCS pressure closely.

8.2.11 Verify PZR heaters remaining in AUTO cycle on and off as necessary to control RCS pressure.

8.2.12 Request chemist sample PZR boron periodically per Reactor Coolant System Sampling (1607.001).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 18 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 8.2.13 WHEN boron differential is 50 ppm, OR an upset occurs while equalizing, THEN verify controls in AUTO, or ON as follows:

Pressurizer Spray Control AUTO Bank 1 Proportional Heaters AUTO Bank 2 Proportional Heaters AUTO Bank 4 Heaters AUTO Bank 3 Heaters AUTO Bank 5 Heaters AUTO Group 5 Heaters ON A. IF an upset occurred that exceeded Tech Spec 3.4.1 minimum steady state RCS pressure limits, THEN initiate a condition report.

9.0 Depressurization 9.1 For RCS cooldown to 280°F:

9.1.1 IF RC pumps are in service, THEN refer to Plant Shutdown and Cooldown (1102.010).

9.1.2 IF RC pumps are off, THEN refer to Natural Circulation Cooldown (1203.013).

9.2 For decay heat operation 280°F to Mode 5, use PZR auxiliary spray (CV-1416) as necessary to reduce RCS pressure per Decay Heat Removal Operating Procedure (1104.004).

9.3 To collapse PZR steam bubble, refer to one of the following procedures:

Decay Heat Removal Operating procedure (1104.004), "Maintaining RCS Pressure with N2 While Collapsing the Pressurizer Steam Bubble" section.

Draining and N2 Blanketing the RCS (1103.011), "Collapsing the Pressurizer Steam Bubble section.

Draining and N2 Blanketing the RCS (1103.011), Attachment G "Scripted RCS Drain from Bubble in Pressurizer to Cold Legs Drained (this section assumes RCS Alternate Purification is in service).

9.4 Refer to Draining and N2 Blanketing the RCS (1103.011) to de-energize and danger tag pressurizer heaters when draining the pressurizer.

CHANGE 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE 021 PAGE 15 of 25 SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE ENTRY CONDITIONS One or more of the following:

CV-1008 closed when it should be open.

- Normal operation: Opens - 2205 psig Closes - 2155 psig

- Power >80% and MFP trip: Opens - 2080 psig Closes - 2030 psig CV-1008 open when it should be closed.

Abnormal change in RC pressure.

RCS pressure transmitter failure which is selected for RCS pressure control.

CHANGE 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE 021 PAGE 16 of 25 SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE INSTRUCTIONS

1. IF Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is failed open, THEN place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch (HS-1003) in MAN AND attempt to close CV-1008 (modulating valve).

A. IF CV-1008 will not close, THEN close Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009).

1) IF CRS/SM desires, THEN override CV-1009 torque switch by holding the handswitch in the desired position.
2) IF CV-1009 will not close AND if time permits, THEN perform the following:
a. Dispatch an operator to Pressurizer Spray Block CV-1009 (B5534).
b. Attempt to close CV-1009 using local handswitch on breaker.

B. Verify Pressurizer heaters return RCS pressure to normal.

CAUTION Pressurizer spray shall not be used if the temperature difference between the Pressurizer and the spray fluid is >430°F (TRM 3.4.3). Closing CV-1009 isolates the CV-1008 bypass spray flow.

C. IF necessary, THEN cycle Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009) open and closed to control RCS pressure and spray line temperature..

D. IF both CV-1008 and CV-1009 fail to close AND RCS pressure is dropping, THEN perform the following:

1) Verify all PZR heaters ON.
2) Immediately begin reducing load to 40% at 10%/min per Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

(continued)

CHANGE 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE 021 PAGE 17 of 25 SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

3) IF 4 RCPs are running AND BOTH of the following conditions are met:

Load is reduced to 675 MWe ( 75% load)

Reactor power is 75%,

THEN perform the following:

a) Start one of the following:

"C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C) b) Place the pump not started in Pull-to-Lock:

"C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C) c) Start both of the following:

"C" RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C)

C Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C) d) Stop "C" RCP (P-32C).

e) WHEN zero speed is indicated, THEN verify the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P-63C P-80C P-81C P-82C (continued)

CHANGE 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE 021 PAGE 18 of 25 SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE NOTE In Modes 1 and 2, operation with only one RCP in each loop causes entry into TS 3.4.4 Condition A.

4) IF 3 RCPs running AND all of the following conditions are met:

Load is reduced to 360 MWe ( 40% load)

Reactor power is 55%,

"C" and "D" RCPs in-service THEN perform the following:

a) Start one of the following:

"C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C) b) Place the pump not started in Pull-to-Lock:

"C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C) c) Start both of the following:

"C" RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C)

C Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C) d) Stop "C" RCP (P-32C).

e) WHEN zero speed is indicated, THEN verify the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P-63C P-80C P-81C P-82C f) Enter TS 3.4.4 Condition A.

(continued)

CHANGE 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE 021 PAGE 19 of 25 SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

5) IF 3 RCPs running, AND "D" RCP is secured, THEN perform the following:

a) Trip Reactor.

b) Secure P-32C as follows:

1) Start one of the following:

"C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

2) Place the pump not started in Pull-to-Lock:

"C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

C Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

3) Start both of the following:

"C" RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C)

C Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C)

4) Stop "C" RCP (P-32C).
5) WHEN zero speed is indicated, THEN verify the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P-63C P-80C P-81C P-82C c) Perform Reactor Trip (1202.001) while continuing with this procedure.

d) Enter TS 3.4.5 Condition A.

6) WHEN conditions permit a Reactor Building entry, THEN attempt to manually close either CV-1008 or CV-1009.

E. Contact Senior Manager, Operations.

(continued)

CHANGE 1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURE 021 PAGE 20 of 25 SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE

2. IF Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is failed closed, THEN perform the following:

A. Hold the plant at steady state conditions.

B. IF CV-1008 is energized, THEN place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch (HS-1003) in MAN AND attempt to cycle CV-1008 (modulating valve) open and closed.

C. Write a Condition Report to evaluate continued operation of the plant with inoperable Spray Valve.

D. Contact Senior Manager, Operations AND consider one or both of the following:

1) IF CV-1008 will not open, THEN commence a shutdown per Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016) and Plant Shutdown and Cooldown (1102.010).
a. During shutdown, perform the following:

To prevent lifting of relief valves, reduce power slowly.

Regulate RCS pressure by manual control of Pressurizer heaters.

2) WHEN conditions permit a reactor building entry, THEN perform the following:
a. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009) from C04.
b. Attempt to manually open CV-1008 in reactor building.

CAUTION Pressurizer spray shall not be used if the temperature difference between the Pressurizer and the spray fluid is >430°F (TRM 3.4.3). Closing CV-1009 isolates the CV-1008 bypass spray flow.

c. IF CV-1008 can be opened, THEN cycle CV-1009 open and closed to control RCS pressure and spray line temperature.
3. IF an RCS pressure transmitter which is selected for control has failed or is failing, THEN GO TO Annunciator K07 Corrective Action (1203.012F), SASS Mismatch (K07-B4).
4. Refer to RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

END

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S4

Page 1 of 8 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 2 Date: 6/14/2016 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 System/Duty Area: REACTOR COOLANT PUMP SYSTEM Task: SHUTDOWN RCP P-32A AT POWER JTA# ANO1-RO-RCP-NORM-3 KA Value RO 3.7 SRO 3.9 KA

Reference:

003 A2.02 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR X Outside CR Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site Simulator Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 5 Minutes Reference(s): OP-1103.006 Rev. 44 and OP-1203.031 Rev. 26 Examinee's Name: ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 8 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Unit 1 is at 50% power.

Reactivity Management Brief was conducted prior to the down power.

It is not desired to have predictive maintenance install backup indication of RCP zero speed.

TASK STANDARD:

Secure P-32A RCP per OP-1103.006 Section 10.0.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

OP-1103.006, REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION, Rev. 44, Section 10.0 OP-1203.031, REACTOR COOLANT PUMP AND MOTOR EMERGENCY, Rev. 26, Section 6 This JPM is an Alternate Success Path JPM.

INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to secure P-32A RCP per OP-1103.006 Section 10.0 starting at Step10.5.

Suggested simulator setup:

50% power Malfunction - IMF RC466 - Reverse Rotation for P-32A Override - DO HS1022_B;false (Prevents zero speed lamp for P-32A from coming on) 15 seconds after pump stop insert the following for vibrations:

IOR-DO K08B6 True - RCP VIB HI alarm IOR-DORCPA_R01 True - RCP VIB HI red light Revision 2 notes: Updated for procedure revisions.

Page 3 of 8 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to secure P-32A RCP per OP-1103.006 Section 10.0 starting at Step10.5.

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER QUE: If asked inform applicant that Step 10.3 is NOT desired, ie predictive maintenance will not be asked to install backup indication of RCP zero speed prior to RCP stop.

10.5.1 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A), THEN perform the following: Applicant will start either

  • HP Oil Lift Pump (P- ____ ____ ___

A. Start one of the following: 63A)

  • HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)
  • Emergency HP Oil Lift
  • Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A) Pump (P-80A)
1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO- Applicant will place other pump LOCK in PULL-TO-LOCK.
  • HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)
  • HP Oil Lift Pump (P-
  • Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A) 63A)
  • Emergency HP Oil Lift POSITIVE CUE: Pump (P-80A)

Red light ON and Green light OFF for selected pump to start.

Pump not started in PULL-TO-LOCK.

B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P- Applicant started Backup 82A). Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P- ____ ____ ___

82A).

POSITIVE CUE:

Red light ON and Green light OFF for P-82A C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Applicant verifies Backstop Oil Pump (P-81A). Lube Oil Pump (P-81A) ____ ____ ___

running.

POSITIVE CUE:

Red light ON and Green light OFF for P-81A

Page 4 of 8 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A). Applicant stops P-32A Reactor (c) Coolant Pump. ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE:

Green light ON and Red light OFF for P-32A E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop Not Applicable.

the remaining RCP within 2 minutes ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE:

P-32A is the only pump to be stopped, the other three are running.

Steps 10.5.2 through 10.5.4 are not applicable EXAMINER NOTE: Applicant may begin monitoring for reverse rotation at this point and if identified may proceed as directed by AOP 1203.031 which would have him trip the reactor and stop all RCPs OR he may continue with the normal operating procedure which will accomplish these same steps. The following JPM steps assume he stays in OP-1103.006.

If he transitions to the AOP, Step 6 will not be checked.

10.6 Perform the following during RCP coast down. Applicant verified appropriate pumps running. ____ ____ ___

10.6.1 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A)

  • HP Oil Lift Pump (P-stopped, THEN verify the following pumps 63A) remain on: OR
  • EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A) Emergency HP Oil Lift OR Pump (P-80A)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)

  • Backstop Lube Oil
  • Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81A) Pump (P-81A)

POSITIVE CUE:

Red light ON and Green light OFF for the two pumps previously started.

Green light ON and Red light OFF for the pump in PULL-TO-LOCK

Page 5 of 8 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 10.7.1 Perform the following to check no reverse rotation when the shaft stops: Applicant recognizes that plant (C)

  • IF associated RCS loop flow is no longer computer reverse rotation is in ____ ____ ___

dropping, THEN consider the shaft alarm.

stopped.

  • RCP P32A REVERSE
  • Plant computer reverse rotation alarm ROTATION (FS6510) remains clear.

o RCP P32A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

POSITIVE CUE:

RCS loop flow is no longer dropping BUT plant computer reverse rotation is in alarm.

RCP P32A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510).

EXAMINER NOTE: Step below is the same in both OP-1203.031 Section 6, RCP Reverse Rotation and OP-1103.006 Step 10.8.

Only the Reactor Trip and tripping all RCPs are critical, the turbine will trip automatically and SCM will remain adequate with no operator actions.

10.8 IF reverse rotation indicated, THEN perform Applicant will perform the (C) the following: following:

  • Trip the reactor and perform immediate Trip the reactor and perform actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001) immediate actions of Reactor ____ ____ ___

o Depress Reactor Trip PB, verify all Trip (1202.001) rods inserted and reactor power o Depress Reactor Trip dropping PB, verify all rods o Depress Turbine Trip PB, check inserted and reactor Turbine throttle and governor power dropping valves closed o Depress Turbine Trip o Check adequate SCM PB, check Turbine

  • Trip running RCP(s) throttle and governor
  • Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure valves closed (1202.XXX series) o Check adequate SCM Trip running RCP(s)

POSITIVE CUE: Refer to Emergency Operating Applicant will perform the following: Procedure (1202.001 Reactor Trip the reactor and perform immediate actions of Trip)

Reactor Trip (1202.001) o Depress Reactor Trip PB, verify all rods inserted and reactor power dropping o Depress Turbine Trip PB, check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed o Check adequate SCM Trip running RCP(s) o Green light ON and Red light OFF for all

Page 6 of 8 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT RCPs.

Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.001 Reactor Trip) o Applicant may state that immediate actions are complete and that he would continue through the Reactor Trip EOP.

EXAMINER NOTE: If desired and the applicant did not state, you can ask him where he would proceed from here.

The answer would be to continue in Reactor Trip EOP.

EXAMINER CUE: Inform applicant JPM is complete.

END

Page 7 of 8 The following is the guidance contained in 1203.031, Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency AOP.

This is not part of the included handout; it is only intended as a reference for the EXAMINER. These steps are included in the normal operating procedure (Step 10.8) that the applicant has already been given.

SECTION 6 RCP REVERSE ROTATION INSTRUCTIONS

1. Trip reactor AND perform immediate actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001).
2. Trip running RCP(s).
3. Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.XXX).

END

Page 8 of 8 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

Unit 1 is at 60% power.

Reactivity Management Brief was conducted prior to the down power.

It is not desired to have predictive maintenance install backup indication of RCP zero speed.

INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to secure P-32A Reactor Coolant Pump per OP-1103.006 Section 10.0 starting at Step10.5.

(Steps 10.1 through 10.4 have been completed as appropriate)

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 36 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.0 RCP Stop 10.1 IF RCP is tripped OR emergency manual trip is required, THEN refer to Reactor Coolant Pump Trip (1203.022).

CAUTION R The following section has been determined to have a Reactivity A Addition Potential (RAP) and this activity is classified as a P Risk Level R2.

10.2 IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT been conducted AND reactor is critical, THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief per COPD-030 with an SRO.

10.3 IF desired OR due to RCP monitoring equipment failure, THEN contact predictive maintenance to install backup indication of RCP zero speed prior to RCP stop.

{4.3.1}

CAUTION Stopping or shifting RCPs or changing RCP loop configuration when RPS is reset can cause a reactor trip or an ICS runback.

Stopping the last RCP prior to bypassing EFIC will cause EFW actuation.

10.4 IF RPS is reset and NOT in Shutdown Bypass, THEN perform the following:

Maintain 1 RCP per loop.

Notify load dispatcher of any load change.

IF stopping 1 of 4 RCPs, THEN reduce power to 70% using Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045)

OR Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016).

CAUTION Operation with only 1 RCP in each loop is permitted for 18 hours2.083333e-4 days <br />0.005 hours <br />2.97619e-5 weeks <br />6.849e-6 months <br /> with the Rx Critical per TS 3.4.4 Condition A. Mode 3 is required within an additional 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> per TS 3.4.4 Condition B.

CRITICAL STEP IF stopping 1 of 3 RCPs, resulting in 1 pump per loop, THEN reduce power to 40% using Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045)

OR Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 37 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 CAUTION Single pump operation in excess of 2 minutes may cause pump damage due to inadequate flow through the hydrostatic bearing.

NOTE Computer alarm BACKSTOP LO FLOW will not clear until both backstop oil pumps are running with adequate flow. (not applicable for P-32B) 10.5 Perform the following to stop RCP(s):

10.5.1 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A),

THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.

A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)

1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)

NOTE Flow through each Backstop Lube Oil Pump and Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump can be verified utilizing the following computer points:

P-81A (FS-6520)

P-82A (FS-6525)

B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82A).

C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81A).

D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A).

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.

E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 38 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.5.2 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C),

THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.

A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

NOTE Flow through each Backstop Lube Oil Pump and Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump can be verified utilizing the following computer points:

P-81C (FS-6522)

P-82C (FS-6527)

B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C).

C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C).

D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C).

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.

E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 39 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.5.3 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32D),

THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.

A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63D)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80D)

1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63D)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80D)

NOTE Flow through each Backstop Lube Oil Pump and Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump can be verified utilizing the following computer points:

P-81D (FS-6523)

P-82D (FS-6528)

B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82D).

C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81D).

D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32D).

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.

E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 40 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.5.4 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B),

THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.

A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63B)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80B)

1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63B)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80B)

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.

B. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B).

C. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 41 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.6 Perform the following during RCP coast down:

10.6.1 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A) stopped, THEN verify the following pumps remain on:

EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

OR Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)

Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81A) 10.6.2 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C) stopped, THEN verify the following pumps remain on:

EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

OR Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C) 10.6.3 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32D) stopped, THEN verify the following pumps remain on:

EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63D)

OR Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80D)

Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81D) 10.6.4 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) stopped, THEN verify HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63B) remains on.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 42 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.7 Perform the following to check no reverse rotation when the shaft stops:

IF desired OR due to RCP monitoring equipment failure, THEN verify Predictive Maintenance contacted to install backup indication of zero speed.

IF associated RCS loop flow is no longer dropping, THEN consider the shaft stopped.

Plant computer reverse rotation alarm remains clear.(not applicable for P-32B)

RCP P32-D REVERSE ROTATION (FS6513)

RCP P32-C REVERSE ROTATION (FS6512)

RCP P32-A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

NOTE Reverse rotation is indicated by the following:

Computer alarm based on reverse lube oil flow RCP high vibration RCP motor bearing high temperature CRITICAL STEP 10.8 IF reverse rotation indicated, THEN perform the following:

10.8.1 Trip the reactor and perform immediate actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001).

10.8.2 Trip running RCP(s).

10.8.3 Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.XXX series).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 43 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 CAUTION Due to Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C) oil system re-design in 1R22, all four oil pumps (P-80C, P-63C, P-81C and P-82C) must be stopped within 25 minutes of Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C) shaft stopping to prevent reaching thrust bearing high temperature alarm at 190 F.

Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) oil system has lift oil pumps taking suction from the oil reservoir rather than the coolers thus heating up the oil (167 F alarm) after the pump shaft has stopped and must have oil pumps secured after the shaft has stopped (CR-ANO-1-2005-3096).

10.9 WHEN shaft has stopped, THEN stop all oil pumps for the idle RCP by placing handswitches in PULL-TO-LOCK. (Backstop Lube Oil Pump not applicable to P-32B)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A thru D)

HP Oil Lift Pumps (P-63A thru D)

Backstop Lube Oil Pumps (P-81A, C, and D)

Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pumps (P-82A, C, and D) 10.10 While RCS is >150°F, maintain seal injection flow and ICW flow to RCP Seal Cooling Water Heat Exchangers (E-25A thru D).

10.10.1 Maintain ICW flow to RCP Motor Air Coolers.

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41A1 and E-41A2)

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41B1 and E-41B2)

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41C1 and E-41C2)

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41D1 and E-41D2)

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 44 of 79 1103.006 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION CHANGE: 044 10.11 IF RCP stop at power, THEN perform the following:

10.11.1 Lower the ULD HI-Load Limit 5% below runback limit.

NOTE RCP breaker status (normal or tripped) feeds NSSS Index Point which is used in the heat balance power calculation.

10.11.2 Verify Plant Computer reflects current RCP breaker status:

ZS1H11 ZS1H12 ZS1H21 ZS1H22 A. IF breaker status is incorrect, THEN contact Computer Support to update Plant Computer to match current breaker status.

NOTE The Temperature Compensated Total Flow (XWRCFT) and RC Pressure (P1021, P1023, P1038, P1039) alarm limits for the Plant Computer are dependent upon RCP combination. Normally Plant Computer alarm setpoints are operator adjustable, however, these points are some of the alarm points that are blocked that are carried on Tech Spec Cross-check log (OPS-A24). Refer to Unit 1 Operations Logs (1015.003A), Attachment C for these alarm limits.

10.11.3 Request Computer Support to adjust XWRCFT and RC pressure (4 points) alarms for current RCP status.

10.11.4 Continue plant operations per Power Operation (1102.004).

CHANGE 1203.031 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP AND MOTOR EMERGENCY 026 PAGE 34 of 41 SECTION 6 RCP REVERSE ROTATION ENTRY CONDITIONS Associated RCS loop flow indicates lower than expected Plant computer reverse rotation alarm on idle RCP. (not applicable for P-32B)

- RCP P32-A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

- RCP P32-C REVERSE ROTATION (FS6512)

- RCP P32-D REVERSE ROTATION (FS6513)

RCP high vibration RCP motor bearing high temperature Loss of zero speed indication on idle RCP (Indicated by portable instrumentation).

CHANGE 1203.031 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP AND MOTOR EMERGENCY 026 PAGE 35 of 41 SECTION 6 RCP REVERSE ROTATION INSTRUCTIONS

1. Trip reactor AND perform immediate actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001).
2. Trip running RCP(s).
3. Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.XXX).

END REFERENCES CR-1-92-0341 Indications of Reverse Rotation CR-1-96-0580 Zero Speed Indication Failure

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S5

Page 1 of 5 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 8 Date: 6/14/2016 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 System/Duty Area: Pressurizer Relief Tank/Quench Tank System (PRTS)

Task: Transfer the PRT (quench tank) contents JTA# ANO1-RO-PZR-NORM-15 KA Value RO 2.9 SRO 3.1 KA

Reference:

007 A1.01 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR Outside CR X Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site Simulator Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): OP-1103.005 Rev. 45, PRESSURIZER OPERATION, Section 13.0 Examinee's Name: ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 5 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

The plant is at steady state operations.

QUENCH TANK LEVEL HI/LO (K09-B4) annunciator is in alarm due to high level caused by RCP seal leakage.

The Clean Liquid Radwaste system is aligned to receive Quench Tank contents with the Vacuum Degasifier bypassed.

TASK STANDARD:

Quench Tank level lowered and high level alarm cleared (K09-B4).

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

OP-1103.005 Rev. 45, PRESSURIZER OPERATION, Section 13.0.

Revision 8 Note: Updated for procedure revision.

Page 3 of 5 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to transfer water from the Quench Tank to the clean liquid Radwaste system to clear the Quench Tank Hi Level alarm starting at Step 13.5. The ATC will calculate the QT Fill rate.

(C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER CUE: IF NEEDED, Acknowledge the applicant if he discusses the potential need to add N2 during the transfer. (Step 13.1)

Inform applicant that the Clean Liquid Radwaste System alignment has been verified aligned to receive waste water per OP-1104.020. (Step 13.2)

Inform applicant that the vacuum degasifier is bypassed per OP-1104.016. (Step 13.4) 13.5 Verify Vacuum Degasifier Outlet (HS-4614) Applicant verified Vacuum in CWRTS position. Degasifier Outlet (HS-4614) in CWRTS position. ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE:

HS-4614 is in CWRTS position EXAMINER CUE: Inform applicant that the ATC will record stop data on the Quench Tank Fillrate Log (OPS-A11) 13.6 Record Stop Data on Quench Tank Fill rate N/A Log ____ ____ ___

(OPS-A11)

POSITIVE CUE:

Data entered on OPS-A11.

13.7 Open both Quench Tank Outlet Isolations: Applicant Opened both:

  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)
  • Quench Tank T42 (C)
  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052) Drain (CV-1053)
  • Quench Tank T42 ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE: Drain (CV-1052)

Red light ON and Green light OFF for:

  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)
  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052) 13.8 Place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump Applicant starts P-44, Quench (P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to START. Tank T42 Transfer Pump. ____ ____ ___

(C)

POSITIVE CUE:

Red light ON, Green light OFF for P-44.

Page 4 of 5 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 (C) PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER NOTE: Per the initial conditions sampling is not desired; Steps 13.9 is N/A. N2 overpressure has been maintained, so gas sample is not required; Step 13.10 is N/A EXAMINER CUE: When the applicant recognizes that the high level alarm is cleared, inform him that the CRS directs stopping the transfer.

13.11 WHEN either of the following criteria is Applicant stops P-44, Quench (C) met, Tank T42 Transfer Pump. ____ ____ ___

  • Quench Tank volume is lowered to desired volume, >5100 gallons
  • Quench Tank pressure drops to 1 psig THEN place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump (P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to STOP.

POSITIVE CUE:

Red light OFF, Green light ON.

13.12 Close the following valves: Applicant Closed both:

(C)

  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)
  • Quench Tank T42
  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053) Drain (CV-1052)
  • Quench Tank T42 ____ ____ ___

POSITIVE CUE: Drain (CV-1053)

Green light ON and Red light OFF for:

  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)
  • Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)

EXAMINER NOTE: Inform applicant JPM is complete.

END

Page 5 of 5 JPM ID: ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

The plant is at steady state operations.

QUENCH TANK LEVEL HI/LO (K09-B4) annunciator is in alarm due to high level caused by RCP seal leakage.

The Clean Liquid Radwaste system is aligned to receive Quench Tank contents with the Vacuum Degasifier bypassed per 1104.016.

Chemistry sampling is not required.

INITIATING CUE:

CRS directs you to transfer from the Quench Tank to the Clean Liquid Radwaste system to clear the Quench Tank Hi Level alarm starting at Step 13.5.

The ATC will calculate the QT Fill rate.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 24 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 13.0 Transferring from Quench Tank to Clean Liquid Radwaste System CAUTION With a steam bubble in pressurizer, Quench Tank level is maintained between 4000 and 8300 gallons to provide sufficient quench cooling volume for pressurizer transients.

Lowering Quench Tank pressure to < 1 psig indicated can cause tank collapse.

13.1 Add N2 to Quench Tank as necessary per Adding N2 to the Quench Tank section to maintain pressure 1 psig while lowering level.

13.2 Verify Clean Liquid Radwaste System aligned per System Alignment Verification section of Conduct of Operations (1015.001) to receive waste water.

13.3 IF desired to place Vacuum Degasifier into service, THEN perform the following:

13.3.1 Verify Vacuum Degasifier aligned per System Alignment Verification section of Conduct of Operations (1015.001).

13.3.2 Verify Vacuum Degasifier is in service per Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016) to pump to CWRTs.

13.3.3 Notify Control Room that vacuum degasifier is ready to receive liquid.

13.4 IF desired to bypass the Vacuum Degasifier, THEN verify Vacuum Degasifier bypassed per "Vacuum Degasifier Bypass Mode Operation" section of Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016).

13.5 Verify Vacuum Degasifier Outlet (HS-4614) in CWRTS position.

13.6 Record Stop Data on Quench Tank Fillrate Log (OPS-A11).

NOTE Quench tank low level alarm setpoint is 5071 gallons.

13.7 Open both Quench Tank Outlet Isolations:

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052) 13.8 Place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump (P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to START.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 25 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 13.9 IF Quench Tank liquid sampling is desired, THEN perform the following:

13.9.1 Notify Chemistry.

Chemistry ______________________________________

13.9.2 Open Quench Tank Trans Pump P-44 Disch Sample Vlv (SS-31).

13.9.3 WHEN sampling is complete, THEN close Quench Tank Trans Pump P-44 Disch Sample Vlv (SS-31).

NOTE Quench Tank gas sample is typically performed if N2 overpressure is not being maintained during normal operation. This is due to the potential for explosive mixtures in the gas space.

13.10 IF Quench Tank N2 overpressure is NOT being maintained during normal operation, THEN perform Quench Tank gas sampling as follows:

13.10.1 Open the following valves:

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1845)

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1054) 13.10.2 Align H2/O2 Analyzer Panel to sample the Quench Tank per Hydrogen-Oxygen Analyzer System (1104.010).

A. IF H2/O2 Analyzer Panel (C119) is desired, THEN align H2/O2 Analyzer Panel (C119) to sample the Quench Tank.

B. IF H2/O2 Analyzer Panel (C119A) is desired, THEN perform the following:

1. Open Quench Tank to Sample Isolation (SS-578).
2. Select H2/O2 Analyzer Panel (C119A) to sample HEADER.

13.10.3 WHEN sampling is complete, THEN perform the following:

A. Align H2/O2 Analyzer Panel C119 or C119A as desired per Hydrogen-Oxygen Analyzer System (1104.010).

1. IF H2/O2 Analyzer Panel (C119A) was selected, THEN close Quench Tank to Sample Isolation (SS-578).

B. Close the following valves:

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1845)

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1054)

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 26 of 61 1103.005 PRESSURIZER OPERATION CHANGE: 045 NOTE Quench tank low level alarm setpoint is 5071 gallons.

13.11 WHEN either of the following criterion is met, Quench Tank volume is lowered to desired volume, > 5100 gallons Quench Tank pressure drops to 1 psig THEN place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump (P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to STOP.

13.12 Close the following valves:

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053) 13.13 Record Start Data on Quench Tank Fillrate Log OPS-A11.

13.14 IF Vacuum Degasifier is in-service for degasification, THEN secure per "Securing Vacuum Degasifier" section of Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016).

13.15 Calculate Quench Tank fill rate using Quench Tank Fillrate Log OPS-A11.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S6

Page 1 of 9 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 0 Date: 6/14/2016 JPM ID A1JPM-RO-ED032 System/Duty Area: ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Task: Perform Transferring Buses From Unit Aux Transformer to a Startup Transformer JTA# ANO1-RO-ELECD-NORM-27 KA Value RO 3.1 SRO 3.1 KA Reference 062 A4.07 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR: X Outside CR: Both:

Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Simulator : Plant Site: Lab Testing Method: Simulate: Perform:

Approximate Completion Time In Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): OP-1107.001, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS, Rev. 110 Examinee's Name: ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed : Date:
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 9 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ED009 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Plant is <50% power during a shutdown in preparation for 1R26.

TASK STANDARD:

All 4160 kV and 6900 kV buses powered from SU 1 Transformer This is an Alternate Success Path JPM.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:

OP-1107.001, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATION Step 8.0.

SIMULATOR SETUP:

Recall an IC with power <50%.

Page 3 of 9 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ED032 INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS directs you to transfer plant auxiliaries per step 8.0 of OP-1107.001, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS.

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER NOTE: Acknowledge applicants understanding of elevated risk and if questioned, insist that they continue.

EXAMINER CUE: If asked, inform the applicant that the Auto Transformer is powered from a 500 kV source and the SU1 Automatic Voltage Regulator is In-service.

8.1 Perform the following: From Initial Conditions, Applicant given that SU1 is 8.1.1 Check SU1Transformer is considered operable and flash boundary operable. established.

8.1.2 IF time permits, THEN establish flash protection boundary at affected breakers.

POSITIVE CUE: SU1 is >22 kV and B0125 to SU1 is closed.

Flash boundary established.

EXAMINER NOTE: CAUTION - High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

Page 4 of 9 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 8.2 IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

C Applicant transferred A1 from 8.2.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A1 (A- Unit Aux to SU1.

113) NOT in Local.

8.2.2 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.2.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 oclock.

8.2.4 Close A-113 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.2.5 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.2.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A1 (A-112) open.

A. IF A-112 is NOT open, THEN trip A-112.

1. IF A-112 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-113.
2. Initiate Condition Report 8.2.7 IF A-112 opened automatically, THEN place A-112 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

POSITIVE CUE:

Amber LOCAL light OFF for A-113.

Synchroscope at 12 oclock.

Red light ON, Green light OFF for A-113.

Green light ON, Red light OFF for A-112.

A-112 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

Page 5 of 9 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ED032 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 8.3 IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

C Applicant transferred A2 from 8.3.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A2 (A- Unit Aux to SU1.

213) NOT in Local.

8.3.2 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.3.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 oclock.

8.3.4 Close A-213 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.3.5 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.3.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A2 (A-212) open.

A. IF A-212 is NOT open, THEN trip A-212.

1. IF A-212 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-213.
2. Initiate Condition Report 8.3.7 IF A-212 opened automatically, THEN place A-212 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

POSITIVE CUE:

Amber LOCAL light OFF for A-213.

Synchroscope at 12 oclock.

Red light ON, Green light OFF for A-213.

Green light ON, Red light OFF for A-212.

A-212 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

Page 6 of 9 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ED032 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER NOTE: During the transfer of the H1 bus H-14 will not open automatically but will open manually when the applicant takes the HS to NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

8.4 IF desired to transfer H1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

C Applicant transferred H1 from 8.4.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H1 (H- Unit Aux to SU1

15) NOT in Local. AND Recognized the need to 8.4.2 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to ON. manually open H-14.

8.4.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 oclock.

8.4.4 Close H-15 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.4.5 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.4.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H1 (H-14) open.

A. IF H-14 is NOT open, THEN trip H-14.

1. IF H-14 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-15.
2. Initiate Condition Report 8.4.7 IF H-14 opened automatically, THEN place H-14 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

POSITIVE CUE:

Amber LOCAL light OFF for H-15.

Synchroscope at 12 oclock.

Red light ON, Green light OFF for H-15.

Green light ON, Red light OFF for H-14.

H-14 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

Condition Report will be written by another crew member.

Page 7 of 9 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ED032 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 8.4 IF desired to transfer H2 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

C 8.4.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H2 (H- Applicant transferred H2 from

25) NOT in Local. Unit Aux to SU1.

8.4.2 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.4.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 oclock.

8.4.4 Close H-25 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.4.5 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.4.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H2 (H-24) open.

A. IF H-24 is NOT open, THEN trip H-24.

1. IF H-24 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-25.
2. Initiate Condition Report 8.4.7 IF H-24 opened automatically, THEN place H-24 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

POSITIVE CUE:

Amber LOCAL light OFF for H-25.

Synchroscope at 12 oclock.

Red light ON, Green light OFF for H-25.

Green light ON, Red light OFF for H-24.

H-24 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

Page 8 of 9 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 8.6 Check the following bus voltages:

  • 4160v buses greater than 3640v (C10).
  • 6900v buses greater than 6010v (C10) Applicant verified proper
  • 480v buses between 460v and 500v voltages on C10 and SPDS as (SPDS E1B5/E1B6) appropriate.

8.6.1 IF necessary, THEN adjust per Startup Transformer Voltage Regulator Operation ____ ____ ___

section of this procedure.

POSITIVE CUE:

4160v buses greater than 3640v (C10).

6900v buses greater than 6010v (C10).

480v buses between 460v and 500v (SPDS E1B5/E1B6).

END

Page 9 of 9 JPM NUMBER: A1JPM-RO-ED032 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

Plant is <50% power during a shutdown in preparation for 1R26.

S/U #1 has been verified operable.

Flash protection boundary has been established at affected breakers.

INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS directs you to transfer plant auxiliaries per step 8.0 of OP-1107.001.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 20 of 392 1107.001 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS CHANGE: 110 NOTE Supplying ANO-1 from an off-site source (SU#1 and/or SU#2) will raise the risk of a grid-initiated offsite source feeder undervoltage relay actuation which will trip the offsite feeder breaker(s) to A and H buses and initiate auto-transfer of these buses to the selected offsite source (Refer to CR-ANO-2-2014-0707).

8.0 Transferring Buses from Unit Aux to SU1 8.1 Perform the following:

8.1.1 Check SU1 Transformer is considered operable.

8.1.2 IF time permits, THEN establish flash protection boundary at affected breakers.

{4.3.4}

CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.2 IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.2.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A1 (A-113) NOT in Local.

8.2.2 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.2.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.2.4 Close A-113 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.2.5 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.2.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A1 (A-112) open.

CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}

A. IF A-112 is NOT open, THEN trip A-112.

1. IF A-112 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-113.
2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.2.7 IF A-112 opened automatically, THEN place A-112 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 21 of 392 1107.001 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS CHANGE: 110

{4.3.4}

CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.3 IF desired to transfer A2 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.3.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A2 (A-213) NOT in Local.

8.3.2 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.3.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.3.4 Close A-213 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.3.5 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.3.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A2 (A-212) open.

CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}

A. IF A-212 is NOT open, THEN trip A-212.

1. IF A-212 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-213.
2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.3.7 IF A-212 opened automatically, THEN place A-212 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 22 of 392 1107.001 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS CHANGE: 110

{4.3.4}

CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.4 IF desired to transfer H1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.4.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H1 (H-15) NOT in Local.

8.4.2 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.4.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.4.4 Close H-15 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.4.5 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.4.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H1 (H-14) open.

CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}

A. IF H-14 is NOT open, THEN trip H-14.

1. IF H-14 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-15.
2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.4.7 IF H-14 opened automatically, THEN place H-14 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 23 of 392 1107.001 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS CHANGE: 110

{4.3.4}

CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.5 IF desired to transfer H2 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.5.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H2 (H-25) NOT in Local.

8.5.2 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.5.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.5.4 Close H-25 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.5.5 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.5.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H2 (H-24) open.

CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}

A. IF H-24 is NOT open, THEN trip H-24.

1. IF H-24 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-25.
2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.5.7 IF H-24 opened automatically, THEN place H-24 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

8.6 Check the following bus voltages:

4160V buses greater than 3640V (C10) 6900V buses greater than 6010V (C10) 480V buses between 460V and 500V (SPDS E1B5/E1B6) 8.6.1 IF necessary, THEN adjust per "Startup Transformer Voltage Regulator Operation" section of this procedure.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S7

Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 0 Date:

JPM ID A1JPM-RO-INST01 (S7)

System/Duty Area: INSTRUMENTATION Task: Verify Main Condenser Process Radiation Monitor (RI-3632) Alarm Setpoint JTA# ANO1-WCO-RMS-SURV-13 KA Value RO 3.7 SRO 3.7 KA Reference 073 A4.02 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO Task Location: Inside CR: X Outside CR: Both:

Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Simulator : X Plant Site: Lab Testing Method: Simulate: Perform: X Approximate Completion Time In Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): OP-1305.001, RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST Change 22 SUPPLEMENT 5 PROCESS MONITOR MONTLY ALARM CHECK.

Examinee's Name: Logon ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed : Date:
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-INST01 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

Plant is at any Power TASK STANDARD:

Main Condenser Process Radiation Monitor (RI-3632) Alarm Setpoint verified less than or equal to 2 times background.

This is an Alternate Success Path JPM.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: OP-1305.001, RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE 22 SUPPLEMENT 5 PROCESS MONITOR MONTLY ALARM CHECK.

SIMULATOR SETUP:

Can be performed with any initial IC setup Establish Main Condenser Process Radiation Monitor (RI-3632) alarm setpoint at 1.4E03 cpm.

Insert Malfunction RM 3632 to 500 cpm.

Page 3 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-INST01 INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS directs you to verify Main Condenser Process Radiation Monitor (RI-3632) Alarm Setpoint in accordance with OP-1305.001, Radiation Monitoring System Check and Test, Supplement 5, Process Monitor Monthly Alarm Check starting at Step 2.1.

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT EXAMINER NOTE: Two of the limits and precautions are applicable to this JPM and are listed below. No actions are required at this time based on the limits and precaution.

  • High alarm setpoints are normally set at £ 2 times average background readings but not None less than 100 cpm. This is to provide early detection of rising activity levels. Process monitor operability in regards to high background is checked by ensuring that monitor setpoints are not set greater than the Acceptable Limits listed in Acceptance Criteria section 3.0.
  • All process monitor drawers must be secured in their panels to be seismically qualified.

2.1 Perform one of the following: N/A method not used.

  • IF performing the monthly test, THEN complete entire supplement.
  • IF performing this supplement for other than monthly requirement, Applicant will perform THEN perform applicable steps for applicable steps for RI-3632. ____ ____ ___

process monitor(s) determined by the SM/CRS and N/A all others.

POSITIVE CUE: If asked this is NOT a normal monthly test, this is being performed to adjust RI-3632 only.

C 2.2 For each monitor in Table 1 record Background reading ~ 5 E02 background reading in Table 1. cpm.

Records background reading of RI-3632 on Table 1.

POSITIVE CUE: Background reading 500 cpm as indicated on the process monitor.

Page 4 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-INST01 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.3 For each monitor in Table 1 double background reading. 2 X ~5 E02 = ~1 E03 cpm Records doubled background

  • Record doubled background reading reading in Table 1.

in Table 1.

POSITIVE CUE: Applicant calculates 1000 cpm as the doubled value.

2.4 For each monitor in Table 1 record current setpoint in Table 1. Notes current setpoint reading at 1.4 E03 cpm.

POSITIVE CUE: Applicant records 1.4 E03 cpm. Records current setpoint reading in Table 1.

EXAMINER NOTE: The setpoint of RI 3632 should normally already be established at less than the doubled background reading. The Alternate Path of this JPM is to note that the setpoint is higher than the doubled background reading calculation and that an adjustment will need to be made to restore the setpoint to less than or equal to the doubled background reading. The highest the alarm can be set at is 1.0E03, it is acceptable to have a setting of less than 1.0E03.

Expect the applicants to set it at 1000 cpm.

Page 5 of 6 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UN SAT 2.5 For each monitor in Table 1 adjust setpoint C as necessary per the following:

2.5.1 IF no setpoint adjustment is necessary, THEN record as-left setpoint in Table 1. Determines that the setpoint reading of RI-3632 is greater 2.5.2 IF setpoint is currently greater than doubled than the doubled background background reading, THEN perform ONE of calculated in step 2.3 and will the following: require an adjustment.

A. Adjust the setpoint to the doubled Adjusts the alarm setpoint to background reading OR 100 cpm, <1.0 E 3 (1000 cpm) whichever is greater.

  • Record as-left setpoint in Table 1. Records as-left setpoint.

B. IF ONE of the following conditions exist:

  • It is desired to adjust setpoint to less than doubled background in order to improve monitor sensitivity
  • The monitor is alarming frequently due to background fluctuations greater than 2 times the normal background THEN perform the following:
  • Adjust alarm setpoint as directed by SM/CRS
  • Record as-left setpoint in Table 1.
  • Record condition in section 4.0.

POSITIVE CUE: If asked the SM directs 2 times background.

Inform applicant that the JPM is complete.

Reset RI-3632 setpoint to 1.4E03 in preparation for the next applicant.

END

Page 6 of 6 JPM NUMBER: A1JPM-RO-INST01 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

Plant is at 100% Power INITIATING CUE:

The SM/CRS directs you to verify Main Condenser Process Radiation Monitor (RI-3632) Alarm Setpoint in accordance with OP-1305.001, Radiation Monitoring System Check and Test, Supplement 5, Process Monitor Monthly Alarm Check starting at Step 2.1.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 34 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 1 of 10 PROCESS MONITOR MONTHLY ALARM CHECK This check determines high alarm setpoints for Unit 1 Process Monitors and verifies previous alarm setpoints are acceptable.

1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS 1.1 Check purpose of this test:

__ Regularly scheduled monthly test

__ Other (Describe in Section 4.0.)

1.2 Observe the following limits and precautions:

High alarm setpoints are normally set at 2 times average background readings but not less than 100 cpm. This is to provide early detection of rising activity levels. Process monitor operability in regards to high background is checked by ensuring that monitor setpoints are not set greater than the Acceptable Limits listed in Acceptance Criteria section 3.0.

If background values are fluctuating so as to cause frequent alarms, the setpoint may be adjusted above 2 times the average background to limit spurious alarms. Consult CRS/SM and Chemistry to determine appropriate setpoint.

The high alarm setpoints for Liquid Radwaste (RI-4642) or Gaseous Radwaste (RI-4830) during a release are determined by Nuclear Chemistry and controlled through the appropriate release permit.

All process monitor drawers must be secured in their panels to be seismically qualified.

2.0 TEST METHOD 2.1 Perform one of the following: N/A method not used.

IF performing the monthly test, THEN complete entire supplement.

IF performing this supplement for other than monthly requirement, THEN perform applicable steps for process monitor(s) determined by the SM/CRS and N/A all others.

2.2 For each monitor in Table 1 record background reading in Table 1.

2.3 For each monitor in Table 1 double background reading.

Record doubled background reading in Table 1.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 35 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 2 of 10 2.4 For each monitor in Table 1 record current setpoint in Table 1.

NOTE High Alarm setpoints should be adjusted as necessary to a value high enough to preclude high alarm actuations due to electrical deflections but low enough to detect rising radiation levels as early as possible.

If 2 times background results in the alarm setpoint being significantly above the stable background reading, it may be advisable to have an alarm setpoint <2 times background in interest of maintaining conservative operating philosophy.

2.5 For each monitor in Table 1 adjust setpoint as necessary per the following:

2.5.1 IF no setpoint adjustment is necessary, THEN record as-left setpoint in Table 1.

2.5.2 IF setpoint is currently greater than doubled background reading, THEN perform ONE of the following:

A. Adjust the setpoint to the doubled background reading OR 100 cpm, whichever is greater.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 1.

B. IF ONE of the following conditions exist:

It is desired to adjust setpoint to less than doubled background in order to improve monitor sensitivity The monitor is alarming frequently due to background fluctuations greater than 2 times the normal background THEN perform the following:

Adjust alarm setpoint as directed by SM/CRS Record as-left setpoint in Table 1.

Record condition in section 4.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 36 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 3 of 10 2.5.3 IF setpoint is currently less than doubled background reading, THEN perform the following:

A. Adjust setpoint at or below doubled background reading as desired.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 1.

B. IF monitor is alarming frequently due to normal background deflections THEN perform the following:

Adjust alarm setpoint as directed by SM/CRS.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 1.

Record condition in section 4.0.

2.6 For each monitor in Table 2 record background reading in Table 2.

2.7 For each monitor in Table 2 double background reading.

Record doubled background reading in Table 2.

2.8 For each monitor in Table 2 record current setpoint in Table 2.

NOTE High Alarm setpoints should be adjusted as necessary to a value high enough to preclude high alarm actuations due to electrical deflections but low enough to detect rising radiation levels as early as possible.

If 2 times background results in the alarm setpoint being significantly above the stable background reading, it may be advisable to have an alarm setpoint <2 times background in interest of maintaining conservative operating philosophy.

2.9 For each monitor in Table 2 adjust setpoint as necessary per the following:

2.9.1 IF no setpoint adjustment is necessary THEN record as-left setpoint in Table 2.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 37 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 4 of 10 2.9.2 IF setpoint is currently greater than doubled background reading, THEN perform ONE of the following:

A. Adjust the setpoint per step 2.9.4 to doubled background reading OR 100 cpm, whichever is greater.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 2.

B. IF ONE of the following conditions exist:

It is desired to adjust setpoint to less than doubled background in order to improve monitor sensitivity Monitor is alarming frequently due to background fluctuations greater than 2 times normal background THEN perform the following:

Adjust alarm setpoint per step 2.9.4 as directed by SM/CRS Record as-left setpoint in Table 2.

Record condition in section 4.0.

2.9.3 IF setpoint is currently less than doubled background reading, THEN perform the following:

A. Adjust setpoint per step 2.9.4 at or below doubled background reading as desired.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 2.

B. IF monitor is alarming frequently due to normal background deflections, THEN perform the following:

Adjust alarm setpoint per step 2.9.4 as directed by SM/CRS.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 2.

Record condition in section 4.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 38 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 5 of 10 2.9.4 IF it is necessary, THEN adjust RB Particulate Monitor (RI-7460) or RB Gaseous Monitor (RI-7461) high alarm setpoint by performing the following:

A. Place monitor key in keyswitch AND turn to "Keypad" position.

B. Depress [MODE] switch until "HIGH" alarm setpoint display appears.

NOTE During set procedure the item being determined will be flashing. This will either be a single digit or a detector mode. Actuating the [ ] switch will toggle the digit 0 through 9 or toggle the detector mode. Actuating the

[SET] switch enters that item and begins flashing the next item to be determined. Once all required information has been entered, the original display will return.

C. Perform the following to set "HIGH" alarm setpoint:

1. Depress [SET] switch.
2. Check current count rate setpoint exponent is flashing.
3. Depress [ ] switch repeatedly to obtain desired value (0 through 9).
4. Depress [SET] switch to enter value.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 until desired setpoint is entered.

D. Check "HIGH" alarm setpoint display automatically appears.

E. Place keyswitch in "ON" position.

F. Depress mode switch to the high alarm setpoint.

1. Check desired setpoint is displayed.

G. IF setpoint was raised, THEN request Containment Atmosphere sample from Chemistry.

H. Record As-left setpoint in Table 2.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 39 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 6 of 10 2.10 For each monitor in Table 3 record the background reading in Table 3.

2.11 For each monitor in Table 3 double the background reading.

Record doubled background reading in Table 3.

2.12 For each monitor in Table 3 record the current setpoint in Table 3.

NOTE High Alarm setpoints should be adjusted as necessary to a value high enough to preclude high alarm actuations due to electrical deflections but low enough to detect rising radiation levels as early as possible.

If 2 times background results in the alarm setpoint being significantly above the stable background reading, it may be advisable to have an alarm setpoint <2 times background in interest of maintaining conservative operating philosophy.

2.13 For each monitor in Table 3 adjust the setpoint as necessary per the following:

2.13.1 IF no setpoint adjustment is necessary THEN record as-left setpoint in Table 3.

2.13.2 IF setpoint is currently greater than the doubled background reading, THEN perform ONE of the following:

A. Adjust the setpoint to the doubled background reading OR 100 cpm, whichever is greater.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 3.

B. IF ONE of the following conditions exist:

It is desired to adjust setpoint to less than doubled background in order to improve monitor sensitivity Monitor is alarming frequently due to background fluctuations greater than 2 times normal background THEN perform the following:

Adjust alarm setpoint as directed by SM/CRS Record as-left setpoint in Table 3.

Record condition in section 4.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 40 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 7 of 10 2.13.3 IF the setpoint is currently less than the doubled background reading, THEN perform the following:

A. Adjust the setpoint at or below the doubled background reading as desired.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 3.

B. IF the monitor is alarming frequently due to normal background deflections THEN perform the following:

Adjust alarm setpoint as directed by SM/CRS.

Record as-left setpoint in Table 3.

Record condition in section 4.0.

2.14 Insure all fasteners of each bay drawer are properly secured.

2.15 For all monitors except RB Particulate Monitor (RI-7460) (which is not on Plant Monitoring System (PMS)), use Database Management function of Plant Monitoring System (PMS) to adjust Process Monitor alarm setpoints to be in accordance with as-left setpoints of this supplement.

i PROCJWORK PLAN NO.

1305.001 I PROCEDUREIWORK PLAN TITLE:

RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST PAGE: 41 of 72 CHANGE: 022 ACCE:rOCE ORISESIA

3. Record requateo cata aad corpare Asleft setoojot wLh Accectaoe IABOE I 4

Sacs Doubra urreoc AsLeft Acceptab e Sepo c est Qua .ti groad Back- Setpftnt Set- WittIr TOe cro: eciac Acceptable Disharqe Plume JJ P14 44 44 4 0E6 rpm N/a NO 1rce:redia:e Clog Loop A (RI-2237) j 101 to 4.0E6 cpm YES N/A NO Decay Heat opBsl f 4E6cc ZS 1op 2 RI-38]5 4.flE6 coo. YES N/A NO aiied Puei

  • 102 Eross R-I23 2. ftE6 cam YS Nft NC Pal eN Pae
  • IOu o Idi:(Rl/u!s 1 0P or E NO ftteroeda e 12 to Y 0 p ft NJ N t 1 ft

.s_ i t S

_L

-i-j -z

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 42 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 9 of 10 3.2 Record required data and compare As-left setpoint with "Acceptable Limits".

TABLE 2 Is As-Left Back- Double Current As-Left Acceptable Setpoint Test Quantity ground Back- Setpoint Set- Limits Within The ground point Acceptable Limits?

RB Particulate 100 to (RI-7460) 8.9E6 cpm YES N/A NO RB Gaseous 100 to (RI-7461) 8.9E6 cpm YES N/A NO 3.3 Record required data and compare As-left setpoint with "Acceptable Limits".

TABLE 3 Is As-Left Back- Double Current As-Left Acceptable Setpoint Test Quantity ground Back- Setpoint Setpoint Limits Within The ground Acceptable Limits?

Liquid Radwaste 100 to (RI-4642) 4.22E6 cpm YES N/A NO Gaseous Radwaste 100 to (RI-4830) 8.9E6 cpm YES N/A NO 3.4 IF "NO" is circled in Table 1, 2 or 3, THEN perform the following:

Immediately notify the Shift Manager/CRS Initiate corrective action.

Reference applicable TS Conditions for Required Actions.

Performed by _________________________Operator Date/Time _______________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 43 of 72 1305.001 RADIATION MONITORING SYSTEM CHECK AND TEST CHANGE: 022 SUPPLEMENT 5 Page 10 of 10 4.0 SUPERVISOR REVIEW AND ANALYSIS (circle one) 4.1 Do the measured values recorded in the Acceptance Criteria section fall within the "Acceptable Limits"? ............... YES NO 4.2 IF answer to 4.1 is "NO", THEN describe action taken below.

4.3 Have all of the administrative requirements of this test been satisfied (i.e., all initial blocks initialed or N/A'd, all data entered, applicable signature spaces signed, etc.)?...........YES NO SUPERVISOR ______________________________________________DATE____________________

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S8

Page 1 of 6 JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE Unit: 1 Rev # 9 Date:

JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ICW02 System/Duty Area: Intermediate Cooling Water Task: Perform Switching of ICW Pumps (P-33A/B/C)

JTA# ANO1-RO-ICW-NORM-27 KA Value RO 3.3 SRO 3.1 KA

Reference:

008 A4.01 Approved For Administration To: RO X SRO X Task Location: Inside CR X Outside CR Both Suggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):

Plant Site: Simulator: Perform Lab:

Position Evaluated: RO: SRO:

Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site Simulator X Lab Testing Method: Perform Simulate Approximate Completion Time in Minutes: 10 Minutes Reference(s): 1104.028 ICW System Operating Procedure, (Rev 38) Section 10.1.

Examinee's Name: Logon ID:

Evaluator's Name:

The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:

Satisfactory: Unsatisfactory:

Performance Checklist Comments:

Start Time Stop Time Total Time

  • Signed Date
  • Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ICW02 THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:

The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.

JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:

  • Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state conditions.
  • The IAO reports that P-33A has high vibrations and is making an unusual noise.
  • P-33A and P-33C ICW Pumps are presently in service.
  • P-33B ICW pump has NOT been drained.

TASK STANDARD: P-33B ICW Pump supplying Non-Nuclear ICW, ICW Pump P-33A is secured.

TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: 1104.028 Section 10.1, Placing Standby ICW Pump Into Service (P-33A, B or C).

SUGGESTED SIMULATOR SETUP: IC2 with P-33A and P-33C ICW Pumps in service, P-33B in standby.

Page 3 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ICW02 INITIATING CUE: The CRS/SM directs you to start P-33B ICW Pump and then secure P-33A ICW Pump using 1104.028 Section 10.0 starting at Step 10.1.3.

C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSA T

10.1 IF desired to start P-33B AND secure P-33A, AND P-33A N/A and P-33C are running, THEN perform the following:

EXAMINER NOTE: Step 10.1.1 will be N/A since P-33B has NOT been drained.

EXAMINER CUE: Inform Examinee that the IAO has performed step 10.1.2 (Cross-connect ICW Surge Tanks).

10.1.3 Open P-33A/B Suction Opened P-33A/B Suction Cross-Cross-connect (CV-2240). connect (CV-2240) on panel C09.

C POSITIVE CUE: _____ _____ _____

CV-2240 red light ON, green light OFF.

NEGATIVE CUE:

CV-2240 green light ON, red light OFF.

10.1.4 Open P-33A/B Discharge Opened P-33A/B Discharge Cross-connect (CV-2238). Cross-connect (CV-2238) on panel C09.

POSITIVE CUE:

C CV-2238 red light ON, green _____ _____ _____

light OFF.

NEGATIVE CUE:

CV-2238 green light ON, red light OFF.

Page 4 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ICW02 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSA T

10.1.5 Vent P-33B as necessary by Directed Outside operator to vent opening ICW Pump Vent P-33B and then close ICW-1191. _____ _____ _____

(ICW-1191)

A. Close ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191).

POSITIVE CUE:

IAO reports that the B ICW Pump has been vented and ICW-1191 is closed.

EXAMINER CUE: Inform Examinee that the B ICW pump has been vented; ICW-1191 is closed.

10.1.6 Start ICW Pump P-33B. Started ICW Pump P-33B using handswitch on panel C09.

A. IF CRD cooling pumps indicate air binding (i.e.

C lowering pump discharge _____ _____ _____

pressure, flow oscillations or standby pump start), THEN perform Venting CRD Cooling System Components, exhibit of this procedure.

POSITIVE CUE:

Red light ON, green light OFF for P-33B.

NEGATIVE CUE:

Green light ON, red light OFF for P-33B.

EXAMINER CUE: If asked, the CRD cooling pumps do not indicate air binding.

Page 5 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ICW02 C PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST STANDARD N/A SAT UNSA T

EXAMINER CUE: After P-33B has been started, inform Examinee that three minutes have elapsed (time compression).

10.1.7 WHEN P-33B has run at Waited ~3 minutes and then least 3 minutes, THEN stop placed the handswitch for ICW P-33A. Pump P-33A in the trip/stop position.

C POSITIVE CUE: _____ _____ _____

Green light ON, red light OFF for P-33A.

NEGATIVE CUE:

Red light ON, green light OFF for P-33A.

10.1.8 On C09, check flow is Checked normal ICW flow on FI-normal (~2000 gpm) on 2218 on C09 for the Non-Nuclear ICW Coolers Inlet Flow loop. _____ _____ _____

Non-Nuc (FI-2218).

POSITIVE CUE:

Flow is ~2000 gpm on FI-2218.

10.1.9 IF desired, THEN station Checked with OAO to verify status operator to monitor ICW of T-37A/B overflow.

Surge Tanks for overflow. _____ _____ _____

POSITIVE CUE:

ICW Surge Tanks not overflowing.

EXAMINER CUE: If asked, report as OAO that the ICW Surge Tanks are NOT overflowing.

Inform the examinee that the JPM is complete.

END

Page 6 of 6 JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ICW02 INITIAL CONDITIONS:

  • Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state conditions.
  • The IAO reports that P-33A has high vibrations and is making an unusual noise.
  • P-33A and P-33C ICW Pumps are presently in service.
  • P-33B ICW pump has NOT been drained.
  • T-37A and T-37B have been cross-connected by the OAO.
  • P-33B has been verified ready to start and the IAO is standing clear.

INITIATING CUE:

The CRS/SM directs you to start P-33B ICW pump and then secure P-33A ICW pump using 1104.028 Section 10.0 starting at Step 10.1.3.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 42 of 163 1104.028 ICW SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 038 10.0 Placing Standby ICW Pump Into Service (P-33A, B, or C)

CAUTION When switching ICW Pump alignment, running both pumps in parallel for 3 minutes reduces the possibility of trapped air causing a system transient.

NOTE Stopping an ICW pump can cause CRD SUPPLY FILTER P HI (K08-D1) and RCP MOTOR COOLING FLOW LO (K08-E6).

The Non-Nuclear loop normally has a higher activity level than Nuclear loop. If both loops are crossconnected via the ICW Surge Tank drain line, Non-Nuclear loop process monitor activity will lower and Nuclear loop process monitor activity will rise, possibly to the alarm setpoint.

10.1 IF desired to start P-33B AND secure P-33A, AND P-33A and P-33C are running, THEN perform the following:

CAUTION During filling of P-33A ICW pump following maintenance, air entrained in the ICW system following venting was carried throughout the system resulting in air binding of ICW components. CR-ANO-1-2006-00612 Restoration of an ICW pump following maintenance with ONLY one train of CRD cooling available should be evaluated prior to starting. Air entrained in the ICW pump discharge can degrade CRD cooling flow.

Leakage between ICW loops can foul CRD Filters. When there is leakage between loops, raise monitoring of CRD Pre-filters (F-61A & B) and CRD Cooling Water Filters (F-20A & B).

Opening the ICW pump discharge cross-connect valve(s) prior to opening the suction cross-connect valve(s) can result in overflowing the Nuclear ICW Surge Tank due to pressure differences in the ICW loops.

10.1.1 IF ICW Pump P-33B has been drained, THEN perform the following:

A. Verify the following valves closed:

ICW Pump P-33B Disch Isol (ICW-3B)

ICW Pump P-33B Suct Isol (ICW-1B)

ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191)

ICW Pump P-33B Disch Line Drain (ICW-1177A)

ICW Pump P-33B Suct Line Drain (ICW-1177B)

B. Periodically monitor ICW expansion tank level during refill.

PROC./WORK PLAN N

O. PROCEDURE

/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 43 of 163 1104.028 ICW SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 038 C. Slowly open ICW Pump P-33B Suct Isol (ICW-1B).

D. Throttle open ICW Pump P-33B Disch Line Drain (ICW-1177A).

E. WHEN air is vented, THEN close ICW Pump P-33B Disch Line Drain (ICW-1177A).

F. Open ICW Pump P-33B Disch Isol (ICW-3B).

G. Vent all of the CRD Cooling system components per Venting CRD Cooling System Components, exhibit of this procedure.

10.1.2 IF it is desired to cross-connect ICW Surge Tk T-37A and T-37B via bottom drain line, THEN perform the following:

A. Install plug on the ICW surge tanks drain line.

B. Open ICW Surge Tk T-37A Drn to Aux Bldg (ICW-130A).

C. Open ICW Surge Tk T-37B Drn to Aux Bldg (ICW-130B).

10.1.3 Open P-33A/B Suction Crossconnect (CV-2240).

10.1.4 Open P-33A/B Discharge Crossconnect (CV-2238).

10.1.5 Vent P-33B as necessary by opening ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191).

A. Close ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191).

10.1.6 Start P-33B.

A. IF CRD cooling pumps indicate air binding (i.e. lowering pump discharge pressure, flow oscillations or standby pump start),

THEN perform Venting CRD Cooling System Components, exhibit of this procedure.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO. PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:

PAGE: 44 of 163 1104.028 ICW SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE CHANGE: 038 NOTE Pressure and flow instabilities from stopping P-33A in the next step can cause a CRD cooling pump (P-79A/B) to auto-start.

10.1.7 WHEN P-33B has run at least 3 minutes, THEN stop P-33A.

NOTE ICW pumps are rated for a maximum 2500 gpm flow.

Max indicated ICW Cooler Inlet Flow (FI-2219, FI-2218) is 2500 gpm.

10.1.8 On C09, check flow is normal (~2000 gpm) on ICW Coolers Inlet Flow Non-Nuc (FI-2218).

10.1.9 IF desired, THEN station operator to monitor ICW Surge Tanks for overflow.

Appendix D Scenario Outline Form ES-D-1 Facility: __ANO-1_________ Scenario No.: _____1_______ Op-Test No.: __2016-1_

Examiners: ___________________________ Operators: ____________________________

Initial Conditions: _4-5% power .

Turnover: ____4-5% power, Place A MFW Pump in service and raise power to 10%._________

_P-3D Circulating Water Pump OOS for maintenance ____________________________________

Event Malf. Event Event No. No. Type* Description 1 BOP N Place A MFW Pump in service 2 ATC R Raise power to 10%

3 ATC C Group 7 Rod 4 misaligned from group due to dragging rod 4 ATC I Pressurizer level fails high. (LT-1001)

SRO TS 5 BOP I Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation SRO TS 6 BOP C Loss of 480 V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B to auto start 7 M Pressurizer steam space leak 8 ATC I Failure of ES Channel 2 to automatically actuate CT 9 ATC C RPS fails to trip and ALL RX trip pushbuttons fail.

CT

  • (N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical Task Target Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d) Actual Attributes
1. Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2/2/2/2/2
2. Abnormal events (2-4) 4/4/3/4/3
3. Major transients (1-2) 1/1/1/1/1
4. EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 2/1/2/1/1
5. EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1/1/0/1/1
6. EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2/2/2/2/2 Page 1 of 77

NARRATIVE:

Scenario starts with plant power at ~4.5%. During turnover the ATC will be directed to maintain reactor power between 4 - 5% while the BOP places the A MFW Pump into service. This will be completed with no malfunctions, however Xenon is in a transient state and rod adjustments will be required during this event.

After the MFW Pump is in service the ATC will raise power to <10%. During the power escalation control Rod 4 in Group 7 will drag as the group is pulled out for the power maneuver.

Around 8% power, a Control Rod Asymmetric Alarm will occur. The alarm indicates that the rod is out by 5% (7 inches) which does not require the rod to be declared inoperable. The ATC will transfer Group 7 Rod 4 to auxiliary power and level it with the group. If K08-A2 (CRD WITHDRAWAL INHIBITED) alarms, that would indicate a misalignment of 6.5% (9 inches) which would require declaring the rod inoperable and entry into T.S. 3.1.4 Condition A. This is NOT expected unless the crew continues group rod withdrawal after the Control Rod Asymmetric alarm is received.

Once all rods have been returned to their normal power supplies, LT-1001 - Pressurizer Level Transmitter will fail high causing two alarms (Hi Level and Hi HI Level) and results in the RCS Makeup Valve being demanded closed due to the false high level. The ATC / BOP will determine which transmitter has failed and the ATC will select a good signal for pressurizer level control. The CRS will also enter T.S. 3.3.15 Condition A (PAM) for the failed transmitter.

Next, an inadvertent actuation of ESAS Digital Channel 7 will occur, which results in an automatic start of P-35A, Reactor Building Spray Pump, (after 35 seconds) and the opening of the Reactor Building Spray Isolation Valve CV-2401. The spray pump will be running with no suction source aligned if not overridden within the 35 second delay time. The BOP will override P-35A and stop the pump (if running) and override and close CV-2401. The CRS will enter T.S.

3.3.7 and possibly T.S. 3.6.5 if the spray pump ran without a suction source.

Next, a loss of the Non-Vital 480V Load Center (B3) will occur with a failure of C-5B, Condenser Vacuum Pump to automatically start. C-5B can be started manually from the control room. The AOP for loss of load center will have the crew check several components powered off the redundant load center in service. The only component that will not be running is C-5B.

The major event occurs next and is a Pressurizer Steam Space Leak that results in a LOSM and an ESAS actuation (PRA). The size of the leak will result in pressure stabilizing around 1200 psig. During the ESAS actuation Channel 2 (HPI) will fail to actuate (PRA). Both trains of HPI are required to regain adequate SCM for the given leak size. Therefore manual actuation of ES Channel 2 is a critical task. Additionally, RPS is failed and will not result in an automatic reactor trip, the backup pushbuttons are also failed so the ATC will manually insert control rods and dispatch an AO to manually open both of the CRD AC Power Supply Breakers in order to complete a reactor trip, this is also a critical task. (PRA)

PRA / IPE explanation:

Key equipment for potential risk increase includes Makeup and Purification.

Initiating events include a LOCA and ATWS.

Page 2 of 77

List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 1 On At Time Action Description Event 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction RP246 REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE1 FAILS 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction RP247 REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE2 FAILS 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction RP248 REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE3 FAILS 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction RP249 REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE4 FAILS Insert override DI_PB0140 to 00:00:00 None CRD POWER BRKR TRIP,PB-0140 FALSE Insert override DI_PB0141 to CRD POWER SUPPLY BREAKER 00:00:00 None FALSE TRIP Insert override DI_ICC0020 to 00:00:00 None REACTOR TRIP,PB FALSE ESAS CHANNEL 2 FAILS TO 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction ES260 ACTUATE Insert override DI_HS3637SP to 00:00:00 None STOP,VAC PUMPS,C5B,HS-3637 TRUE Insert malfunction RD417 to DEGRDED MOTION ROD N12GR7-00:00:00 None 80.00000 ROD 4 A210OP RACK DOWN A210 P3B 00:00:00 None Insert remote A210OP to DOWN CW PUMP Insert malfunction TR049 to None 1 PZR LT1001 FAIL 0-320 IN H2O 320.00000 in 60 FALSE ACTUATION OF ESAS None 2 Insert malfunction ES257 CHANNEL 7 None 3 Insert malfunction ED191 LOSS OF 480 V BUS B3 Insert malfunction RC045 to PZR STEAM SPACE LEAK 0-1 SQ.

None 4 0.10000 in 180 IN.

Insert remote TRPCRDBKRA to CRDACBKRA CRD AC BREKAER None 5 TRIP FROM RPS A Insert remote TRPCRDBKRB to CRDACBKRB CRD AC BREKAER None 5 TRIP FROM RPS B Delete override DI_HS3637SP to None 6 STOP,VAC PUMPS,C5B,HS-3637 TRUE FALSE ACTUATION OF ESAS None 7 Delete malfunction ES257 CHANNEL 7 OPEN EVENT FILE FOR C5B None None OVERRIDE Page 3 of 77

Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 1 Event 1

1. 1106.016, Condensate, Feedwater, and Steam System Operation, Section 15.0 (NOP)
2. 1102.002, Plant Startup, Attachment E (NOP)

Event 2

1. 1102.002, Plant Startup, Section 17.0 (NOP)

Event 3

1. 1203.012G, ACA for K08-C2
2. 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction, Sections 1 and 3 (AOP)
3. 1105.009, CRD System Operating Procedure (NOP)

Event 4

1. 1203.012H, ACA for K09-B3 and K09-D3
2. 1203.015, Pressurizer System Failures, Section 4 (AOP)
3. T.S. 3.3.15 Event 5
1. 1203.012J, ACA for K11-D2
2. 1203.053, Inadvertent ESAS Actuation, Attachment 7 (AOP)
3. T.S. 3.3.7
4. T.S. 3.6.5 (Possible depending on situation)

Event 6

1. 1203.012B, ACA for K02-C8
2. 1203.046, Loss of Loadcenter (AOP)

Event 7

1. 1202.001, Reactor Trip (EOP)
2. 1202.002, Loss of Subcooling Margin (EOP)
3. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-12 (EOP)
4. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-5 (EOP)
5. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-10 (EOP)
6. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-18 (EOP)
7. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-14 (EOP)

EOP - Emergency Operating Procedure AOP - Abnormal Operating Procedure ACA - Annunciator Corrective Actions NOP - Normal Operating Procedure Page 4 of 77

Appendix D Required Operator Actions Form ES-D-2 Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directed in OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=0 BOP Place A MFW Pump into service starting at Step 15.3 NOTE Plant Computer points P2832, P2834 (for P-1A), P2833 and P2835 (for P-1B) have sufficient upper range and are preferred discharge pressure points to monitor.

BOP 15.3 To verify MFWP is supplying feedwater, raise desired MFWP speed until associated Startup Control Valves or Low Load Control Valves start to close:

Startup Valve Loop A (CV-2623)

Low Load Valve Loop A (CV-2622)

Startup Valve Loop B (CV-2673)

Low Load Valve Loop B (CV-2672)

BOP 15.4 Stop Aux Feedwater Pump (P-75).

EXAMINER NOTE: Only one channel of RPS is fully modeled.

BOP 15.5 Reset RPS trips per "Anticipatory Reactor Trip System (ARTS) Reset" Attachment E of Plant Startup (1102.002) for the first MFWP.

Notes:

Page 5 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directed in OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The following steps are from ATTACHMENT E, ANTICIPATORY REACTOR TRIP SYSTEM (ARTS) RESET BOP 1.0 WHEN first Main Feedwater Pump is placed into service, THEN perform the following to reset RPS ARTS trip:

CAUTION Depressing TRIP switch will trip the channel even if feed pump trip function is bypassed.

EXAMINER NOTE: The following steps calls for concurrent verification, the examiner can simulate being that additional verifier.

BOP 1.1 In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41) perform the following:

1.1.1 Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps in this subsection.

1.1.2 Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lower module for the started Main Feedwater Pump.

1.1.3 Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comes ON, bottom goes OFF).

1.1.4 Verify white light "MFWP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MFWP) goes DIM.

EXAMINER NOTE: Only one channel of RPS is fully modeled, inform the applicant that the other 3 channels will be completed by the IA Booth Operator.

Notes:

Page 6 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directed in OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 2.0 Perform independent verification of ARTS reset for first Main Feedwater Pump placed into service as follows:

2.1 In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41), verify:

2.1.1 Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top red light ON.

2.1.2 White light "MFWP A" ("B")

"TRIPPED" (for the started Main Feedwater pump) is DIM.

EXAMINER NOTE: Only one channel of RPS is fully modeled, inform the applicant that the other 3 channels will be completed by the IA Booth Operator.

The following steps are from OP-1106.016 CRS 15.6 Close Aux FW Pump Recirc to E-11A (FW-1).

BOOTH: IAO Reports that FW-1 is closed.

ATC / BOP 15.7 As plant power is raised, verify feedwater responds as follows:

15.7.1 WHEN feedwater flow >2000 gpm, THEN verify associated Feed Pump Recirc Valve closed:

P-1A Feed Pump Recirc Valve (CV-2874)

P-1B Feed Pump Recirc Valve (CV-2876)

Notes:

Page 7 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directed in OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 15.8 Adjust MFWP speed to maintain 70 psid across lowest FW Block Valve.

BOP 15.9 IF MFWP P-1A was placed into service, THEN Directs perform the following:

Field Operator Close "A" MFP HP Stop Vlv CV-6709A Leakoff (MS-85).

Close "A" MFP LP Stop Vlv CV-6709B Leakoff (RS-92).

Close K-2A MFP LP Stop Vlv CV-6709B After Seat Drn (RS-93).

IF Det Fault indicated on Local Electronics Cabinet C576, THEN perform the following to reset Det Fault on power sub rack:

A. Place key switch to RESET ENABLE.

B. Depress RESET switch for applicable MPU(s).

C. Place key switch to RUN.

BOOTH: IAO Acknowledges direction to perform Step 15.9 of 1106.016.

Notes:

Page 8 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directed in OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 15.10 IF MFWP P-1B was placed into service, THEN perform the following:

Close "B" MFP HP Stop Vlv CV-6710A Leakoff (MS-84).

Close "B" MFP LP Stop Vlv CV-6710B After Seat Drn (RS-90).

Close "B" MFP LP Stop Vlv CV-6710B Leakoff (RS-91).

IF Det Fault indicated on Local Electronics Cabinet C577, THEN perform the following to reset Det Fault on power sub rack:

A. Place key switch to RESET ENABLE.

B. Depress RESET switch for applicable MPU(s).

C. Place key switch to RUN.

BOP 15.11 WHEN bearing oil temperature reaches 140°F on the Directs in-service MFP, THEN adjust cooling water to the Field in-service Main FW Pump Coolers (E-22A thru D) to Operator maintain the following:

Bearing oil drain temperature between 140°F and 160°F Cooler outlet temperatures 100 - 120°F BOOTH: IAO Acknowledges direction to perform Step 15.11 of 1106.016.

EXAMINER NOTE: This concludes the normal event of placing the MFW Pump into service Proceed to next event Notes:

Page 9 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

Begin Reactivity Event, raise reactor power to 10% at < or = 0.5% per minute.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=10 NOTE Reactor demand H/A station output follows actual neutron power when CRD station is in MANUAL.

ATC 17.18 WHEN a MFP is in service, THEN begin reactor power escalation to ~7%.

EXAMINER NOTE: Steps 17.19 and 17.20 are field operations preparing for turbine startup and have already been completed.

BOOTH: IAO Reports Steps 17.19 and 17.20 complete if asked.

NOTE During plant startup, RCS Lithium out of spec hours begin to accumulate 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> after entry into Mode 1, or upon reaching equilibrium xenon, whichever occurs first CRS 17.21 WHEN reactor power >5% (Mode 1),

THEN perform the following:

17.21.1 Make a station log entry of entering Mode 1.

17.21.2 Make station log entry that RCS Lithium required to be in its control band within next 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, or upon reaching equilibrium xenon (enter time required).

17.21.3 Make shift turnover sheet entry of time and date that Lithium required to be in spec.

17.21.4 IF desired, THEN Diamond Panel may be placed in AUTO.

BOOTH: Chemistry acknowledges that MODE 1 has been entered and the 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> time limit has started.

Notes:

Page 10 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

Begin Reactivity Event, raise reactor power to 10% at < or = 0.5% per minute.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE The following indicates RPS trip is armed for loss of MFWPs.

ATC 17.22 Verify following annunciators clear at ~9% Rx power:

TRIP ON LOSS OF MFP BYPASSED (K08-F4)

REACTOR TRIP ON LOSS OF FEEDWATER BYPASS/TROUBLE (K15-B1)

EXAMINER NOTE: During the power increase Group 7 Rod 4 will drag resulting in an asymmetric rod condition. That will lead into the next event.

Notes:

Page 11 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Based CRS Reference ACA 1203.012G for K08-C2, CONTROL ROD on ASYMMETRIC Alarm NOTE Bypassing a rod's S-2 switch affects the two rod groups as follows:

SAFETY GROUPS Defeats 6.5% (9") Asymmetric Rod Fault to CRD Logic.

Defeats 6.5% (9") Asymmetric Rod Fault Alarms (Including CR Annunciators)

Does not prohibit runback due to safety group in-limit or loss of safety group out-limit.

REGULATING GROUPS Defeats 6.5% (9") Asymmetric Rod Fault to CRD Logic.

Defeats 6.5% (9") Asymmetric Rod Fault Alarms (Including CR Annunciators)

Prohibits Runback, if rod that has S-2 switch in bypass is >6.5% (9") from group average.

Does not prohibit runback if rod that has S-2 switch in bypass causes group average of all rods in that group to have >6.5% (9") Asymmetric fault.

The S-2 switches do not bypass the 5% (7") asymmetric alarm on the PI Panel. A rod's S-2 switch in bypass prevents a 6.5%

(9") fault from alarming CRD WITHDRAWAL INHIBITED, but will not clear an existing fault until FAULT RESET is depressed.

CRS 1. GO TO "Asymmetric Rod" section of Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003).

FYI 2.0 PROBABLE CAUSES Any rod >5% (7") from average position for that group Notes:

Page 12 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 3) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference AOP 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action, Section 3. Asymmetric Rod - Reactor Critical N/A 1. IF at any time during the performance of this section a rod drops, THEN GO TO "Dropped Rod - Reactor Critical" section of this procedure.

CRS 2. Verify rod position indication has been validated per Rod Position Indication Validation - Reactor Critical of this procedure.

CRS Reference AOP 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action, Section 1. Rod Position Indication Validation - Reactor Critical N/A 1. IF at any time during the performance of this section a rod drops, THEN GO TO "Dropped Rod - Reactor Critical" section of this procedure.

ALL 2. Determine whether indication is valid or invalid by performing two or more methods contained in this step (substeps B thru F):

A. IF fault is associated with a safety rod AND one hour has elapsed, THEN perform the following:

N/A Assume fault is valid (unless proven otherwise.)

Declare safety rod inoperable per TS 3.1.5.

Perform actions of TS 3.1.5.

Notes:

Page 13 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 1) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE Indicated rod motion without a corresponding change in quadrant tilt or SPND power can indicate faulty rod position indication.

ATC / BOP B. Monitor for changes in incore and excore quadrant tilt and power using the NASP menu, "OPS Procedure 1203.003" selection. Allow time for at least two updates of this data, ~12 minutes.

Uncorrected SPND Signals Imbalance, Tilt and Rod Index Corrected SPND Signals

1) IF reactor core parameters have changed consistent with indicated rod motion, THEN rod position indication is considered valid per this method.

C. Compare Absolute Position Indication and Relative BOP Position Indication.

1) IF both channels individually read within 2"

(~1.5%) of each other, THEN rod position indication is considered valid per this method.

D. Use plant computer trending systems:

BOP / CRS NOTE A rod found trending away from its group could be indicating actual rod motion.

Notes:

Page 14 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 1) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 1) Using plant computer trend function, monitor affected rod position with other rods in same group.

(computer function: TG GROUP7, ENTER, or TG GROUP4, ENTER, etc.)

BOP 2) Check for faulty position indication by noting erratic indication or changes in rod position not exhibited by similar changes in position indication for other rods in the same group.

3) IF individual rod position is considered reliable and CRS not erratic, THEN rod position indication is considered valid per this method.

NOTE Zone indicating lamps for each rod are below the associated PI signal fuse inside C78 and C79 in the computer room.

C78 and C79 are kept locked.

Rod position computer point and associated PI signal fuse are found on "Control Rod Location and Instrument Cross Reference", Exhibit A,1105.009, posted on C76, C79 and on the PI Panel.

PI Panel Out Limit lamps and 100% zone indicating lamps are driven by the same 100% zone indicating switches.

PI Panel In Limit lamps and 0% zone indicating lamps are driven by the same 0% zone indicating switches.

If zone indicating lamp is off, then this method is inconclusive.

Notes:

Page 15 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 1) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS E. Use rod zone indicating switches as follows:

1) IF individual rods will be moved, THEN perform the following:

Contact Reactor Engineering.

Consider the reactivity impact of moving rods.

{1}

2) Monitor the respective zone indicating lamp, PI Panel Out Limit lamp or PI Panel In Limit lamp.
3) IF rod is located within 3% of a zone indicating switch (0, 25, 50, 75, or 100%)

AND zone indicating lamp is off, THEN perform the following:

a) Transfer rod to auxiliary power supply per applicable section of CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009).

b) Move rod toward closest zone indicating switch.

Notes:

Page 16 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 1) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 4) IF zone indicating lamp is off OR zone lamp lights and API location are not at approximately the same position, THEN perform the following:

a) IF desired, THEN return rod to its original position.

b) Return rod to its original power supply per applicable section of CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009).

5) IF zone lamp lights and API location are at approximately the same position, THEN rod position indication is considered valid per this method.

NOTE PMS/PDS contain history and trendable indications of the 25%

zone indicating switches. The designators for individual rods are designated as ZS1CRxxx (where xxx indicates the core location of the rod). Core locations of rods are depicted on Control Rod Location and Instrument Cross Reference, Exhibit A of CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009).

CRS / BOP 6) IF desired, THEN use PMS/PDS to determine a history trend of an applicable 25% zone indicating switch to detect rod movement by selecting ZS1CRXXX where XXX is the core location of the applicable rod.

Notes:

Page 17 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 1) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE Two channels of position indication exist for each rod. Each channel has a string of reed switches spaced 4" apart. The channels are staggered 2" apart, so that there is a reed switch every 2" of rod travel. Normally, both channels are in service with an average of the two being fed to the control room.

Switches located on the individual buffer amplifier cards in the PI amplifier panel (C77 in computer room) can be used to switch either channel (3A or 3B) off by going to BYPASS.

To bypass, the card must be pulled, causing a temporary loss of all indication for the rod. When the card is re-inserted, with one channel bypassed, the other channel will feed directly to the control room.

EXAMINER NOTE: The crew should have determined that the indication is valid without the need to have I&C switch between the two channels.

N/A F. Contact I&C to switch between the two alternate channels of indication.

1) IF switching either channel to BYPASS corrects the rod asymmetry, THEN the channel still in service is considered valid per this method.

a) Submit a WR/WO on bypassed channel.

2) IF both channels individually read within 2"

(~1.5%) of the average, THEN rod position indication is considered valid per this method.

a) Refer to appropriate section of this procedure.

Notes:

Page 18 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Section 1) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 3. IF absolute position indication is determined to be valid, THEN GO TO "Asymmetric Rod -

Reactor Critical" section of this procedure.

Return to Section 3 NOTE Technical Specifications defines an inoperable rod as follows:

- Safety Rod that is not fully withdrawn within one hour, except during performance of rod exercise surveillance (TS 3.1.5). If the Safety Rod is declared inoperable in TS 3.1.5, then TS 3.1.4 must also be entered.

- Inability to move control rod (SR 3.1.4.2) or APSR (TS 3.1.6).

- Rod cannot be located with API, RPI or limit lights (TS 3.1.7). Not meeting TS 3.1.7 results in not meeting either TS 3.1.4 or 3.1.6.

If the inoperable control rod is fully inserted, then it is not necessary to consider it inoperable for the purposes of shutdown margin calculations because it has inserted its negative reactivity.

A control rod is considered to be inoperable if it is not free to insert into the core within the required insertion time, or does not have at least one position indicator channel operable, i.e., cannot be located. (Ref. TS 3.1.4 Bases).

Notes:

Page 19 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 3. IF rod is declared inoperable OR rod is misaligned >6.5% from its group average (misaligned rod position is not used in the rod group average calculation),

THEN within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> AND once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter, either verify 1.5% available shutdown margin per Reactivity Balance Calculation (1103.015) OR initiate boration to restore SDM to be within COLR limit within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

A. IF control rod can not move AND is not fully inserted, OR the control rod can not be located, THEN use "Calculation of Shutdown Margin for Shutdown Conditions (Also Reactor Critical with an inoperable control rod)" Worksheet 4 and use "with a known inoperable rod" option (does not apply to APSRs).

B. IF rod is only misaligned (is trippable),

THEN use "Calculation of Shutdown Margin for Shutdown Conditions (Also Reactor Critical with an inoperable control rod)" Worksheet 4 and use "with no known inoperable rod" option.

EXAMINER NOTE: The rod should not be misaligned by >6.5%, however if K08-A2 alarms then the rod will be declared inoperable and T.S. 3.1.4 entered.

Notes:

Page 20 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1__ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 4. IF rod is within 6.5% of remainder of rods in that group, THEN perform the following.

A. IF rod drops during recovery actions, N/A THEN GO TO "Dropped Rod - Reactor Critical" section of this procedure.

B. IF group containing asymmetric rod is at OUT LIMIT, N/A THEN move group in until OUT LIMIT lamp turns off.

C. Transfer asymmetric rod to AUX power ATC supply per "Transfer to Auxiliary Supply" section of CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009).

D. Slowly level rod with its group and adjust ATC relative PI to match absolute PI per 1105.009, "Relative Position Indication Adjustment" section.

ATC E. Transfer leveled rod back to its group power supply per "Transfer from Auxiliary Supply" section of 1105.009.

N/A F. IF affected group should be at OUT LIMIT, THEN withdraw group until OUT LIMIT lamp turns on.

ATC G. Continue to monitor quadrant tilt (incore and excore) to further substantiate PI.

NOTE Control Rod Tech Spec Application Examples (Attachment B) contains information concerning Tech Spec application associated with different control rod failures.

Notes:

Page 21 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer to Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1105.009, CRD System Operating Procedure Section 8.0, Transfer to Auxiliary Supply NOTE Entry into the applicable TS 3.1.5 Condition A or B, is required for Safety Group rod insertion >1.5% (4 second insertion) below its out limit, with the Reactor critical. This is not applicable for physics tests or rod exercise surveillances.

Active fuel is 2 3/8" (~1.7%) below a fully withdrawn control rod.

TR CF lamp must be off and GROUP lamp on before a transfer reset can be accomplished.

TR CF lamp on indicates one or more CRD on the AUX bus.

For information or troubleshooting purposes, the Description section of this procedure contains the expected light indications to be received for given switch/pushbutton manipulations.

Diamond Panel operations are actual or potential reactivity manipulations and require Licensed Operator peer check.

If ICS is in Auto when Diamond Panel is placed in Manual, then Tave control will be automatically transferred to ICS Feedwater Demand.

ATC / BOP 8.1 Initial Conditions:

8.1.1 IF Group 7 is aligned to the Auxiliary Supply, THEN contact Ops Manager for permission to transfer Group 7 to its normal supply.

A. Transfer Group 7 to its normal power supply per Transfer from Auxiliary Supply section of this procedure.

8.1.2 Verify the following:

TRANS RESET lamp on TR CF lamp off 8.1.3 IF it is desired to transfer ICS to manual, THEN perform desired section(s) of Integrated Control System (1105.004).

Page 22 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer to Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 8.2 Set GROUP SELECT SWITCH to desired Group 1-8.

Group 7 Selected ATC 8.3 Set SINGLE SELECT SWITCH to desired CRDM: 1-12 or ALL.

Rod 4 Selected ATC 8.4 Set AUTO-MANUAL switch to MANUAL.

ATC 8.5 Set SEQ-SEQ OR switch to SEQ OR.

ATC 8.6 Set GROUP-AUXIL switch to AUXIL.

ATC 8.7 Set SPEED SELECTOR switch to JOG.

8.7.1 IF SY lamp energizes and de-energizes, THEN set SPEED SELECTOR switch to RUN (CR-ANO-1-2004-0621).

A. Notify CRS/SM.

B. Refer to TS for operability.

C. Contact I&C and System Engineering for assistance.

Notes:

Page 23 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer to Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 8.8 Set CLAMP-CLAMP REL switch to CLAMP.

ATC 8.9 Press MAN TRANS switch and release.

NOTE ICS may be returned to automatic control at any time by performing steps 8.11 through 8.15. If ICS is returned to automatic control without performing step 8.10 if applicable, then section 8.0 will need to be re-entered to allow inspection and manual transfer of the effected power supply relay.

N/A 8.10 IF any selected control rod(s) do NOT transfer to their auxiliary power supply, THEN perform the following:

8.10.1 Perform the following notifications:

A. Notify Operations Management (Senior Manager, Operations and Manager, Operations-Shift).

B. IF the evolution is NOT being performed for Supplement 2 of this procedure, THEN convene a bridge call.

Notes:

Page 24 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer to Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 8.10.2 Coordinate with I&C to inspect (boroscope) the affected rod(s) transfer switch and re-perform steps as needed to allow inspection of the transfer switch ratchet mechanism.

8.10.3 Report I&C boroscope inspection results to Ops Management.

8.10.4 Obtain Senior Manager, Operations permission to manually transfer the affected control rod(s) transfer switches.

8.10.5 Coordinate with I&C to manually transfer the affected control rod(s) transfer switches.

ATC 8.11 Set CLAMP-CLAMP REL switch to CLAMP REL.

8.11.1 IF SY lamp energizes and de-energizes, THEN set SPEED SELECTOR switch to RUN (CR-ANO-1-2004-0621).

A. Notify CRS/SM.

B. Contact I&C and System Engineering for assistance.

Notes:

Page 25 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer to Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE If any portion of a group is transferred to the Aux Supply, only those rods transferred will respond to a command to move.

With any group transferred to the Aux Supply, control rods may be returned to automatic and that group will function normally.

ATC 8.12 Set GROUP-AUXIL switch to GROUP.

ATC 8.13 IF movement at RUN speed is desired, THEN set speed switch to RUN.

Notes:

Page 26 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer to Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 8.14 IF desired to operate for extended time period with a group of rods powered from the Aux Supply, THEN perform the following:

Set GROUP SELECT SWITCH to OFF.

Set SINGLE SELECT SWITCH to OFF.

Set SEQ-SEQ OR switch to SEQ.

N/A 8.15 IF it is desired to transfer ICS stations to auto, THEN perform desired section(s) of Integrated Control System (1105.004).

EXAMINER NOTE: Now that the rod is transferred to the Aux Power Supply, the crew will level the rod with the group per Step D and then the next set of steps returns the rod to its normal power supply.

Notes:

Page 27 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer from Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference Section 9.0, Transfer from Auxiliary Supply NOTE For information or troubleshooting purposes, the Description section of this procedure contains the expected light indications to be received for given switch/pushbutton manipulations.

Diamond Panel operations are actual or potential reactivity manipulations and require Licensed Operator peer check.

If a CRDM is selected that is not already on auxiliary supply, it will be transferred to auxiliary supply. PI Panel CONTROL ON lamp will be on if CRDM is transferred to auxiliary supply.

If ICS is in Auto when Diamond Panel is placed in Manual, then Tave control will be automatically transferred to ICS Feedwater Demand.

N/A 9.1 IF Group 7 is aligned to the Auxiliary Supply, THEN contact Ops Manager for permission to transfer Group 7 to its normal supply.

N/A 9.2 IF it is desired to transfer ICS to manual, THEN perform desired section(s) of Integrated Control System (1105.004).

Notes:

Page 28 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer from Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 9.3 Set GROUP SELECT SWITCH to the group with CRDM(s) on auxiliary supply.

ATC 9.4 Set SINGLE SELECT SWITCH to desired CRDM: 1-12 or ALL.

ATC 9.5 Set AUTO-MANUAL switch to MANUAL.

ATC 9.6 Set SEQ/SEQ OR switch to SEQ OR.

ATC 9.7 Set GROUP/AUXIL switch to AUXIL.

ATC 9.8 Set SPEED SELECTOR switch to JOG.

9.8.1 IF SY lamp energizes and de-energizes, THEN set SPEED SELECTOR switch to RUN (CR-ANO-1-2004-0621).

A. Notify CRS/SM.

B. Refer to TS for operability.

C. Contact I&C and System Engineering for assistance.

Notes:

Page 29 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer from Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 9.9 Set CLAMP-CLAMP REL switch to CLAMP.

ATC 9.10 Press MAN TRANS switch and release.

N/A 9.11 IF any selected control rods do NOT transfer to their normal power supply, THEN perform the following:

9.11.1 Perform notifications as follows:

A. Notify Operations Management (Senior Manager, Operations and Manager, Operations-Shift)

B. IF the evolution is NOT being performed for Supplement 2 of this procedure, THEN convene a bridge call.

9.11.2 Coordinate with I&C to inspect (boroscope) the affected rod(s) transfer switch and re-perform steps as needed to allow inspection of the transfer switch ratchet mechanism.

9.11.3 Report I&C boroscope inspection results to Ops Management.

9.11.4 Obtain Senior Manager, Operations permission to manually transfer the effected control rod(s) transfer switches.

9.11.5 Coordinate with I&C to manually transfer the effected control rod(s) transfer switches.

Notes:

Page 30 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer from Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 9.12 Set CLAMP-CLAMP REL switch to CLAMP REL.

9.12.1 IF SY lamp energizes and de-energizes, THEN set SPEED SELECTOR switch to RUN (CR-ANO-1-2004-0621).

A. Notify CRS/SM.

B. Refer to TS for operability.

C. Contact I&C and System Engineering for assistance.

ATC 9.13 IF no CRDM remains on auxiliary supply (TR CF lamp off),

THEN perform the following.

9.13.1 Set GROUP SELECT SWITCH to OFF.

9.13.2 Set SINGLE SELECT SWITCH to OFF.

9.13.3 Set GROUP-AUXIL switch to GROUP.

9.13.4 Set SPEED SELECTOR to RUN if desired.

9.13.5 Set SEQ-SEQ OR switch to SEQ.

9.13.6 Press TRANS RESET switch and release.

9.13.7 IF the selected group is NOT the controlling group (a group NOT enabled for commands),

THEN verify CONTROL ON lamp for selected group goes out.

Notes:

Page 31 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. (Transfer from Aux Bus) .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 9.14 IF it is desired to transfer ICS stations to auto, THEN perform desired section(s) of Integrated Control System (1105.004).

EXAMINER NOTE: At the conclusion of this section Group 7 Rod 4 should be within its group average and both Group 6 and Group 7 should have control power for continued power increase to 10%. Proceed to the next event at lead examiner discretion.

The next few pages contain the final steps from Section 3 of 1203.003, but none are essential to the scenario.

END OF EVENT Notes:

Page 32 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 5. IF rod is declared inoperable OR rod is misaligned >6.5% from its group average (misaligned rod position is not used in the rod group average calculation),

THEN perform one of the following:

A. IF a safety rod, THEN enter TS 3.1.4 and TS 3.1.5.

B. IF a regulating rod, THEN enter TS 3.1.4.

NOTE Per Control Rod Group Alignment Limits (TS 3.1.4), within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, restore control rod alignment or reduce thermal power to 60% of the allowable thermal power.

Recovery actions are contingent on whether one hour has elapsed since the rod was declared inoperable or exceeded 6.5% misalignment from the remainder of the rods in its group. Thus, it is important to complete this section in a timely manner.

Notes:

Page 33 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 6. IF rod is misaligned >6.5% from its group average (misaligned rod position is not used in the rod group average calculation),

THEN within two hours, perform one of the following:

A. IF rod has been misaligned >6.5% for <1 hour, THEN perform the following attempt to recover of rod at present power level:

1) IF group containing asymmetric rod is at OUT LIMIT, THEN move group in until OUT LIMIT lamp turns off.
2) Transfer asymmetric rod to AUX power supply per CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009),

"Transfer to Auxiliary Supply" section.

3) Attempt to level rod with rest of group at RUN speed.
4) Transfer leveled rod back to its group power supply per "Transfer from Auxiliary Supply" section of 1105.009.

NOTE If a regulating rod moves to within 6.5% of the remainder of rods in its group, or safety rod is fully withdrawn, it is no longer inoperable per TS 3.1.4 or TS 3.1.5.

N/A 5) IF rod levels with its group AND the group should be at OUT LIMIT, THEN withdraw group until OUT LIMIT lamp turns on.

6) Adjust relative PI to match absolute PI per 1105.009, "Relative Position Indication Adjustment" section.

Notes:

Page 34 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1__ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE The higher than normal maneuvering rate is allowed so that rod recovery is expedited. It is not intended to introduce additional reactor/plant control problems.

N/A B. IF rod has been misaligned >6.5% for >1 hour, THEN commence power reduction at up to 2%/min to 60% of thermal power allowable for the RC pump combination (TS 3.1.4 required action A.2.2.1).

1) IF the misaligned rod is in group 7 AND is lower than group average, THEN consider putting group 7, with the exception of the asymmetric rod, on the AUX power supply and allowing the group to move toward the rod during power reduction.
2) IF rest of group moves to within 6.5% of rod during power reduction, THEN further power reduction is not necessary (TS 3.1.4).
3) IF power has been lowered 60% of thermal power for the RC pump combination, THEN further recovery attempts may be made with subsequent power escalation within reactor maneuvering limits of Attachment L to Power Operation (1102.004).

Notes:

Page 35 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

Asymmetric Rod condition for Group 7 Rod 4. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 4) IF power has been lowered 60% of thermal power for the RC pump combination THEN perform the following:

a. Contact Reactor Engineering AND verify the potential ejected rod worth is within the assumptions of the rod ejection analysis within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.
b. IF thermal rated power is >20%,

THEN perform Power Peaking Check (1103.019) within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

c. Contact I&C to adjust high flux trip setpoints to 70% of allowable power for RCP combination within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />.

CRS 7. Consult Senior Manager, Operations and Reactor Engineering personnel.

BOP / ATC 8. Monitor core quadrant tilt for limits specified in COLR, and TS 3.2.4.

BOP 9. Collect the following plant computer printouts from NASP menu, "OPS Procedure 1203.003" selection:

Uncorrected SPND Signals Imbalance, Tilt and Rod Index Corrected SPND Signals END OF EVENT Notes:

Page 36 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

___Pressurizer Level Transmitter LT-1001 Fails High Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=40 ATC Pressurizer Level Fails High CRS OP-1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEM FAILURE SECTION 4 N/A 1. IF all Pressurizer level indication is lost, THEN GO TO "Loss of All Pressurizer Level Indication" section of this procedure.

ATC / BOP 2. IF one level indicator differs from the rest, THEN assume that indicator invalid AND GO TO step 5.

NOTE SPDS calculates temperature-compensated level for the following points:

PZR Level Red Channel (LPZR1R)

PZR Level GRN Channel (LPZR1G)

Normally, these points contain values calculated by LPZR1R-T and LPZR1G-T. If either PZR temperature element (T1001 or T1002) fails, the corresponding temperature compensated level will be calculated by the RCS pressure to Tsat correlation (SPDS points LPZR1R-P and LPZR1G-P).

ATC 5. WHEN validity of transmitters and indicators is determined, THEN select valid Pressurizer level transmitter using HS-1002.

CRS 6. IF invalid instrument indication is >16" from other level indications, THEN instrument is inoperable. Refer to Post Accident Monitoring (PAM) Instrumentation (TS 3.3.15).

EXAMINER NOTE: CRS will enter TS 3.3.15 above, but not TS 3.4.1 below ATC 7. Verify Pressurizer Heater Proportional Control (PIC-1004) in AUTO.

CRS 8. Refer to RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

END OF PRESSURIZER LEVEL FAILURE Advance to next event at lead instructor discretion.

Notes:

Page 37 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

____Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation .________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=48 CRS Reference ACA 1203.012J for K11-D2 EXAMINER NOTE: CRS may go directly to the AOP for spurious actuation of the channel.

N/A 1. IF due to ES actuation, THEN GO TO Emergency Operating Procedure series (1202.XXX).

N/A 2. IF desired to clear alarm, THEN perform the following:

A.Clear ES condition.

B.Reset CH 7 per Engineered Safeguards Actuation System (1105.003).

N/A 3. IF due to testing, THEN verify proper personnel are performing test.

To clear alarm, remove test switch on ES Channel 7 logic module from position 9.

CRS 4. IF due to a spurious actuation, THEN GO TO Inadvertent ESAS Actuation (1203.053).

Notes:

Page 38 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

____Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation .________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference AOP 1203.053, Inadvertent ESAS Actuation CRS / ATC 1. Check the following:

RCS pressure remains > 1590 psig RB pressure remains < 18.7 psia CRS 2. Check multiple ES digital channels have actuated.

CRS 2. IF a single channel has actuated, THEN GO TO attachment for channel tripped.

Recovery From Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation CAUTION ES-actuated components overridden in other than ES position will prevent fulfillment of the associated ES function if actual trip signal is present.

BOP 1. Override and stop RB Spray pump (P35A).

BOOTH: If asked to investigate, there is nothing obviously wrong with P-35A.

BOP 2. Override RB Spray Block valve (CV-2401).

BOP 3. Place RB Spray Block CV-2401 handswitch (HS-2401) to CLOSE (modulating valve, hold control switch in CLOSE until valve torques closed).

Notes:

Page 39 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

____Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation .________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 4. Review the following Tech Specs for applicability considering plant mode, component previously overridden, and known failure condition:

TS 3.3.7 (ESAS Actuation Logic)

TS 3.3.15 (PAM Instrumentation - RB Press Transmitters)

TS 3.6.3 (RB Isolation Valves)

TS 3.6.5 (RB Spray & Cooling)

EXAMINER NOTE: CRS should enter TS 3.3.7 and possibly TS 3.6.5 depending on if the pump ran or not and if the crew chooses to rack down the breaker for the pump. TS 3.3.15 should not be entered since there is no indication that RB Pressure is failed.

Once CV-2401 is closed, TS 3.6.3 is satisfied. The CRS may enter TS 3.6.3 during the time the valve was open but may not since the pump was running with intermittent flow.

Proceed to the next event at the discretion of the lead examiner N/A 5. WHEN cause of actuation has been determined and corrected if required, THEN on C04, depress RESET pushbutton for ES Digital Channel 7.

N/A 6. Check MAN ES lights above applicable ES Digital Channel 7 components extinguished (Reference Table 1 below).

CRS 7. Write a condition report and reference TS 3.6.5 (RB Spray Directs & Cooling) due to operation of P35A without a suction source.

CRS 8. Write a condition report to evaluate Reactor Building Directs equipment based on potential of wetting of components in Reactor Building.

Notes:

Page 40 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B Condenser Vacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=60 LOSS OF 480 V LOAD CENTER B3 with a failure of C-5B to auto start BOP / CRS Reference ACA for K02-C8, NON-ES BUS LOSS OF VOLTAGE (OP-1203.012B)

Crew 1.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS

1. Determine which non-ES bus is in alarm:

bus B1 bus B2 bus B3 bus B4 bus B7 bus B14 CRS 2. Refer to Loss of Loadcenter (1203.046).

BOP 3. Check associated feeder breaker closed (see table below):

Bus 4160V Supply 480V Supply Alternate 480V Supply B3 A1 Feed to X3 X3 Feed to B3 B3 - B4 Crosstie A-103 B312 B432 A. IF the associated feeder breaker is open, THEN refer to Electrical System Operation (1107.001),

"Reclosing Tripped Bus or MCC Feeder Breakers" section.

BOOTH: Report that there is a strong electrical odor in the area, no signs of smoke or fire.

Notes:

Page 41 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B Condenser Vacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A - 4. IF cause of fault has been determined to NOT be on 480V Report from bus AND normal supply is NOT available, field will be THEN re-energize bus from alternate supply per "480V Load such that Center Feeder Breaker Operations" section of Electrical the crew System Operation (1107.001).

does NOT re-energize bus CRS Reference Loss of Loadcenter AOP (Section for B3)

(OP-1203.046)

EXAMINER NOTE: The standby vacuum pump will need to be manually started by the BOP.

BOP 3.3 Loss of Loadcenter B3 3.3.1 Verify Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5B) running.

BOP 3.3.2 Verify EH Oil Pump (P-14B) running.

OAO 3.3.3 Verify Isophase Bus Cooling Fan (C-8B) running.

BOOTH: Report thatC-8B is running ATC 3.3.4 Verify Instrument Air Compressor (C-28B) running.

CAUTION Failure to open "B" Main Phase Xfmr Normal Cooling Group Supply breaker from B3222B (8-5) prior to closing the cross-tie breakers will cross-tie B3 to B4, and can result in damage to both buses.

Notes:

Page 42 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B Condenser Vacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP / CRS 3.3.5 Dispatch an operator (with a ladder) to verify Main Directs OAO Transformer cooling supplies from B4 as follows:

Perform the following for Main Phase Xfmr (X-01B):

1. Open breaker 8-5.
2. Close both of the following breakers (ladder required):

8-7 8-8 NOTE When completed EC12923 places Main Phase Transformers X-01C and X-01S in service.

BOP / CRS Perform one of the following:

Directs OAO IF EC12923 has been implemented, THEN verify Main Phase Xfmrs (X-01C and X-01S) on B4 supply (cooling fans running).

IF EC12923 has NOT been implemented, THEN verify Main Phase Xfmrs (X-01A and X-01C) on B4 supply (cooling fans running).

BOOTH: Reports that the requested breakers for Step 3.3.5 above have been opened Notes:

Page 43 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B Condenser Vacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 3.3.6 IF in the BLEED position, THEN manually align Letdown/Bleed 3-way Valve (CV-1248) to LETDOWN.

BOP 3.3.7 Verify Gland Steam Cond Exhauster (C-1B) running.

BOP 3.3.8 Verify Air Side Seal Oil Backup Pump (P-25) running.

NOTE Following is a list of major components supplied by loadcenter B3 either directly or via MCC:

EH Oil Pump (P-14A)

Isophase Bus Cooling Fan (C-8A)

Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5A)

Instrument Air Compressor (C-28A)

Main Transformer Cooling Unit Aux Transformer Cooling SU 1 Transformer Cooling SU 2 Transformer Cooling Air Side Seal Oil Pump (P-24)

Gland Steam Condenser Exhauster (C-1A)

Condenser Vacuum Seal Recirc Pump (P-31A)

Control Room Chilled Water Pump (VP-2A)

Fuel Handling Area Exhaust Fan (VEF-14B)

Gen Brg Drn TK Oil Vapor Extractor (C-7)

Letdown/Bleed 3-way Valve (CV-1248)

Notes:

Page 44 of 77

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B Condenser Vacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Crew should identify that C-5B failed to start automatically.

BOP 3.3.9 Refer to list above and Attachment D of Electrical System Operations (1107.001) to determine any additional components such as ventilation systems that may require actions.

BOOTH: Acknowledge any directions given based on Step 3.3.9, and report no issues found.

CRS 3.3.10 Determine cause of loss of loadcenter and restore power from normal or alternate power source per the appropriate sections of Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

EXAMINER NOTE: Report from the field will be such that the crew will NOT re-energize B3.

END OF LOSS OF 480V LOADCENTER Advance to next event at lead instructor discretion.

Notes:

Page 45 of 77

Op-Test No.: _____ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

__Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor trip due to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton is also failed so the ATC will be required to utilize the backup pushbuttons to complete the reactor trip. ES Channel 2 is also failed and will require manual actuation in order to regain the second train of HPI which will allow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=70 PRESSURIZER STEAM SPACE LEAK EXAMINER NOTE: The size of the leak will result in exceeding Reactor Trip criteria with a failure of RPS and a failure of the Rx Trip Pushbuttons. The ATC will be required to manually insert Critical Task met if reactor trip pushbuttons depressed within 1 minute of exceeding RPS setpoint.

ATC Attempt to manually trip reactor prior to or within one minute of Critical Task being <1800 psig CRS Enter Reactor Trip EOP (OP-1202.001)

ATC 1. Depress Reactor Trip PB.

A. Verify all rods inserted AND reactor power dropping.

EXAMINER NOTE: The following are the contingency steps for tripping the reactor and must be performed within 1 minute of exceeding the RPS trip setpoint of 1800 psig.

For grading purposes the 1 minute time limit does not include the time for the AO to open the CRD breakers.

ATC 1) IF reactor fails to trip, CT THEN depress CRD Power Supply Breaker Trip PBs on C03:

A-501 B-631 a) IF either A-501 or B-631 fails to trip, THEN manually insert rods at C03.

b) Dispatch an operator to open both CRD AC Power Supply breakers.

Notes:

Page 46 of 77

Op-Test No.: _____ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

__Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor trip due to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton is also failed so the ATC will be required to utilize the backup pushbuttons to complete the reactor trip. ES Channel 2 is also failed and will require manual actuation in order to regain the second train of HPI which will allow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOOTH: Insert trigger to open CRD AC breakers 2 minutes after directed by the control room.

N/A 2) IF more than one rod fails to fully insert OR reactor power is not dropping, THEN perform Emergency Boration (RT-12).

Crew 3) Do not continue until the reactor is shutdown.

N/A Turbine not 2. Depress Turbine trip PB.

on line. A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

Crew 3. Check adequate SCM.

CRS Report Immediate Actions Complete CRS 4. Perform the following:

Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating steps ATC

5. Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) demand adjusted to zero.

BOP

6. Open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operating HPI pump.

ATC

7. IF Emergency Boration is not in progress, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint to 100".

Notes:

Page 47 of 77

Op-Test No.: _____ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

__Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor trip due to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton is also failed so the ATC will be required to utilize the backup pushbuttons to complete the reactor trip. ES Channel 2 is also failed and will require manual actuation in order to regain the second train of HPI which will allow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Leak is large enough to cause ESAS Channels 1-4 to actuate and result in a LOSM. Channel 2 is failed and requires manual actuation by the ATC. This is a critical task due to the fact that SCM will not be restored without the second train of HPI.

CRS Enter LOSM EOP (OP-1202.002)

EXAMINER NOTE: The CRS may enter the ESAS EOP (OP-1202.010) however pressure will stabilize greater than 150 psig and therefore the LOSM EOP will contain the mitigating actions for this scenario. If the ESAS EOP is entered this is not a failure, the ESAS EOP will direct transitioning to LOSM once the crew determines pressure is stable and greater than 150 psig CT By manually actuating ES Channel 2 the ATC will have satisfied the step to Initiate full HPI (RT-3) even though RT-3 is not being used as guidance. This action must be performed in order to provide redundancy for HPI and maintain a greater margin to core uncover. For the leak rate in this scenario, the second train of HPI is required to regain adequate SCM.

1. Check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM BOP AND perform the following:

A. IF 2 minutes have elapsed, BOP THEN trip all RCPs:

o P32A o P32B o P32C o P32D ATC / BOP B. Initiate full HPI (RT-3).

1) IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",

THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

ATC C. Verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

CRS D. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating steps.

Notes:

Page 48 of 77

Op-Test No.: _____ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

__Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor trip due to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton is also failed so the ATC will be required to utilize the backup pushbuttons to complete the reactor trip. ES Channel 2 is also failed and will require manual actuation in order to regain the second train of HPI which will allow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 2. IF a feed source other than MFW is available, THEN trip both MFW pumps:

A Main Feed Pump B Main Feed Pump ATC 3. Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

ATC Actuate Channel 2 of ESAS before RT-10 reported complete IAW CT Transient Conduct of Operations.

BOP 3. Verify proper ESAS actuation (RT-10).

(Step 3 contingency action)

ATC 4. Check RCS press 150 psig.

N/A 5. IF RCS T-cold is < 540 F and dropping AND RB and AUX Building Sump levels are stable AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO 1202.003, "OVERCOOLING" procedure.

ATC 6. Isolate Pressurizer Spray Line as follows:

A. Place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode in MAN AND verify Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) closed (modulating valve).

B. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

ATC 7. IF both of the following conditions exist:

HPI cooling is not in progress ERV was not opened by procedure to intentionally depressurize the RCS THEN verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

Notes:

Page 49 of 77

Op-Test No.: _____ Scenario No.: _1___ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

__Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor trip due to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton is also failed so the ATC will be required to utilize the backup pushbuttons to complete the reactor trip. ES Channel 2 is also failed and will require manual actuation in order to regain the second train of HPI which will allow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 8. Check Nuclear Loop ICW process monitor alarm clear.

N/A 9. IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, "INADEQUATE CORE COOLING" procedure.

ATC 10. Check SG tube integrity (RT-18).

ATC 11. IF SCM is adequate, THEN control RCS press low within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

EXAMINER NOTE: Once the critical tasks are completed and pressure is being controlled, the simulator will be frozen at the direction of the lead examiner.

FREEZE AT THE DISCRETION OF THE LEAD EVALUATOR Notes:

Page 50 of 77

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKS ANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input from Operations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The following pages come from that document.

At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1 exam.

Page 51 of 77

CT-24 Shutdown Reactor - ATWS CT based on: Reactivity control to provide adequate shutdown margin TBD Description Operator must recognize and react to any of the reactor trip parameters that exceeds its limit but does not cause a reactor trip.

TBD Conditions Failure of reactor trip either by automatic and/or manual push button commands.

Associated GEOG Bases:

Page 52 of 77

ANO Version(s)

(1) The reactor should be manually tripped within 1 minute of the loss of the XX bus (Loss of 2 RCPs > 55%).

(2) Reactor tripped prior to 1700# RCS pressure and within 1 minute.

(3) The reactor should be tripped within 1 minute after condenser vacuum reaches 24.5 inches or the turbine trips (with the reactor above 43% power).

(4) The reactor should be tripped within 1 minute after the turbine trips (with the reactor above 43% power).

(5) The reactor should be manually tripped within 60 seconds of the turbine trip (the Turbine should be tripped at 14 mils vibration, RPS will not auto trip the reactor, the Reactor Trip Pushbutton is failed.)

(6) The reactor should be tripped within 1 minute of the loss of the 2nd MFW pump.

(7) The reactor trip pushbutton shall be depressed within one minute of P-32B RCP breaker opening. (No RCPs running in the B RCS loop).

SES used Justification for ANO:

(1) IAW OP-1015.050, Time Critical Operator Actions, operators are required to trip the reactor within 1 minute if RPS fails and the main reactor trip pushbutton fails. In these scenarios, the main reactor trip pushbutton is not failed although RPS is, so the TCOA criterion of 1 minute provides adequate time for the crew to recognize the condition and trip the plant as required.

(2) RPS is failed and will not cause a reactor trip at 1800# due to the lowering RCS pressure caused by the RCS leak. The criterion to have the reactor tripped prior to 1700# provides adequate time for the crew to diagnose the RPS failure and to shut down the reactor as required. The 1 minute criterion is described in (1) above.

(3) See justification in (1) above.

(4) See justification in (1) above.

(5) See justification in (1) above.

(6) See justification in (1) above.

(7) See justification in (1) above.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria, the Reactor Trip Pushbuttons must be depressed within 1 minute of exceeding the reactor trip setpoint of RCS Pressure <1800 psig, in order to meet the Time Critical Operator Action acceptance criteria. The applicant will continue down the contingency actions to manually insert control rods while dispatching the Auxiliary Operator to open the AC CRD Power Supply Breakers.

Page 53 of 77

CT-2 Initiate HPI CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water mass TBD Description Initiate full HPI anytime SCM is lost to provide maximum core heat removal.

Provide subcooled water for 10 to 20 heat transfer.

TBD also addresses balancing HPI flow.

TBD Conditions SCM lost Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

(1) Actions to initiate HPI should be started before SCM becomes inadequate at <30°F.

(2) HPI should be initiated before subcooling margin reaches <25°F or RCS pressure becomes

<1550 psig.

(3) ESAS Ch. 1 should be actuated before RT-10 reported complete IAW Transient Conduct of Operations.

Page 54 of 77

SES used Justification for ANO:

(1) Action to initiate HPI is necessary to provide makeup for the RCS inventory that is being lost to the secondary system (SGTR). Initiating HPI prior to the LSCM prevents unnecessary challenges to the controlled shutdown, cooldown, and isolation of the affected SG.

(2) Initiation of HPI with a PZR steam space leak is necessary to maintain RCS pressure and inventory that will be lost via the leak. Since ES Channels 1 and 2 are failed (auto actuation will not occur), 1550# RCS Pressure provides adequate time for the ATC to recognize the failure and to manually actuate the failed channels. 25F SCM also provides and adequate time for the crew to recognize the need for HPI and to initiate it appropriately.

(3) Initiation of the failed Channel 1 of ESAS is accomplished to provide redundancy for HPI injection and maintain a greater margin to core uncovery. The TBD shows that one HPI pump is all that is required for adequate core cooling, however, this results in a smaller margin to core uncovery.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (3) is applicable. The actuation of ES Channel 2 (redundant to channel 1 in the example above) prior to completing RT-10 is the criteria for acceptable performance. Justification for this task being identified as a Critical Task is the fact that Subcooling margin will not be recovered with only 1 train of HPI.

Page 55 of 77

RT-12 Page 1 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION NOTE If an unexpected delay occurs in implementation of Step 1, then promptly initiate Emergency Boration using HPI per step 2.

1. IF Boric Acid pump (P39A or P39B) and Batch Controller are available, THEN perform the following:

A. IF both OP and STBY HPI Pumps are off OR Letdown is isolated, THEN GO TO step 2.

B. Set Batch Controller for maximum batch size as follows:

1) Depress lower DISPLAY.
2) Depress TOTAL.
3) Depress TOTAL RESET.
4) Depress BATCH SET.
5) Depress 9, six times.
6) Depress ENTER.
7) Depress lower DISPLAY.

C. Verify Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251) closed.

D. Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).

E. Verify both Makeup Filters in service:

F3A F3B F. Record initial BAAT (T-6) level ____________ in.

G. Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).

(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 56 of 77

Page 2 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

1. (Continued)

H. Start Batch Controller by depressing RUN key.

I. Adjust Batch Controller Flow CNTRL VLV (CV-1249) to 100% open as follows:

1) Depress VALVE SET.
2) Depress numbers: 1, 0, 0.
3) Depress ENTER.
4) Depress lower DISPLAY.
5) Depress RATE.

J. IF Batch Controller output rate < 5 gpm, THEN perform the following:

1) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s):

P39A P39B

2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).
3) Stop Batch Controller by depressing STOP key.
4) GO TO step 2.

K. Adjust Pressurizer Level Control Setpoint to 220".

L. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

M. WHEN PZR level is 100",

THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and component limitations.

(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 57 of 77

Page 3 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

1. (Continued)

N. Perform the following as necessary to maintain Makeup Tank level 55 to 86":

1) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).
2) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s):

P39A P39B

3) Place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.
4) WHEN Makeup Tank level is lowered to desired level, THEN perform the following:

a) Return 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) to LETDOWN.

b) Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).

c) Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).

O. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:

1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book. PPM
2) Calculate batch add required using Plant Computer OR Soluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.3, "Feed Volume For Batch Boration or Dilution". gal
3) Use 1103.004, Attachment D, "Volume of BAAT Vs. Depth of Liquid to determine desired final BAAT level.

(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 58 of 77

Page 4 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

1. (Continued)

P. WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added per step 1.O.

OR as determined by Reactor Engineering, THEN perform the following:

1) Stop Boric Acid pump(s):

P39A P39B

2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).
3) Verify Makeup Tank level 55 to 86".
4) Close BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408).
5) Adjust Letdown flow to desired rate.

Page 59 of 77

Page 5 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

2. IF HPI will be used for emergency boration, THEN perform the following:

A. Initiate HPI per RT-2.

B. Verify HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) associated with running HPI pump open.

C. IF Letdown is in service, THEN place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

D. WHEN PZR level is 100",

THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and component limitations.

E. Maintain PZR level 200 to 220" as follows:

1) Verify both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) as necessary.

F. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:

1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book. PPM
2) Calculate final BWST level for required boron addition using Plant Computer OR Soluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.6, "Continuous Feed and Bleed from BWST". ft G. WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added per step 2.F.

OR as determined by Reactor Engineering, THEN perform the following:

1) Operate HPI as directed by CRS.
2) Adjust Letdown flow as directed by CRS.

END Page 60 of 77

RT-5 Page 1 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

1. Verify EFW actuation indicated on C09:

Train A: Train B:

Bus 1 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 2 NOTE Table 1 contains EFW fill rate and level bands for various plant conditions.

2. Verify at least one EFW pump (P7A or P7B) running with flow to SG(s) through applicable EFW CNTRL valve(s).

SG A SG B CV-2645 P7A CV-2647 CV-2646 P7B CV-2648

3. IF SCM is not adequate, THEN perform the following:

A. Select Reflux Boiling setpoint for the following:

Train A Train B NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.

B. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain SG levels 370 to 410.

(3. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 61 of 77

Page 2 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

3. (Continued)
1) IF both SGs are available, THEN verify SG level rising and tracking EFIC setpoint until 370 to 410 is established.

a) IF EFW flow is less than adequate, THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND to maintain 340 gpm to applicable SG until level is 370 to 410.

b) IF EFW flow is excessive AND

> 340 gpm to either SG, THEN throttle EFW to applicable SG in HAND to limit SG depressurization.

Do not throttle below 340 gpm on either SG until SG level is 370 to 410.

2) IF only one SG is available, THEN feed available SG in HAND at 570 gpm until SG level is 370 to 410.
3) IF EFW is being controlled in HAND AND SG press drops below 720 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling, THEN continue feeding at required minimum rate AND perform the following:

a) Bypass MSLI by momentarily placing SG Bypass toggle switch on each EFIC cabinet Initiate module in BYPASS.

C37-3 C37-4 C37-1 C37-2 b) Place applicable EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 P7A CV-2647 CV-2646 P7B CV-2648 c) Place applicable EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL.

SG A SG B CV-2627 P7A CV-2620 CV-2670 P7B CV-2626 Page 62 of 77

Page 3 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

4. IF SCM is adequate, THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Excessive EFW flow can result in loss of SCM due to RCS shrinkage.

NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.

Expect CETs to rise until natural circ conditions are established. If EFW flow control is in HAND, additional flow may not be necessary to prevent rising CETs until natural circ conditions are established.

A. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain applicable SG level band per Table 1.

1) IF EFW flow is less than adequate OR EFW flow is excessive, THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND as necessary to ensure the following:

Maintain sufficient EFW flow to prevent rise in CET temp.

Maintain continuous EFW flow until applicable level band is reached.

Maintain sufficient EFW flow to ensure SG level is either stable OR rising until applicable level band is reached.

5. IF all RCPs are off, THEN check primary to secondary heat transfer in progress indicated by all of the following:

T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2)

T-hot tracking CET temps T-hot/T-cold T stable or dropping

6. Monitor EMERGENCY FEEDWATER and EFIC alarms on K12.

Page 63 of 77

Page 4 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL Table 1 EFIC Automatic Level Control Setpoints Condition Level Band Automatic Fill Rate Any RCP running 20 to 40 No fill rate limit All RCPs off and Natural Circ selected 300 to 340 2 to 8/min All RCPs off and Reflux Boiling selected 370 to 410 2 to 8/min Table 2 Examples of Less Than Adequate EFW Flow Indications SG level < 20 and no EFW flow indicated All RCPs off and SG level not tracking EFIC calculated setpoint All RCPs off and EFIC level setpoint not trending toward applicable level band Examples of Excessive EFW Flow Indications SG press drops 100 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling SCM approaching minimum adequate due to EFW flow induced overcooling EFW CNTRL valve open with associated SG level > applicable setpoint level band END Page 64 of 77

RT-10 Page 1 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION NOTE Obtain Shift Manager/CRS permission prior to overriding ES.

1. Verify BWST T3 Outlets open:

CV-1407 CV-1408 A. IF BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) fails to open, THEN override AND stop associated HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failed valve is opened:

CV-1407 CV-1408 P34A P34B P36A/B P36C/B P35A P35B

2. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open:

CV-3806 CV-3807 Page 65 of 77

Page 2 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

3. IF any RCP is running, THEN perform the following:

A. IF ES Channel 5 or 6 has actuated, THEN perform the following:

1) IF SCM is adequate, THEN trip all running RCPs due to loss of ICW:

P32A P32C P32B P32D

2) IF SCM is not adequate, THEN check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM AND perform the following:

a) IF 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN trip all RCPs:

P32A P32C P32B P32D b) IF > 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN perform the following:

(1) Leave currently running RCPs on.

(2) IF RCS press > 150 psig, THEN notify CRS to GO TO 1202.002, LOSS OF SUBCOOLING MARGIN procedure.

(3) Restore RCP services per RT-8 while continuing.

B. IF neither ES channel 5 nor 6 has actuated, THEN dispatch an operator to perform Service Water And Auxiliary Cooling System (1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW Following ES Actuation" while continuing.

1) WHEN ICW Cooler SW Outlets and Bypasses are aligned per 1104.029, Exhibit B, THEN override AND open one Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply (CV-3811 or CV-3820).

Page 66 of 77

Page 3 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

4. Verify proper ESAS Channels tripped:

Condition Channels Actuated RCS press 1550 psig 1,2,3,4 RB press 18.7 psia 1,2,3,4,5,6 RB press 44.7 psia 7,8,9,10

5. Perform the following:

A. Verify each component properly actuated on C16 and C18, except those overridden in previous steps.

B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.

NOTE During ESAS actuation, low LPI flow is expected until RCS depressurizes below LPI pump shutoff head.

During large break LOCAs, high LPI flow can be experienced. Flow must be throttled to ensure ECCS flows are maintained within assumptions of calculations.

1. IF any of the following conditions exist:

A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4)

B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5)

A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4)

B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B5)

A RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C4)

B RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C5)

THEN use Annunciator K11 Corrective Action (1203.012J) to clear unexpected alarms.

C. IF only one train of HPI is available AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

Page 67 of 77

Page 4 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

6. On C10, perform the following:

Verify DGs operating within normal limits:

DG 1 DG 2 4100 to 4200 V 4100 to 4200 V 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 2750 KW 2750 KW Verify the following breakers open:

A3-A4 Crossties:

A-310 A-410 B5-B6 Crossties:

B-513 B-613 Unit AUX feeds to A1 and A2:

A-112 A-212 Verify the following breakers closed:

A3 Feeds to B5:

A-301 B-512 A4 Feeds to B6:

A-401 B-612

7. On C09, perform the following:

A. Check AUX Cooling Water header depressurized.

B. IF proper EFW actuation and control has not already been verified, THEN verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

Page 68 of 77

Page 5 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

8. On C19, perform the following:

A. Verify LPI (Decay Heat) Room Cooler running in each Decay Heat Room:

P34A Room P34B Room VUC1A or B VUC1C or D B. IF RB Spray has actuated, THEN verify SW to RB Spray P35A and P35B LO CLRs open:

CV-3804 CV-3805

9. IF all RCPs are off AND RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) is closed, THEN place RCP Seal Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE:

SV-1271 SV-1273 SV-1270 SV-1272

10. IF leakage into the RB is indicated, THEN verify RB cooling maximized:

A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D B. Verify RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves open:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815 C. Verify key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers unlatched:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 Page 69 of 77

Page 6 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

11. Initiate RB H2 sampling using Containment Hydrogen Control (1104.031), Exhibit A.
12. Verify each component properly actuated on C26.
13. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26:

Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814)

Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816)

Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)

14. Verify the following High Point Vents closed:

Reactor A Loop B Loop Pressurizer Vessel SV-1081 SV-1091 SV-1071 SV-1082 SV-1092 SV-1072 SV-1077 SV-1083 SV-1093 SV-1073 SV-1079 SV-1084 SV-1094 SV-1074

15. IF AUX Lube Oil pump for running HPI pump fails to stop after 20 second time delay, THEN within one hour of ESAS actuation dispatch an operator to stop AUX Lube Oil pump locally at breaker while continuing:

P64A P64B P64C B5721 B5722/B6515 B6514

16. Place running Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pump (P34A/P34B) hand switches in NORMAL-AFTER-START to enable DECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP (K09-A7) alarm:

P34A P34B

17. Monitor ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM alarms on K11.

Page 70 of 77

Page 7 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

18. IF any of the following components/systems are in service:

Condensate Pumps Condenser Vacuum Pumps Waterbox Vacuum Pumps Seal Oil System Control Room Chillers THEN coordinate with CRS/SM to secure components and/or systems, as time permits.

19. Coordinate with CRS/SM to re-verify component actuation with another operator.

END Page 71 of 77

RT-18 Page 1 of 1 CHECK SG TUBE INTEGRITY

1. Check the following indications:

None of the following radiation monitor indications rising OR in alarm:

- Main Condenser process monitor (RI-3632)

- Either OTSG N-16 Gross Detector:

  • RI-2691
  • RI-2692

- Either Steam Line High Range Radiation Monitor:

  • RI-2681
  • RI-2682 No report from Nuclear Chemistry that SG tube leak exists.

No rise in unidentified RCS leakage accompanied by:

- Higher than expected SG level

- Lower than expected FW flow rate END Page 72 of 77

RT-14 Page 1 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS NOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred:

HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100 F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50 F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control.

When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply.

PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.

1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists, THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.
2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig, THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.
3. IF PZR steam space leak exists, THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. IF SCM is adequate, THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI.

C. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdown per RT-13.

D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 73 of 77

Page 2 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. IF RCS press is high, THEN limit press using one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met:

HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open

2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

3) Throttle HPI.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D. IF PZR AUX Spray is in service, THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.

F. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdown per RT-13.

G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 74 of 77

Page 75 of 77 Page 3 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. (Continued)

H. IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),

THEN perform the following:

1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C P64A P64B P64C

2) Stop desired HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C

3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

5. IF RCS press is low, THEN raise press using one or more of the following:

A. Raise makeup flow.

B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.

D. Reduce Letdown flow.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.

(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 76 of 77

Page 4 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

5. (CONTINUED)

CAUTION If HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPI cooling is no longer required.

F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

CAUTION With RCS solid, 1 F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

6. IF PZR is solid, THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature.

Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS press NOTE Adjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate and cooldown rate.

7. IF normal makeup is in service AND HPI is in service, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale.

END Page 77 of 77

Appendix D Scenario Outline Form ES-D-1 Facility: __ANO-1_________ Scenario No.: _____2_______ Op-Test No.: __2016-1_

Examiners: ___________________________ Operators: ____________________________

Initial Conditions: _90% power .

Turnover: ____90% power clearance has been given by Ops Manager and Shift Manager to raise power to 95% power. __________________________________________________________

_P-75 Aux Feedwater Pump OOS for oil sample.________________________________________

Event Malf. Event Event No. No. Type* Description 1 ATC R Raise power to 95% using control rods 2 All C Trip of running Makeup Pump 3 All I / TS NI-5 fails low 4 BOP C K01-C4 #2 EDG oil leak. #2 EDG declared INOPERABLE CRS TS 5 ATC I Seal Injection Flow Transmitter fails high 6 All M Loss of Offsite Power 7 BOP C Failure of #1 EDG to automatically start CT 8 All C MSSV fails open on A SG CT

  • (N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical Task Target Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d) Actual Attributes
1. Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2/2/2/2/2
2. Abnormal events (2-4) 4/4/3/4/3
3. Major transients (1-2) 1/1/1/1/1
4. EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 2/1/2/1/1
5. EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1/1/0/1/1
6. EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2/2/2/2/2 Page 1 of 74

NARRATIVE This scenario starts with plant power at 90%. During turn over the crew is directed to raise power to 95%.

Following the up power, the running Makeup Pump will trip requiring entry into the Loss of Reactor Coolant Makeup AOP. This results in a loss of makeup and seal injection. The BOP will start the standby Makeup Pump and the ATC will restore makeup and seal injection. The CRS will then direct the BOP to restore normal letdown flow.

Next, NI-5 power range indicator will fail low, this will have no immediate effect on the plant but does require the CRS to declare RPS Channel A INOPERABLE and entry into T.S. 3.3.1 Condition A. The BOP will place the RPS Channel A in Manual Bypass in accordance with 1105.001, NI & RPS Operating Procedure, to comply with T.S.

Next, a Critical Trouble Alarm on low oil pressure for the #2 EDG will alert the crew to a significant oil leak rendering the #2 EDG INOPERABLE. The CRS will enter T.S. 3.8.1 Condition B and should direct the BOP to place the EDG in Lock Out to prevent an automatic start. (PRA)

Next, the RCP Seal Injection Total Flow Recorder (FR-1239) will fail high which will cause the Seal Injection Flow Control Valve (CV-1239) to go closed. This will isolate seal injection and result in an alarm and rising seal bleedoff temperatures. The ATC will take manual control of CV-1239 and open it enough to restore 8-10 gpm flow to each RCP.

The major event is a Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) with a failure of the #1 EDG to automatically start. (PRA) The BOP will manually start the #1 EDG (critical task) to provide power to the Red Train ES components. Following the reactor trip a Main Steam Safety Valve (MSSV) on the A Steam Generator will fail open resulting in an overcooling and a transition to the Overcooling section in the Degraded Power EOP. Isolating the A Steam Generator is a critical task to stop the overcooling. Once the overcooling is stopped and temperature is being controlled the scenario is complete.

PRA / IPE explanation:

Key equipment for potential risk increase includes Makeup and Purification and 4160V Vital AC.

(OE) ANO has had issues associated with NI indication in the recent past.

Initiating events include a LOOP.

Page 2 of 74

List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 2 At On Action Description Time Event None None Insert malfunction DG175 EDG 1 FAILS TO AUTO START Insert remote A204OP to A204OP RACK DOWN A204 P75 AUX None None DOWN FEED PUMP None 1 Insert malfunction CV095 P36A MOTOR WINDING HEATUP None 2 Insert malfunction NI236 NI-5 FAILS LO None 3 Insert malfunction DG174 EDG 2 FAILURE Insert malfunction TR631 to TOTAL RCS SEAL FLOW (PDT1239)

None 4 80.00000 in 60 0-80 GPM None 5 Insert malfunction ED183 LOSS OF OFF SITE POWER Insert malfunction MS141 to A OTSG SHIFT IN PSV 2696 None 6 2.60000 LIFT&RESET 1-6 SET NO Insert remote A901 to None 7 A901 2A9-1A3/4 X-TIE FDR 152-901 CLOSED Insert remote A306OP to A306OP RACK DOWN A306 P36A HPI None 8 DOWN PUMP MU1207_1 CV1207 SEAL INJ INLT None 9 Insert remote MU1207_1 to 0 ISOL Insert remote MU1207_3 to MU1207_3 CV1207 MAN BYP TO RCP None 10 0.08000 in 45 SEAL INJ.

Page 3 of 74

Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 2 Event 1

1. 1102.004, Power Operations Sections 7 and 9 (NOP)

Event 2

1. 1203.012I, ACA for K10-A6
2. 1203.026, Loss of Reactor Coolant Makeup (AOP)
3. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks (RT-13) (EOP)

Event 3

1. 1203.012F, ACA for K07-B4
2. 1203.012G, ACA for K08-C3
3. 1203.021, Loss of Neutron Flux Indication, Section 1 (AOP)
4. 1105.001, NI & RPS Operating Procedure, Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass section (NOP)
5. T.S. 3.3.1
6. T.S. 3.3.11 Event 4
1. 1203.012A, ACA for K01-C4
2. T.S. 3.8.1
3. 1104.036, EDG Operation (NOP)

Event 5

1. 1203.012G ACA for K08-A7 Event 6
1. 1202.001, Reactor Trip (EOP)
2. 1202.007, Degraded Power (EOP)
3. 1202.012, Repetitive Task, RT-21 (EOP)
4. 1202.012, Repetitive Task, RT-9 (EOP)
5. 1202.012, Repetitive Task, RT-14 (EOP)

Event 7

1. 1202.012, Repetitive Task, RT-21 (EOP)

Event 8

1. 1202. 007, Degraded Power (EOP)

EOP - Emergency Operating Procedure AOP - Abnormal Operating Procedure ACA - Annunciator Corrective Actions NOP - Normal Operating Procedure Page 4 of 74

Appendix D Required Operator Actions Form ES-D-2 Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Raise power to 95% per OP-1102.004, Power Operations.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference 1102.004, Power Operations beginning at Step 7.21 EXAMINER NOTE: With a power history of 90% for the past 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />, Table L1 would limit power escalation from 90% to 98% power at a rate of <30%/hr.

T=0 7.21 WHEN reactor power is >90%,

THEN perform the following:

CRS 7.21.1 Check status of FW Flow input correction on PMS (point FWCORR = no indicates correction disabled).

A. IF desired to enable FW Flow input correction, THEN contact Reactor Engineering to establish FW Flow input correction in the plant computer.

ATC 7.21.2 Check NI Power within 2% of Heat Balance power.

A. IF NI Power NOT within 2% of Heat Balance power, THEN perform NI calibration per Unit 1 Power Range Linear Amp Calibration at Power (NI CAL)

(1305.036).

NOTE Since contaminants reach their highest concentration in the MSR drains once Heater Drain Pumps (P8A/B) are in-service, it is preferred to place MSR DI into service after this condition and when at steady state power. This will require minimal manual system adjustments. However, there is no prohibition to placing the MSR DI into service anytime power is >45% if desired.

Notes:

Page 5 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Raise power to 95% per OP-1102.004, Power Operations.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS / BOP 7.22 IF either of the following applies:

Plant is at steady-state power with Heater Drain Pumps (P-8A/B) in-service (preferred)

Power operations >45% AND condensate/feedwater chemistry requires use of the MSR DI THEN perform "Placing MSR DI Into Service" section of MSR Drain Demineralizer Operation (1106.031).

EXAMINER NOTE: Steps 7.23 and 7.24 are N/A.

7.25 WHEN reactor power escalation is complete, THEN stop monitoring E-1A/E-1B Feedwater Heater Bypass line temperatures.

N/A 7.26 IF this power escalation was considered an IPTE, THEN refer to Infrequently Performed Tests or Evolutions (EN-OP-116) and initiate an evaluation of this evolution per Attachment 9.6 "IPTE Post Job Brief Checklist".

EXAMINER NOTE: Applicants may choose to utilize the STAR module to adjust the ULD for the power increase. The following steps describe either method and are considered INFORMATIONAL USE and therefore the procedure may not be referenced, however all the steps should be completed.

Notes:

Page 6 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Raise power to 95% per OP-1102.004, Power Operations.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 9.1 IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT been conducted, Brief THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief per conducted COPD-030 with an SRO.

prior to taking the watch NOTE When the ULD/Unit Master is in Manual, the STAR module in the ULD/Unit Master sub-system also provides dual-rate manual control of the ULD/Unit Master through the ULD Station RAISE/LOWER toggle switch.

When the RAISE/LOWER toggle switch is actuated for < 3 seconds, the STAR module inputs a rate of change to ICS of 1.25 MWe/sec.

If the toggle switch is actuated for > 3 seconds the STAR module inputs a rate of change to ICS of 25 MWe/sec., subject to Rate of Change limits.

ATC 9.2 IF ULD is in MANUAL, THEN perform the following:

9.2.1 Verify plant is stable at current reactor power.

9.2.2 Operate ULD RAISE/LOWER toggle for the desired duration to raise or lower reactor power.

9.2.3 Monitor NIs and PMS/PDS to verify desired change AND that plant has stabilized.

9.2.4 IF desired to continue adjusting power, THEN GO TO step 9.2.1.

NOTE When ICS is in Auto, the maximum rate of change is 1 MWe/min.

Notes:

Page 7 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Raise power to 95% per OP-1102.004, Power Operations.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC / BOP 9.3 IF the ULD is in AUTO, THEN perform the following:

9.3.1 Perform one of the following to select ULD program on PMS:

Select NASP2 (NAS2) on PMS touchscreen and Unit Load Demand (ULD).

Enter ULD on PMS.

9.3.2 Program ULD setpoint as follows:

A. Enter desired reactor power setpoint in PMS.

Do NOT save the change.

B. Obtain concurrence from second licensed operator that setpoint is correct.

C. Save selected setpoint to PMS.

9.3.3 Monitor NIs and PMS/PDS for stable conditions.

Notes:

Page 8 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Raise power to 95% per OP-1102.004, Power Operations.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE This step is designated INFORMATIONAL USE.

ATC 9.3.4 WHEN power is stable at desired power level, THEN reset STAR module cumulative correction as follows:

A. Momentarily depress ULD Raise/Lower Toggle switch in either direction.

B. Check that ULD POS is on the caret.

END OF POWER MANUEVER Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 9 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference ACA OP-1203.012I T=10 CRS 1. GO TO Loss of Reactor Coolant Makeup (1203.026).

2. To clear alarm, perform one of the following:

BOP A. Place HS for alarmed pump to NORMAL-AFTER-STOP or PULL-TO-LOCK.

B. Reclose tripped breaker per N/A "Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers" section of Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

CRS Reference Loss of Reactor Coolant Makeup OP-1203.026 NOTE Indications of loss of HPI suction are:

Erratic flow, and Erratic discharge pressure, and Control valves stable N/A 1. IF HPI pump has lost suction, THEN stop the HPI pump.

Notes:

Page 10 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 2. Isolate letdown by performing one of the following:

Close Letdown Coolers Outlet (CV-1221)

Close both of the following on C18:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1214)

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1216)

NOTE With HPI pump off, ICW cooling of RCP seals should provide adequate time to correct HPI pump or control problems, providing no pre-condition exists, such as excessive RCP shaft sleeve leakage. HPI can provide necessary makeup for normal operations or plant shutdown.

Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency (1203.031),

Attachment A can be used as an aid to assess seal parameters.

ATC / BOP 3. Verify RC pump seals are being cooled by ICW.

A. IF ICW to RCP seals is NOT available, THEN perform Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency (1203.031), "Simultaneous Loss of Seal Injection and Seal Cooling Flow" section.

Notes:

Page 11 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

4. Prepare to restart an HPI pump as follows:

N/A A. IF OP HPI pump is unavailable AND STBY HPI pump is unavailable, THEN dispatch an operator to re-align the ES HPI pump per Attachment A of this procedure.

B. Place the following valves in HAND AND close:

ATC RC Pumps Total INJ Flow (CV-1207)

Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235)

ATC C. Verify RCP Seal Injection Block (CV-1206) closes.

BOP D. Select Safety System Diagnostic Inst display on SPDS for OP HPI pump AND evaluate suction pressure and flow stability prior to event.

N/A E. IF loss of pump suction was indicated, THEN perform the following:

1) Verify Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275) open.

CAUTION Indicated suction pressure could be H2 gas pressure only and is NOT absolute assurance of adequate volume of water. HPI pump operation with inadequate water volume can damage pump.

NOTE Addition of 600 gallons to the MU tank ensures a volume of water in the tank regardless of level indication.

Notes:

Page 12 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 2) IF CV-1275 was NOT closed, THEN refill Makeup Tank (T-4) by adding 20"

(~600 gallons) using current RCS boron concentration.

BOP 5. IF STBY HPI pump is available, THEN perform the following:

A. Start Aux lube oil pump for STBY HPI pump.

B. GO TO step 8 to place STBY HPI pump into service.

N/A 6. IF STBY HPI pump is NOT available, AND OP HPI pump damage is NOT suspected, THEN perform the following:

A. IF loss of HPI Pump was caused by automatic breaker trip, THEN refer to "Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers" section of Electrical System Operation (1107.001).

B. Start Aux lube oil pump for OP HPI pump.

C. GO TO step 8 to place OP HPI pump into service.

N/A 7. IF OP HPI pump is NOT available, AND STBY HPI pump is NOT available, THEN perform the following:

A. Start Aux lube oil pump for ES HPI pump.

B. Place ES HPI pump into service per step 8.

BOP 8. Restore normal makeup and seal injection as follows:

Notes:

Page 13 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE Decision to vent HPI pump should be based on suction pressure from SPDS history as well as leak location and lowest suction pressure achieved.

N/A A. IF necessary, THEN vent pump as follows:

1) IF ES HPI pump is being re-aligned per Attachment A, THEN verify associated P-36 Makeup Pump Suction Cross-Over open prior to venting.
2) Vent pump using applicable Makeup Pump P-36 Vent to ABV Header:

P-36A P-36B P-36C ABV-9A ABV-9B ABV-9C B. Verify HPI pump suction pressure >10 psig.

C. Verify the following valves in HAND AND closed:

CV-1207 CV-1235 D. IF ES HPI pump will be used, THEN verify Attachment A steps 1 through 6 complete.

CAUTION Operation of Aux Lube Oil Pump with HPI/MU Pump running should be minimized.

Notes:

Page 14 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP E. WHEN Aux lube oil pump has run for 1 minute, THEN start HPI pump.

F. Stop Aux lube oil pump for HPI pump.

BOP

1) IF STBY pump started, THEN check stopped HPI pump for reverse rotation.

a) IF reverse rotation, THEN perform "Reverse Rotation Corrective Action" section of Makeup & Purification System Operation (1104.002).

ATC G. Place CV-1206 pushbutton in OVRD (OVRD light on).

ATC H. Open CV-1206.

BOOTH: Report that the shaft is stopped on the P-36A HPI pump when asked.

Report normal after start conditions on P-36B when asked.

CAUTION With RCP seal bleed off temperature >180°F rapid establishment of seal injection, <30 min, will result in seal damage.

Notes:

Page 15 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC I. IF RCP Seal Bleed off temperatures are 180°F, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total INJ Flow is 30 to 40 gpm.

1) Place CV-1207 in AUTO.

N/A J. IF RCP Seal Bleed off temperatures are >180°F, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total INJ Flow is 8 to 12 gpm.

1) Record current time _______.
2) Maintain 8 to 12 gpm total flow for >30 minutes.
3) After 30 minutes, slowly open CV-1207 until 30 to 40 gpm total flow is reached.

a) Place CV-1207 in AUTO.

K. WHEN RCP seals total injection flow is above setpoint ATC of ~22 gpm (CV-1206 Flow light on),

THEN return CV-1206 OVRD pushbutton to normal (OVRD light off).

ATC L. Slowly open CV-1235 until makeup flow indication is on-scale.

ATC M. Adjust CV-1235 setpoint to desired value.

ATC N. Place CV-1235 in AUTO.

BOP 9. Restore letdown per Repetitive Tasks (1202.012), Restore Letdown (RT-13).

CRS 10. Initiate repairs for failed HPI pumps and components.

Notes:

Page 16 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Running Makeup Pump trips requiring isolation of Letdown, restoration of seal injection and restoration of makeup. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 11. Refer to TS 3.5.2 for limiting conditions for operation (LCO).

A. IF required, THEN place plant in Mode 3, >525°F per Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016).

EXAMINER NOTE: No T.S. entry required for one inoperable HPI pump. Two trains remain operable.

CRS 12. Verify Condition Report initiated.

END OF MAKEUP PUMP TRIP Notes:

Page 17 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Restore normal Letdown per RT-13. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior RESTORE LETDOWN ATC 1. Verify ICW pump supplying Nuclear loop (P33C or P33B).

ATC 2. Verify 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) aligned for desired flow path (BLEED or LETDOWN).

ATC 3. Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) demand adjusted to zero.

ATC 4. Verify the following:

Makeup Filter Inlet to F3A or F3B (CV-1246 or CV-1247) open PURIF Demineralizer Inlet to T36A or T36B (CV-1244 or CV-1245) open Either or both RC to Letdown Coolers and associated ICW to Letdown Coolers open:

E29A E29B RC to Letdown CV-1213 CV-1215 Coolers ICW to Letdown CV-2216 CV-2217 Coolers Orifice Block (CV-1222) open N/A 5. IF ESAS has actuated, THEN perform the following:

A. Obtain Shift Manager/CRS permission to override ES for Letdown restoration.

B. IF both Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply (CV-3811 and CV-3820) are closed, THEN perform the following:

1) Dispatch an operator to perform Service Water And Auxiliary Cooling System (1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW following ES Actuation".

Notes:

Page 18 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Restore normal Letdown per RT-13. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: All of step 5 is N/A, continue on to Step 6.

BOP 6. Check Nuclear ICW RB Inlet and Nuclear ICW RB Outlets open:

CV-2214 CV-2233 CV-2215 A. IF Nuclear ICW RB Inlet (CV-2233) or a Nuclear ICW RB Outlet (CV-2214 or CV-2215) is closed, THEN establish ICW cooling in RB as follows:

1) Dispatch an operator to monitor ICW Surge Tank (T-37B) for rise in level, indicating possible RCS to ICW leak while continuing.

a) Open Nuclear ICW RB Outlets:

CV-2215 CV-2214 b) Open Nuclear ICW RB Inlet (CV-2233).

c) Contact operator at ICW Surge Tanks to determine if ICW piping failure is evident.

(1) IF piping failure is evident, THEN close Nuclear ICW RB Inlet and Outlets:

CV-2214 CV-2233 CV-2215 (2) Do not restore Letdown flow.

ATC 7. Verify Letdown Coolers Outlet(s) (RCS) open for available Letdown Cooler(s):

CV-1214 CV-1216 Notes:

Page 19 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___Restore normal Letdown per RT-13. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 8. IF Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221) closed on high temperature, THEN perform Makeup & Purification System Operation (1104.002), "Recovery of Letdown Following High Letdown Temperature" section in conjunction with this procedure.

BOP 9. Verify Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221) open.

ATC 10. Establish desired letdown flow using Orifice Bypass (CV-1223).

END OF RESTORE LETDOWN Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 20 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=25 CRS / BOP Reference ACA OP-1203.012F for K07-B4 Crew 1. Determine the cause of the alarm as follows:

NOTE SASS ENABLE indicating light is not lit when:

Channel mismatch or signal transfer occur.

SASS is not in AUTO.

Loss of AC or DC power to SASS.

ATC / BOP A. Observe SASS indicating lights on C03, C04, and C13 and determine if a transfer from the preferred source (X) has occurred.

1. IF SASS MISMATCH due to controlling RCS N/A Pressure Selector, THEN perform the following:
a. IF desired AND an automatic transfer has NOT occurred, THEN perform the following to select opposite transmitter:
1) Check that other indications of RCS pressure (e.g. ICCMDS, WR RCS pressure) indicate similar to signal to be selected.
2) IF RCS pressure signal transfer will NOT cause a pressure transient, THEN select desired signal.

Notes:

Page 21 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC B. Observe the non-selected input on the plant computer for mismatch indication.

N/A C. IF desired,THEN monitor SASS modules in C47-2 for mismatch indications.

N/A 2. IF a transfer has occurred, THEN place the selector switch in the position of the automatically selected input signal.

ATC 3. IF desired AND an automatic transfer has NOT occurred, THEN perform the following to select another signal:

NOTE The switching of controlling signals might affect operation of the following:

Integrated Control System PZR level control RCS pressure control ATC / BOP A. Signal to be selected should be verified as a usable signal.

ATC B. Signal to be selected should be compared with existing controlling signal.

ATC C. IF signal transfer will NOT cause a system transient, THEN make selection.

Notes:

Page 22 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CAUTION If signals are not compatible, then switching controlling signals when in automatic could cause a system transient.

N/A D. IF signals are NOT compatible, THEN select signal manually as follows:

1. Place affected components in manual.
2. Make selection.
a. IF desired to return affected components to automatic, THEN perform the following:
1) Adjust affected components as necessary to null error.
2) Return affected components to automatic.
b. Monitor process control.
c. Ensure that new signal source is providing proper control signal.

CRS 4. For failed input signals or persistent mismatch indications, initiate corrective action for repair.

Notes:

Page 23 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE An input mismatch with no input failure will automatically reinstate SASS ENABLE when the mismatch is cleared provided the selector switch is in the SASS ENBL position.

When a mismatch exists, the auto transfer function is inhibited.

Placing the Mismatch Alarm Bypass switch to ON has no effect on auto transfer capabilities.

N/A 5. For mismatch alarms, the alarm will clear when the mismatch is corrected.

CRS or 6. For persistent mismatch alarms, place the Mismatch Alarm N/A Bypass switch in C47-2 for the failed component in ON.

A. Verify WR/WO submitted for repair AND "ALARM BYPASSED" tag placed adjacent to the associated selector switch in the control room.

N/A 7. WHEN failed transmitters have been repaired, THEN return associated SASS control to AUTO (SASS ENABLED) per Reactor Coolant System NNI (1105.006).

Notes:

Page 24 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference ACA OP-1203.012G for K08-C3 ATC 1. Check nuclear instrumentation on C03 for low readings:

Intermediate Range (NI-3, NI-4)

Power Range (NI-5 thru NI-8)

CRS 2. IF power range is reading incorrectly or is failed OR intermediate range detector is reading incorrectly or is failed, THEN GO TO Loss of Neutron Flux Indication (1203.021).

CRS 3. Have I&C investigate and repair failed detector power supply.

N/A 4. IF power range is NOT failed low AND intermediate range channel is NOT failed low, THEN check for RPS channel trip as follows:

A. Observe trip lights at RPS cabinets. Amber light will be on bright for tripped RPS channel.

B. Determine condition that caused channel trip.

C. IF desired, THEN place tripped channel in manual bypass per "Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass" section of NI & RPS Operating Procedure (1105.001).

D. Initiate steps, as required, to determine reason for channel trip.

E. IF necessary, THEN initiate steps to make repairs.

Notes:

Page 25 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 5. Reference TS 3.3.1 for operability requirements.

BOP 6. To clear alarm:

A. Restore high voltage to detector.

B. Place tripped channel in manual bypass per "Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass" section of NI & RPS Operating Procedure (1105.001).

C. Reset tripped channel.

CRS Reference OP-1203.021, Loss of Neutron Flux Indication Section 1 - Loss of one or more Power Range NI Channels N/A 1. IF NI failure affects reactor power input to ICS, THEN perform the following:

A Place Diamond and Reactor Demand stations in MANUAL and stabilize reactor power at less than 100%

using available nuclear instrumentation.

B. Verify feedwater stabilizes T-ave while monitoring reactor coolant pressure.

Notes:

Page 26 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 2. Check failed detector for normal voltage.

Power Supply module in associated RPS cabinet reads approx 600 V. (590 V to 610 V)

PDS/PMS Computer Point (590 V to 620 V)

RPS-A NI-5 HV POWER SUPPLY (E0549)

RPS-B NI-6 HV POWER SUPPLY (E0550)

RPS-C NI-7 HV POWER SUPPLY (E0551)

RPS-D NI-8 HV POWER SUPPLY (E0552)

A. IF normal voltage is not indicated, N/A THEN reset power supply for detector(s) as follows:

1) Place affected channel in channel bypass per NI &

RPS Operating Procedure (1105.001), "Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass" section. Refer to TS 3.3.1 Condition A.

2) Check power supply ON/OFF switch ON.

EXAMINER NOTE: Show picture of meter contained on last page of this guide.

NOTE Resetting power supply to power range detector(s) will cause voltage spikes and neutron power signal spikes, which may trip associated RPS channel.

Notes:

Page 27 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 3) Depress power supply RESET switch to RESET position.

4) IF power range indication returns to normal, THEN verify all trip bistables are reset per "Resetting RPS Channels After Channel Trip" section of 1105.001.

a) Return channel bypass to normal per "Removing a RPS Channel From Manual Bypass" section of 1105.001 and continue plant operations.

NOTE If failed instrument has failed high, the output of the High Auctioneer to ICS will also be high. When Power Range Test Module is switched to Test Operate, the failed signal is removed from the High Auctioneer which will allow ICS to be returned to Auto if desired.

Notes:

Page 28 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 3. IF one power range channel has failed, THEN refer to TS 3.3.1 for guidance on bypassing or operation with an inoperable function.

A.IF desired to place affected channel in channel bypass, BOP THEN perform NI & RPS Operating Procedure (1105.001), "Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass" section. Refer to TS 3.3.1 Condition A.

B. IF the channel is bypassed, THEN the channel trip BOP module may be reset as follows:

1) Place the Power Range Test Module in TEST OPERATE.
2) For all bistables with Output State and/or Output Memory lamps on bright, perform the following:

Depress and release the Output State switch.

Depress and release the Output Memory Reset switch.

3) Ensure the Building Pressure contact buffer is reset (both Input State lamps are off).
4) Reset the applicable Channel Reactor Trip Module.

Notes:

Page 29 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

5) On all RPS Channels, verify the applicable Subsystem lamps are on dim on the following:

Channel "A" Reactor Trip module Channel "A" Cabinet Indicating Panel Channel "B" Reactor Trip module Channel "B" Cabinet Indicating Panel Channel "C" Reactor Trip module Channel "C" Cabinet Indicating Panel Channel "D" Reactor Trip module Channel "D" Cabinet Indicating Panel CRS C. Refer to TS 3.3.11 for failed NI power input to the respective EFIC channel.

N/A 4. IF two power range channels have failed, THEN place one of the affected RPS channels in a tripped condition per "Placing a channel in a tripped condition" section of 1105.001. Refer to TS 3.3.1 Condition B.

N/A 5. IF all power range channels have failed, AND no on-scale indication of neutron flux is available, THEN trip reactor and perform Reactor Trip (1202.001) in conjunction with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 30 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 6. IF three or more power range channels have failed, AND on-scale indication of neutron flux is available, THEN refer to TS 3.3.1 Conditions C and D.

N/A 7. Notify Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

BOP Reference OP-1105.001 for Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass NOTE Only one RPS Channel may be placed in Manual Bypass at a time.

BOP 10.1 Determine which RPS Channel is to be placed in Manual Bypass AND verify no other RPS Channel in Manual Bypass.

CAUTION Placing a RPS Channel in Manual Bypass will remove any non-corresponding EFIC Channel from Maintenance Bypass causing possible EFIC actuation.

BOP CRITICAL STEP 10.2 Verify no EFIC Channel in Maintenance Bypass that does NOT correspond to the RPS Channel to be placed in Manual Bypass.

Notes:

Page 31 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 10.3 Place SASS Neutron Flux selector switch (HS-509) on C03 in the X or Y position as follows:

10.3.1 Compare Plant Computer point N1I56HI to ATC N1I78HI.

A. IF Plant Computer is NOT available, THEN compare the highest of NI-5 and NI-6 to the highest of NI-7 and NI-8 on C03.

10.3.2 IF the difference between the compared values N/A is >1%,

THEN place the following stations in manual per Transferring Major ICS Control Stations to HAND or Transferring Individual Stations to Manual Control section of Integrated Control System (1105.004):

Diamond Panel Rx Demand H/A station Notes:

Page 32 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 10.3.3 IF placing RPS Channel A ATC OR B in Manual Bypass, THEN place Neutron Flux selector switch (HS-509) to the Y position.

N/A 10.3.4 IF Placing RPS Channel C OR D in Manual Bypass, THEN place Neutron Flux selector switch (HS-509) to the X position.

10.3.5 IF ICS H/A stations were placed in manual for N/A this step, THEN stations may be returned to auto per Transferring Major ICS Control Stations to Auto or Transferring Individual Stations to Automatic section of ICS Operating Procedure (1105.004).

BOP 10.4 Obtain the RPS Manual Bypass key from the Shift Manager.

Notes:

Page 33 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___NI-5 fails low resulting in RPS Channel A being declared inoperable and that channel being bypassed. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 10.5 Place key switch on the selected Rx Trip module to the bypass position (rotate key switch clockwise).

10.5.1 Check Manual Bypass lamps go on bright on the BOP following:

Rx Trip Module Indicating Panel 10.5.2 IF the channel is tripped, THEN check the following:

N/A Protective Subsystem Trip lamps on dim on the following:

Tripped RPS Cabinet Rx Trip module Tripped RPS Cabinet Indicating Panel Protective Subsystem lamps Remaining RPS Cabinets Rx Trip modules Remaining RPS Cabinets Indicating Panel Protective Subsystem lamps 10.5.3 Auxiliary Relay lamps on bright for the following:

Man. Bypass to EFIC Man. Bypass to Ann.

BOP 10.5.4 Associated EFIC channel Maintenance Bypass light is flashing.

10.5.5 Annunciator RPS CHANNEL BYPASSED (K08-D3) in alarm.

BOP ATC / BOP EXAMINER NOTE: CRS should enter T.S. 3.3.1 Condition A. Bypassing the channel meets the required action END OF NI-5 FAILURE Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Page 34 of 74

Notes:

Page 35 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___Bypass of EFIC Channel A .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The failure of NI-5 also has an impact on EFIC. The following steps are the guidance for bypassing Channel A EFIC, however these steps are not being counted on to take credit for the malfunction. Bypassing the RPS Channel was credited for measurable actions in response to the malfunction. If the crew happens to bypass EFIC first, then the RPS Channel would not be required /

counted on. Therefore proceed to the next event at the discretion of the lead examiner.

Reference 1105.005, Emergency Feedwater Initiation and Control NOTE Placing an EFIC channel in Maintenance Bypass blocks the Initiate module output from that channel to the Train A & B EFW, SG-A MSLI, and SG-B MSLI Trip modules. However, EFIC train functions are not affected by placing any EFIC channel in bypass.

21.1 Place an EFIC channel in Maintenance Bypass as follows:

21.1.1 Obtain EFIC Maintenance Bypass key from SM/CRS.

21.1.2 Enter the following Tech Spec Conditions:

Tech Spec 3.0.5 Tech Spec 3.3.11 Condition A Notes:

Page 36 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___Bypass of EFIC Channel A .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 21.1.3 Perform one of the following:

A. IF no RPS Channel is in Manual Bypass, THEN verify the Maintenance Bypass indicator light on the alarm panel in each EFIC channel is ON solid.

B. IF a RPS Channel is in Manual Bypass, THEN verify the Maintenance Bypass indicator light on the same train EFIC channel alarm panel is flashing.

NOTE If one channel of RPS is in manual bypass, only the corresponding channel of EFIC shall be bypassed.

21.1.4 Rotate EFIC Maintenance Bypass key clockwise to bypass desired channel:

A. Circle channel bypassed:

A B C D 21.1.5 Verify that the Alarm panel indicator for Maintenance Bypass is flashing for that channel.

Notes:

Page 37 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___Bypass of EFIC Channel A .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 21.1.6 Verify EFIC MAINTENANCE BYPASS (K12-F7) is in alarm.

21.1.7 Check appropriate computer point in alarm:

YS3094 for Channel A YS3098 for Channel B YS3102 for Channel C YS3106 for Channel D 21.1.8 Enter EFIC status in Station Log.

NOTE The LCOs entered above cannot cover all situations for EFIC out of service.

21.1.9 Prior to performing maintenance or further manipulations on EFIC, refer to Tech Specs for the specific situation.

EXAMINER NOTE: CRS should enter T.S. 3.3.11 Condition A. Bypassing the channel meets the required actions.

Notes:

Page 38 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

___#2 EDG Inoperable due to oil leak .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=45 BOP / CRS Reference OP-1203.012A for K01-C4 BOP / CRS 1. Dispatch Operator to local alarm panel (K1612) on C567 to determine cause of alarm.

EXAMINEER NOTE: Any time after the #2 EDG is determined to be inoperable and should not be started, the CRS may direct the BOP to place the diesel into Lockout.

The CRS should enter T.S. 3.8.1 Condition B once the diesel is determined to be inoperable.

BOP / CRS 2. Refer to Attachment C for further instructions.

CRS 3. Reference TS 3.8.1, TS 3.8.2 and TS 3.8.3 for operability requirements.

N/A 4. IF alarm caused by loss of power to C567, THEN perform the following:

A. Check breaker D21-14 closed.

IF D21-14 tripped, THEN refer to Resetting Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers of Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

B. Check fuses F12 & F13 inside C108.

BOP / CRS 5. IF DG2 inoperable, THEN verify proper MOD alignment for Service Water Pump (P-4B) and Makeup Pump (P-36B) per Makeup & Purification System Operation (1104.002)

AND Service Water and Auxiliary Cooling System (1104.029).

LOW OIL PRESS (SHUTDOWN)

CRS 1. Determine cause of alarm AND immediately initiate corrective action.

N/A 2. Any automatic or manual shutdown requires diesel to be tested to demonstrate operability.

NOTE Crankcase pressure trip is indicated by round plunger protruding from center of crankcase pressure trip device (PS-5284).

Notes:

Page 39 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

___#2 EDG Inoperable due to oil leak .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 3. Check crankcase pressure trip device (PS-5284) for trip indication BOOTH: Report back that the crankcase pressure trip device is NOT tripped.

N/A 4. IF crankcase pressure trip is indicated, THEN refer to "Resetting Crankcase Pressure Trip Mechanism" section of Emergency Diesel Generator Operation (1104.036).

N/A 5. Before engine restart is attempted, depress RESET button (PB-5241A) on C108.

CRS Reference OP-1104.036, EDG Operation 27.5 Equipment Alignment due to Diesel Generator Inoperability NOTE The following step makes it easier to recover makeup and seal injection on a loss of offsite power.

BOP 27.5.1 Whenever one EDG is inoperable for longer than one hour, the preferred alignment is as follows:

A. OP and STBY HPI pumps should be aligned to the operable EDG, if practicable.

B. SW pump (P-4B) if idle should be aligned to the operable EDG, if practicable.

27.5.2 B55/B56 shall be fed from same train as SW Pump (P-4B).

Notes:

Page 40 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

___#2 EDG Inoperable due to oil leak .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 27.5.3 Unit 2 is notified per the following:

If DG1 is inoperable with B55/B56 aligned to B5, Unit 2 shall take appropriate actions as identified in "Component/Tech Spec Cross-Reference", Attachment B (Table 3 CREVS ACTIONS) of Control Room Emergency Air Conditioning and Ventilation (2104.007).

If DG2 is inoperable, Unit 2 shall take appropriate actions as identified in "Component/Tech Spec Cross-Reference", Attachment B (Table 3 CREVS ACTIONS) of Control Room Emergency Air Conditioning and Ventilation (2104.007).

27.6 Administrative Requirements due to Diesel Generator CRS Inoperability 27.6.1 TS 3.8.1 Condition B allows a single EDG to be inoperable for a period NOT to exceed 7 days and restricts sequential EDG inoperability periods to 10 days. If either of these times are exceeded, TS 3.8.1 Condition F requires plant shutdown to Mode 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and Mode 4 within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

(The rest of this step will 27.6.2 Within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> of entering TS 3.8.1 Condition B not be for a single inoperable EDG, perform performed 1107.001 Supplement 10 and re-perform due to the upcoming once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter (SR 3.8.1.1).

events)

Notes:

Page 41 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

___#2 EDG Inoperable due to oil leak .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 27.6.3 Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> of entering TS 3.8.1 Condition B for a single inoperable EDG, declare required feature(s) supported by the inoperable EDG inoperable when the redundant required feature(s) is inoperable.

27.6.4 Within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of entering TS 3.8.1 Condition B for a single inoperable EDG, address Required Actions B.3.1 and B.3.2 per one of the following:

A. IF inoperability due to failure, THEN determine and document (per Condition Report Operability Determination) that a common cause failure does NOT exist or demonstrate the other EDG operable.

B. IF inoperability due to planned maintenance AND there is no known failure to impact the other EDG, THEN make a Station Log entry stating to the effect, EDG is inoperable due to planned maintenance, not a common cause failure. Tech Spec Required Action B.3.1 has been completed.

27.6.5 Planned EDG maintenance shall not exceed 7 days in any given month for each EDG in accordance with Emergency Diesel Generator Reliability Program (EN-DC-198).

END OF #2 EDG FAILURE Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 42 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Injection Flow Recorder Fails High ________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=55 CRS Reference ACA 1203.012G for K08-A7 NOTE If total seal injection flow drops to <22 gpm, RCP Seal Inj Block (CV-1206) auto closes.

ATC 1. Check RCP P-32A thru D Seal Injection Flow indications on C04 to determine which pump is in alarm:

N/A 2. IF there is a simultaneous loss of seal injection and seal cooling for any RCP, THEN GO TO "Simultaneous Loss of Seal Injection and Seal Cooling Flow" section of Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergencies (1203.031).

3. IF RCP SEAL COOLING FLOW LO (K08-E7) is not alarmed, THEN perform the following:

ATC A. Verify normal total flow to RCP Seals Total INJ Flow recorder on C04 and RC Pump seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207).

B. To balance flow, slowly adjust the following:

N/A P-32A Seal Supp Needle Valve (MU-28A)

P-32B Seal Supp Needle Valve (MU-28B)

P-32C Seal Supp Needle Valve (MU-28C)

P-32D Seal Supp Needle Valve (MU-28D)

Notes:

Page 43 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Injection Flow Recorder Fails High ________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Based on Step 3.A above, the ATC should verify normal flow by performing the following prudent actions for a controller that is not responding properly.

Keep in mind prudent actions are skill of the craft and may not proceed step by step as described by this exam guide, however final results will be the same.

ATC Place RC Pumps Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND and verify closed ATC Verify RCP Seal Injection Block (CV-1206) OPEN CAUTION With RCP seal bleed off temperature > 180 oF rapid establishment of seal injection, <30 minutes, will result in seal damage.

ATC IF RCP Seal Bleed off temperatures are <180 oF, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total INJ Flow is 30-40 gpm.

N/A IF RCP Seal Bleed off temperatures are >180 oF, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total INJ Flow is 8-12 gpm.

EXAMINER NOTE: Due to the failure, CV-1207 should not be placed back into automatic.

Notes:

Page 44 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Injection Flow Recorder Fails High ________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 4. IF RCP Seal Inj Block (CV-1206) has closed AND the OP HPI pump is on, THEN perform the following to restore seal injection flow:

A. Place RC Pump seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND and close.

B. Place CV-1206 pushbutton in OVRD (OVRD light on) and open CV-1206.

C. IF RCP Seal Bleedoff temperatures are <180°F, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total Inj Flow is 30 to 40 gpm and place in AUTO.

D. IF RCP Seal Bleedoff temperatures are >180°F, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total Inj Flow is 8 to 12 gpm AND maintain flow for >30 minutes.

1) WHEN >30 minutes has elapsed, THEN slowly open CV-1207 until 30 to 40 gpm total flow is reached and place in AUTO.

E. WHEN RCP Seals Total Inj Flow is above CV-1206 auto setpoint (CV-1206 FLOW light on),

THEN return CV-1206 OVRD pushbutton to NORMAL (OVRD light off).

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 45 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=60 Verify Reactor Trip Immediate Actions ATC 1. Depress Reactor Trip PB.

A. Verify all rods inserted AND reactor power dropping.

BOP 2. Depress Turbine trip PB.

A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

ATC / BOP 3. Check adequate SCM.

CRS 4. Perform the following:

Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating steps BOP BOP recognizes that the #1 EDG failed to automatically start.

CT BOP Verifies no Lockout Alarm on A3.

BOP manually starts #1 EDG within 5 minutes of LOOP EXAMINER NOTE: The Critical Task criterion allows time for assessment and restoration in accordance with RT-21.

CRS Apply floating step IF ONLY EDG power is supplying 4160V buses, THEN GO TO 1202.007, "DEGRADED POWER" procedure.

Notes:

Page 46 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Report Immediate Actions complete and transition to Degraded Power CRS 1. Perform the following:

Record time of Degraded Power: ______

Direct Control Board Operators to monitor Floating Steps.

BOP 2. Verify proper operation of both EDGs (RT-21).

BOP 2. IF only one EDG OR only the AAC Gen (2K9) is in service, THEN perform the following:

A. IF an EDG is operating, THEN verify proper operation of EDG (RT-21).

B. Verify 480V MCC B55 and 56 power supply is selected to operating DG.

C. Align SW as follows:

Close ACW Isolation (CV-3643).

Close SW Crosstie associated with operating EDG to isolate the idle SW Loop:

Close Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply associated with operating EDG:

D. Attempt to restore non-running EDG using Annunciator K01 Corrective Action (1203.012A) and Emergency Diesel Generator Operation (1104.036), while continuing with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 47 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP E. IF AAC Gen is available, THEN perform the following:

1) Energize vital bus using ES Electrical System Operation (1107.002), "Placing Alternate AC Generator on bus A3 (A4)" section, while continuing with this procedure.
2) GO TO step 3.

F. IF AAC Gen is not available, N/A THEN perform the following:

1) Verify P36B Bus Select MOD Control selected to bus with operating EDG.

a) IF P36B MOD was transferred, THEN dispatch an operator to perform Attachment 3, Makeup Pump P36B Alignment to Operating EDG, while continuing with this procedure.

2) Verify P4B Bus Select MOD Control selected to bus with operating EDG.
3) IF SG press associated with de-energized ATM Dump ISOL is > 1040 psig, THEN as time permits, dispatch an operator with a radio to hand jack associated ATM Dump CNTRL to maintain SG press 1000 to 1040 psig.

(Refer to Alternate Shutdown (1203.002), Exhibit A).

Notes:

Page 48 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 3. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open to operating EDGs:

CV-3806 CV-3807 BOP 4. Verify a Service Water pump running on each operating DG, after 15-second time delay (P4A, P4B, P4C).

ATC 5. Actuate MSLI for both SGs AND verify proper actuation and control of EFW and MSLI (RT-6):

A. Check Instrument Air Header Press 60 psig.

B. Check Instrument Air to ATM Dump CNTRL valves remains available ATC 6. Check RCS press remains 1700 psig AND PZR level remains 30".

Notes:

Page 49 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP

7. Isolate Letdown by closing either:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS):

CV-1214 CV-1216 BOP 8. Check OP and STBY HPI pumps off.

BOP 9. Place RCP Seals Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE:

SV-1270 SV-1271 SV-1272 SV-1273 Notes:

Page 50 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 10. Perform the following to isolate RCP Seal Bleedoff (Normal):

Close RCP Seal Bleedoff (Normal) Return (CV-1274)

OR Close RCP Seal Bleedoff (Normal) from P32A/B/C/D:

CV-1270 CV-1271 CV-1272 CV-1273 ATC 11. IF PZR level is 55",

THEN verify Proportional Control Pressurizer Heaters operating in AUTO.

Notes:

Page 51 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP / ATC 12. Verify the following handswitches in PULL-TO-LOCK:

A1 and A2 feeder breakers:

Bus A1 Bus A2 A-111 A-211 A-112 A-212 A-113 A-213 H1 and H2 feeder breakers:

Bus H1 Bus H2 H-13 H-23 H-14 H-24 H-15 H-25 Condensate Pumps:

- P2A

- P2B

- P2C ICW Pumps:

- P33A

- P33B

- P33C Notes:

Page 52 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE If Instrument Air press is lost, RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow valve (CV-1207) fails open and Pressurizer Level Control valve (CV-1235) fails as is.

BOP 13. Place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:

A. Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

B. Close RCS Makeup Block (CV-1233 or CV-1234).

C. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

D. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

E. Start OP or STBY HPI pump.

F. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

G. Operate HPI Block valve associated with OP HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) as necessary to maintain PZR level 55".

Notes:

Page 53 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 14. Check 30 minutes have elapsed since off-site power was lost.

A. Restore Seal Injection as follows:

ATC

1) Check Instrument Air Header Press 60 psig.
2) Place RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND AND close.
3) Place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD AND open.
4) Slowly open CV-1207 until RCP Seals Total INJ flow is 8 to 12 gpm.
5) Record current time for reference in step 85:

B. Re-establish Seal Bleedoff as follows:

BOP

1) Calculate 80% of current RCS press:

RCS press x 0.8 = 80%

_________ x 0.8 = _______

2) IF RCP Upper Cavity Seal press is 80% RCS press, THEN open associated RCP Seals Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank):

P-32A P-32B SV-1273 SV-1272 P-32C P-32D SV-1271 SV-1270 Notes:

Page 54 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 15. Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

BOP 16. Check Spent Fuel Pool cooling in service.

BOP 17. Maximize RB cooling (RT-9).

ATC 18. Check adequate SCM.

ATC 19. Check RCS T-cold 540 F.

CRS 19. IF RCS T-cold is < 540 F and dropping, THEN GO TO step 40.

CRS Floating Step that can be applied any time that it is met IF SG press 900 psig, except when SG is being allowed to boil dry AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO step 40.

NOTE This section is for correcting overcooling.

ATC 40. Check adequate SCM.

ATC 41. Control RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

ATC 42. Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

ATC 43. Check MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) alarm clear.

ATC 44. IF SG press < 1000 psig, THEN place associated ATM Dump ISOL valve in manual and close:

SG A SG B CV-2676 CV-2619 A. IF overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

Notes:

Page 55 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 45. Check RB press < 17 psia and stable.

ATC 46. Place EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply Valve from SG with lowest press in MANUAL AND close:

SG A SG B CV-2667 CV-2617 A. Check both SGs begin to repressurize.

B. GO TO step 48.

Notes:

Page 56 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Step 46 A. Perform the following:

Contingency

1) IF SG with closed EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam ATC Supply valve begins to repressurize, CT THEN perform the following:

a) Place other EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply valve (CV-2667 or CV-2617) in MANUAL AND close.

(1) IF EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply is de-energized, THEN place both EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission valves in MANUAL AND close:

CV-2613 CV-2663 b) IF both SGs begin to repressurize, THEN perform the following:

(1) IF all EFW is lost, THEN GO TO step 55.

(2) IF EFW is in service, THEN GO TO step 48.

c) IF only one SG begins to repressurize, THEN perform the following:

(1) IF all EFW is lost, THEN GO TO step 55.

(2) IF EFW is in service, THEN GO TO step 47.

2) GO TO step 47.

Notes:

Page 57 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___Loss of Offsite Power .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 47. Place EFW ISOL valves for SG with lowest press in CT MANUAL AND close (modulating valves):

SG A SG B CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626 NOTE Overcooling could continue until SG boils dry.

ATC A. Check bad SG depressurizes AND other SG begins to repressurize.

ATC

48. WHEN overcooling has been terminated, THEN operate ATM Dump Control System as necessary to prevent RCS heatup:

SG-A SG-B CV-2676 ATM Dump ISOL CV-2619 CV-2668 ATM Dump CNTRL CV-2618 A. Check EFW aligned to both SGs.

When the overcooling is terminated and the crew has control of RCS Temperature the simulator can be frozen at lead evaluator discretion. Actions for events 7 and 8 on the following pages should have been completed by this point.

Notes:

Page 58 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

___#1 EDG Fails to automatically start on LOOP .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference ACA 1203.012A, for K01-D2 EXAMINER NOTE: The following guidance is contained in COPD001, Operations Expectations and Standards, in reference to Manual Control of Automatic Systems.

5.3.1.F. IF the automatic actuation setpoint of a Safety System is exceeded and has failed to actuate, THEN manually actuating Safety Systems is the responsibility of every licensed watchstander. Although permission is NOT required to perform this function, the action should be announced to Control Room personnel.

EXAMINER NOTE: Starting the #1 EDG is a critical task and must be performed within 5 minutes of LOOP BOP Recognize failure of #1 EDG to start.

Apply guidance contained in RT-21 BOP

1. Verify running EDG(s) supplying associated ES bus(es) with proper voltage, frequency, and loading:
  • 4100 to 4200 V
  • 59.5 to 60.5 Hz
  • 2750 KW BOP 2. IF EDG(s) failed to start, THEN perform the following:

A. Notify CRS/SM of EDG status.

B. Check associated EDG alarms clear:

DG1 DG2 K01-A2 K01-A4 K01-B2 K01-B4 K01-C2 K01-C4 K01-B6 K01-B7 Notes:

Page 59 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __7__

Event

Description:

___#1 EDG Fails to automatically start on LOOP .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP C. IF associated EDG alarms clear, THEN notify CRS EDG status and intent to start EDG.

1). Attempt to start associated EDG at C10.

D. IF EDG failed to start, THEN dispatch an operator to investigate and report EDG malfunction.

END OF EVENT.

Notes:

Page 60 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __8__ Page _33 of _34_

Event

Description:

___Main Steam Safety Valve stuck open. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The Steam Generators will not repressurize, the critical task of isolating the bad steam generator is covered by the following steps.

This must be completed prior to RCS pressure reaching 1550 psig or RCS Tcold reaching 500 degrees.

43. Perform the following:

ATC A. IF associated ATM Dump Control System is available, THEN quickly reduce leaking SG press using ATM Dump Control System until:

MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) alarm clears OR 700 psig SG press is reached SG-A SG-B CV-2676 ATM Dump ISOL CV-2619 CV-2668 ATM Dump CNTRL CV-2618

1) Adjust ATM Dump Control System to stabilize CET temp.

Notes:

Page 61 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __8__ Page _33 of _34_

Event

Description:

___Main Steam Safety Valve stuck open. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC B. IF associated ATM Dump ISOL is de-energized, THEN dispatch an operator with a radio to place ATM Dump CNTRL valve on hand jack.

(Refer to Alternate Shutdown (1203.002), Exhibit A).

1) Direct dispatched operator to quickly reduce leaking SG press until 700 psig SG press is reached AND immediately adjust to maintain SG press 1000 to 1040 psig.

C. IF MSSV reseats AND overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

D. IF MSSV fails to reseat and SG press is stable 700 psig, THEN initiate actions to gag MSSV, while continuing with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 62 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __8__ Page _33 of _34_

Event

Description:

___Main Steam Safety Valve stuck open. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC E. IF MSSV fails to reseat AND overcooling is still in progress, THEN isolate bad SG and allow to boil dry by placing bad SG EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL AND closing (modulating valves):

SG-A SG-B CV-2627 CV-2620 CV-2670 CV-2626

1) IF EFW ISOL valve associated with bad SG is de-energized, THEN place associated EFW CNTRL valve in HAND AND close:

SG-A SG-B CV-2646 CV-2648 NOTE Overcooling could continue until SG boils dry.

2) IF overcooling is terminated, THEN GO TO step 48.

Notes:

Page 63 of 74

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __2__ Event No.: __8__ Page _33 of _34_

Event

Description:

___Main Steam Safety Valve stuck open. .

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC

48. WHEN overcooling has been terminated, THEN operate ATM Dump Control System as necessary to prevent RCS heatup:

SG-A SG-B CV-2676 ATM Dump ISOL CV-2619 CV-2668 ATM Dump CNTRL CV-2618 A. Check EFW aligned to both SGs.

END OF LOSS OF OFFSITE POWER AND STUCK OPEN MSSV SCENARIO CAN BE FROZEN AT THE DISCRETION OF THE LEAD EVALUATOR Notes:

Page 64 of 74

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKS ANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input from Operations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The following pages come from that document.

At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1 exam.

Page 65 of 74

CT-8 Electrical Power Alignment CT based on: Preventing degradation of the mitigative capability of the plant TBD Description If station auxiliary power is not available, initiate proper operation of emergency AC supply. In the event that no emergency AC supply is available, the perform SBO procedure and continue attempts to restore AC power.

Providing normal AC power greatly enhances the transient mitigation capability of the plant.

TBD Conditions Whenever the Vital System Status Verification section of the GEOG is in addressed.

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

(1) A112 opened before A1 is lost (2) Power restored to vital bus within 30 min of power avail.

(3) The A3 bus should be energized and EFW flow established from P7B before SCM is lost at

<30°F.

(4) Vital buses reenergized within 15 min of P-7A bearing oil leak reported by WCO (5) The #1 EDG should be started prior to loss of #2 EDG. This is to prevent entering blackout conditions and providing unnecessary challenges to the crew.

(6) A212 opened before A2 is lost (7) #2 EDG started within 10 min of LOOP (8) Both EDG started within 5 min of LOOP SES used Justification for ANO:

(1) Prevents loss of the red side switchgear enhancing the transient mitigation capability of the plant.

(2) 30 minutes provides a reasonable amount of time for the crew to reestablish power to vital AC buses after it has become available. This is critical to enhance the mitigative capability of the plant.

Page 66 of 74

(3) PSHT is the preferred method of core cooling in all circumstances. Proper EOP usage will direct the crew to restore power to the A3 bus in this situation and start P-7B. This greatly assists with the transient mitigative capability of the plant by preventing long-term solid plant operations associated with extended HPI cooling.

(4) 15 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew to evaluate and reenergize the A3 bus to restore the availability of P-7B EFW pump for PSHT.

(5) Manually starting #1 EDG is critical to assure power to vital buses since it will not auto start and SW to the other EDG is isolated.

(6) Prevents loss of the green side switchgear enhancing the transient mitigation capability of the plant.

(7) 10 minutes provides a reasonable amount of time for the crew to assess the EDG status utilizing RT-21 and to start the EDG to restore green train electrical availability to assist in the mitigative capability of the plant. #1 EDG is in service providing safety function via red train components, so there is not an overwhelming priority to start #2 EDG as quickly as possible.

(8) 5 minutes provides a reasonable amount of time for the crew to assess the EDG status utilizing RT-21 and to start both EDGs in a station blackout condition to restore the mitigative capability of the plant.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (8) above, is the acceptance criteria for starting an EDG when neither one is running following a LOOP. Without the Safety Function being met, 5 minutes is the acceptable time frame for starting the one available EDG.

Page 67 of 74

CT-17 Isolate Overcooling SG(s)

CT based on: Control SG Pressure (adjust TBVs/ADVs) to: Maintain RC Temperature constant or Maintain appropriate cooldown rate TBD Description If the overcooling SG has been identified then that SG should be isolated, otherwise both SGs should be isolated. Isolating a SG means to stop all FW flow and steam flow.

TBD Conditions Excessive 10 to 20 heat transfer occurs and mitigation requires isolation of affected SG(s)

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

Manual SG isolation or MSLI manual actuation for the X OTSG should occur prior to the RCS reaching 1550 PSIG RCS pressure or RCS Tcold reaching 500F.

SES used Justification for ANO:

MSLI will not automatically actuate for these events. 1550 psig and 500F for RCS parameters provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that MSLI did not automatically actuate and to prevent an excessive overcooling of the RCS.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria, the faulted Steam Generator must be isolated prior to the overcooling resulting in RCS pressure reaching 1550 psig and RCS Tcold reaching 500 degrees F.

Page 68 of 74

RT-21 Page 1 of 1

CHECK EDG OPERATION

1. Verify running EDG(s) supplying associated ES bus(es) with proper voltage, frequency, and loading:
  • 4100 to 4200 V
  • 59.5 to 60.5 Hz
  • 2750 KW
2. IF EDG(s) failed to start, THEN perform the following:

A. Notify CRS/SM of EDG status.

B. Check associated bus L.O. RELAY TRIP alarm clear:

DG1 DG2 K02-B6 K02-B7 C. IF associated bus lockout alarm is clear, AND either associated EDG alarms are clear or CRS/SM directs, THEN attempt to start associated EDG at C10.

D. IF EDG failed to start, THEN dispatch an operator to investigate and report EDG malfunction.

END Page 69 of 74

RT-9 Page 1 of 1 MAXIMIZE RB COOLING

1. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D

2. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815

3. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 END Page 70 of 74

RT-14 Page 1 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS NOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred:

HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100 F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50 F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control.

When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply.

PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.

1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists, THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.
2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig, THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.
3. IF PZR steam space leak exists, THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. IF SCM is adequate, THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI.

C. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdown per RT-13.

D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 71 of 74

Page 2 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. IF RCS press is high, THEN limit press using one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met:

HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open

2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

3) Throttle HPI.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D. IF PZR AUX Spray is in service, THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.

F. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdown per RT-13.

G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 72 of 74

Page 3 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. (Continued)

H. IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),

THEN perform the following:

1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C P64A P64B P64C

2) Stop desired HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C

3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

5. IF RCS press is low, THEN raise press using one or more of the following:

A. Raise makeup flow.

B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.

D. Reduce Letdown flow.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.

(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 73 of 74

Page 4 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

5. (CONTINUED)

CAUTION If HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPI cooling is no longer required.

F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

CAUTION With RCS solid, 1 F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

6. IF PZR is solid, THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature.

Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS press NOTE Adjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate and cooldown rate.

7. IF normal makeup is in service AND HPI is in service, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale.

END Page 74 of 74

Appendix D Scenario Outline Form ES-D-1 Facility: __ANO-1_________ Scenario No.: _____3_______ Op-Test No.: __2016-1_

Examiners: ___________________________ Operators: ____________________________

Initial Conditions: _35% power ._

Turnover: ____35% power, P-34A Surveillance in progress and ready for pump start __

____________Pleasant Hill Line OOS, Breakers B5122 and B5148 Open to isolate the line. ____

Event Malf. Event Event No. No. Type* Description 1 BOP N Perform P-34A LPI Pump Surveillance / pump trip 2 ATC C ERV leaking CRS TRM 3 BOP C CV-4018, Main Generator Temperature Control Valve Fails 4 BOP I Main Turbine Controlling header pressure fails high ATC 5 ATC C RCS leak requiring a down power.

CRS TS 6 All M RCS LOCA resulting in Rx trip and pressure dropping below 150 psig.

7 BOP C / CT CV-1400, LPI Isolation Valve, fails to open automatically.

8 ATC C / CT ES Channels 5 and 6 fail to actuate (RBI)

  • (N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical Task Target Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d) Actual Attributes
1. Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2/2/2/2/2
2. Abnormal events (2-4) 4/4/3/4/3
3. Major transients (1-2) 1/1/1/1/1
4. EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 2/1/2/1/1
5. EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1/1/0/1/1
6. EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2/2/2/2/2 Page 1 of 82

NARRATIVE This scenario starts with plant power at 35%. During turnover the BOP is directed to complete a Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) surveillance already in progress. After starting the Decay Heat Pump and establishing the required flowrate P-34A pump will trip. The crew will declare P-34A INOPERABLE and the CRS will enter T.S. 3.5.2 Condition A (ECCS).

Next, the Pressurizer ERV will start leaking which will require the ATC to recognize that the RCS pressure is below the ERV setpoint and close the isolation valve, the CRS will enter T.S.

3.4.2 Condition A for the RCS Vent Path. (PRA)

Next the temperature control valve for the Main Generator Hydrogen Coolers will fail, causing Hydrogen pressure and temperature to rise. The BOP will take TIC-4018 to manual and open to restore normal temperature.

Next the main turbine controlling header pressure instrument will fail resulting in the Main Turbine failing to control header pressure. The BOP will take manual control of the Main Turbine and the ATC will place the SG/Rx in hand and close the TBVs which responded to the failed high pressure transmitter. The crew will determine the good header pressure signal and select it for control. The Main Turbine, SG/Rx and TBVs will be returned to automatic.

Next, an RCS leak will begin to develop and continue to degrade. Initial response will require a downpower to take the unit off line in accordance with Excess RCS Leakage and Rapid Plant Shutdown AOPs. (PRA)

The RCS leak will degrade to the point resulting in an automatic reactor trip with RCS pressure stabilizing below 150 psig which will result in a LOSM (PRA) and a transition to the ESAS EOP.

CV-1400, (B LPI Isolation valve) will fail to open on ES Channel 4 actuation, a critical task will be for the BOP to identify the failure and manually open CV-1400 to provide the only available LPI flow. The RCS leak will also cause Reactor Building pressure to exceed the setpoint for ES Channels 5 and 6, these channels will fail to actuate and the ATC will have a critical task of manually actuating these channels in order to provide Reactor Building Isolation.

PRA / IPE explanation:

Key Operator actions include isolating the ERV when failed open and securing RCPs.

Key equipment for potential risk increase includes ERV and LPI.

Initiating events include a LOCA.

Page 2 of 82

List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 3 On At Time Action Description Event DH97 DH BWST CV-1438/1441 00:00:00 None Insert remote DH97 to 1.00000 BYPASS 00:00:00 None Insert remote SW22A to 0 SW22A A DH CLR (E35A) OTLT Insert remote DH8A to 00:00:00 None DH8A P34A DSCH TO TEST & REC 1.00000 00:00:00 None Insert remote DH10 to 1.00000 DH10 TEST & REC TO BWST ISOL ESAS CHANNEL 5 FAILS TO 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction ES263 ACTUATE ESAS CHANNEL 6 FAILS TO 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction ES264 ACTUATE Insert override DI_HS1400M 00:00:00 None MAN,LOW PRESS INJ,CV-1400 to TRUE None 1 Insert malfunction RH658 P34A PUMP MTR WDG TEMPS Insert malfunction SV1000 to None 2 ERV 0.10000 Insert malfunction CV4018 to None 3 T G 'H2 Temp Control Valve 0.05000 in 60 Insert malfunction RC003 to HOT LEG LEAK(LOOP A) 0-14.137 None 6 0.00500 in 60 SQ.FT.

Insert malfunction TR580 to A HEADER PRESSURE(PT2683)

None 5 1200.00000 in 300 {NNIX} 600-1200 PSIG Insert malfunction RC004 to HOT LEG LEAK(LOOP B) 0-14.137 None 7 0.4000 in 300 SQ.FT.

Insert remote A305OP to A305OP RACK DOWN A305 P34A None 8 DOWN LPI PUMP Insert remote B5545 to None 10 B5545 CV2419 B CFT MOV POWER CLOSED Insert remote B5661 to None 10 B5661 CV2415 A CFT MOV POWER CLOSED Insert override DI_HS2415C None 11 CLOSE,CORE FD T2A,OUT CV-2415 to TRUE Insert override DI_HS2419C None 11 CLOSE,CORE FLD TK T2B,CV-2419 to TRUE None 12 Insert remote B5545 to OPEN B5545 CV2419 B CFT MOV POWER None 12 Insert remote B5661 to OPEN B5661 CV2415 A CFT MOV POWER Page 3 of 82

Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 3 Event 1

1. 1104.004 Supplement 1 (NOP)
2. 1203.012H, ACA for K09-A7 and K09-E8
3. T.S. 3.5.2 Condition A Event 2
1. 1203.012H, ACA for K09-A1
2. 1203.015, Pressurizer Systems Failure, Section 1 (AOP)
3. TRM 3.4.2 Event 3
1. 1203.012C, ACA for K08-B6 Event 4
1. 1203.001, ICS Abnormal Operations AOP, Section 7 (AOP)
2. 1105.004, Integrated Control System (NOP)

Event 5

1. 1203.012I, ACA for K10-B2
2. 1203.039, Excess RCS Leakage (AOP)
3. 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown, Section 1 (AOP)
4. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks RT-9 (EOP)
5. T.S. 3.4.13 Event 6
1. 1202.001, Reactor Trip (EOP)
2. 1202.002, Loss of Subcooling Margin (EOP)
3. 1202.010, ESAS (EOP)
4. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks RT-5 (EOP)
5. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks RT-18 (EOP)
6. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks RT-14 (EOP)
7. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks RT-10 (EOP)

Event 7

1. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-10 (EOP)

Event 8

1. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-10 (EOP)

EOP - Emergency Operating Procedure AOP - Abnormal Operating Procedure ACA - Annunciator Corrective Actions NOP - Normal Operating Procedure Page 4 of 82

Appendix D Required Operator Actions Form ES-D-2 Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP Perform remainder of OP-1104.0014 Supplement 1 NOTE When a P-34 is started, there is a pressure spike from the P-34 discharge that is sensed in the RB Spray system. This raised pressure can become trapped behind the RB Spray Pump suction check valve. It can take several hours after the P-34 is stopped to dissipate back to static pressure.

2.23 Perform the following:

Record LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) idle suction pressure from LPI P-34A Suction Pressure (SPDS P1407) or local gauge in Table 2.

Make plant announcement for start of LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A).

NOTE Being prepared to time the stroke of CV-3840 is essential for proper data gathering.

2.24 While timing the open stroke of LPI/Decay Heat Pump Brg Clr E-50A Inlet (CV-3840) on C18, place LPI/Decay Heat Pump P-34A handswitch (HS-1417) to START.

2.24.1 Verify LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) pump start.

2.24.2 Record stroke time in Table 6.

Notes:

Page 5 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 2.25 IF BWST Suction piping exceeded 75 psig, THEN verify a Condition Report is initiated AND consult operability of CR-ANO-1-2001-0350 or Engineering to determine impact.

CAUTION Decay Heat pump minimum continuous flow is 80 gpm.

N/A 2.26 IF sections of the Decay Heat system piping were drained AND can NOT be vented, THEN slowly adjust DHR Cooler E-35A Outlet (CV-1428) to raise LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) discharge flow to 400-600 gpm.

2.26.1 Maintain 400-600 gpm for ~ 2 minutes.

2.26.2 Adjust DHR Cooler E-35A Outlet (CV-1428) to raise LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) discharge flow to 1400-1600 gpm for 2 minutes.

2.27 Adjust DHR Cooler E-35A Outlet (CV-1428) to raise LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) discharge flow to 3000-3030 gpm.

Notes:

Page 6 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 2.28 Normal flow indication verifies stroking of the following check valves:

BWST Out Check to P-34A and P-35A (BW-4A)

A DH Pump P-34A Disch Check (DH-2A) 2.28.1 Record results in Table 6.

2.29 Check LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler start indication on C19.

2.29.1 Record results in Table 2.

2.29.2 IF LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A)

OR LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1B) breaker is open, THEN N/A steps 2.30 and 2.31.

EXAMINER NOTE: Insert malfunction for P-34A at the lead examiners discretion.

If not inserted, continue on, otherwise proceed to the next event.

Notes:

Page 7 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 2.30 Place LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) handswitch on C19 to OFF AND check the following:

2.30.1 LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) stops.

2.30.2 After ~ 15 sec time delay:

LPI ROOM COOLER TROUBLE (K11-C8) alarms.

LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1B) start indication on C19.

2.30.3 Record results in Table 2.

2.31 Place LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) handswitch on C19 to AUTO.

2.31.1 Check LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) starts.

2.31.2 Check LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1B) stops.

2.31.3 Check K11-C8 clears.

2.32 Verify DHR Clr Service Water E-35A Inlet (CV-3822) open.

Notes:

Page 8 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 2.33 Record highest "A" RB Spray Pump Suction Header pressure indicated using P2426 AND/OR P2429:

___________ psig NOTE SPDS point F1401 is the SPDS point to be recorded. SPDS point F1401S (P-34A smoothed SPDS flow) can help determine when F1401 is near average for data collection in the following step.

2.34 Verify at least three minutes of stable operation.

2.35 Gather data as follows:

2.35.1 Gather necessary pump data and record measured values in the appropriate spaces provided in Table 3.

2.35.2 Commence taking vibrometer readings per data sheet of this supplement.

END OF SURVEILLANCE Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Page 9 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP Reference ACA per OP-1203.012H for K09-E8 CAUTION Maximum allowable motor bearing temperature is 190°F.

Maximum allowable pump bearing temperature is 179°F.

Maximum allowable motor winding temperature is 311°F.

1. Determine which pump is in alarm by checking Reactor Coolant and Decay Heat Pumps Bearing Temperatures recorder (TR-6500) or Reactor Coolant, Makeup and Decay Heat Pumps Motor Winding Temperatures recorder (TR-6501) on C13.
2. IF operating in non-ES mode, THEN perform the following:

A.IF transfer of DH to alternate DH Pump (P-34A or P-34B) is necessary, THEN transfer using Decay Heat Removal Operating Procedure (1104.004), "Shifting Operating Decay Heat Loops" section.

B.Shut down affected DH/LPI Pump (P-34A or P-34B).

C. Determine cause of high temperature.

Notes:

Page 10 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

3. IF operating in ES mode AND both LPI loops (A and B) are in operation, THEN shut down the affected LPI Pump (P-34A or P-34B).

A.Determine cause of high temperature.

4. Refer to TS 3.5.2.

Notes:

Page 11 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior P-34A Decay Heat Pump trips during surveillance testing BOP Reference ACA per OP-1203.012H for K09-A7 N/A 1. IF operating in normal DH mode OR operating in LPI mode, THEN GO TO Loss of Decay Heat Removal (1203.028).

CRS 2. IF operating at power AND pump tripped during pump test, THEN verify the opposite train LPI operable.

A.Enter TS 3.5.2 Condition A.

B. IF train is NOT restored to operable status within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, THEN place the plant in Mode 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and cooldown the RCS to 350 F within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

EXAMINER NOTE: CRS should enter T.S. 3.5.2 Condition A.

BOP 3. Refer to Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers section of Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

Notes:

Page 12 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 4. IF any of the following conditions exist, Both LPI pumps are inoperable (TS 3.5.2 Condition C)

The Diesel Generator in the train opposite the inoperable LPI pump is also inoperable (TS 3.5.2 Condition C and 3.8.1 Condition B)

Any condition which results in less than 100% of the ECCS flow equivalent of a single operable ECCS train available (TS 3.5.2 Condition C)

THEN within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, action shall be initiated to place the unit in an operating condition in which the applicable limiting condition for operation does not apply by placing it, as applicable, in at least Mode 3 within 7 hours8.101852e-5 days <br />0.00194 hours <br />1.157407e-5 weeks <br />2.6635e-6 months <br />, Mode 4 within 13 hours1.50463e-4 days <br />0.00361 hours <br />2.149471e-5 weeks <br />4.9465e-6 months <br />, and Mode 5 within 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br /> (TS 3.0.3).

N/A 5. IF in Mode 4 or Mode 3 with RCS 350 F, THEN refer to TS 3.5.3.

Notes:

Page 13 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low Pressure Injection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23 ____

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 6. To clear alarm, perform either of the following:

A.Place HS for affected pump in NORMAL-AFTER-STOP or PULL-TO-LOCK.

B.Close breaker for affected pump (A-305 for P-34A, N/A A-405 for P-34B).

BOP / CRS Discuss backing out of the procedure to restore system alignment as time allows.

BOP Should direct WCO to realign test and recirc header based on discussion with CRS.

END OF P-34A TRIP Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 14 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _2__

Event

Description:

_____ERV Leaking requires ERV Isolation and entry into TRM 3.4.2 __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ERV Leakage BOP Reference ACA per OP-1203.012H for K09-A1 ATC 1. Identify open relief by checking analog position indications and Hi-Alarm lights on panel C486-1.

N/A 2. IF desired, THEN place Relief Valve Audio Monitor (XI-1000) keyswitch in SILENCE ALARM for the following reasons:

Testing Drawing steam bubble SM permission CRS 3. Refer to Pressurizer Systems Failure (1203.015).

NOTE If a relief valve is open, Quench Tank (T-42) temperature should go to saturation for its pressure.

BOP 4. Monitor Quench Tank pressure, level and temperature.

NOTE Temperature elements downstream of each PSV indicate valve position. Temps are available on SPDS:

PZR PSV-1002 Outlet Temp (T1027)

PZR PSV-1001 Outlet Temp (T1026)

ERV PSV-1000 Outlet Temp (T1025)

Notes:

Page 15 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _2__

Event

Description:

_____ERV Leaking requires ERV Isolation and entry into TRM 3.4.2 __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 5. IF relief valve TEs read normal AND Quench Tank level reads normal AND Quench Tank temperature reads normal, THEN use audio monitor to listen for flow noise through valve.

A.IF alarm is due to monitor channel malfunction, THEN switch channels using Pressurizer Relief Valve Monitoring System Operation (1105.013).

N/A 6. IF XI-1000 keyswitch was placed in SILENCE ALARM, THEN when alarm clears, place keyswitch in normal-vertical.

CRS Pressurizer Systems Failure (OP-1203.015) Section 1 ATC 1. Close Pressurizer ERV Isolation Valve (CV-1000).

A. IF CRS/SM desires, THEN override CV-1000 torque switch by holding the handswitch in the desired position.

N/A 2. IF ERV leakage with CV-1000 closed exceeds capability to maintain RCS pressure, THEN trip reactor AND perform Reactor Trip (1202.001) while continuing with this procedure.

CRS 3. IF closing CV-1000 stops leak, THEN perform the following:

A. Continue power operations with ERV isolated.

B. Notify Senior Manager, Operations.

C. Log in station log and on plant status board.

Notes:

Page 16 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _2__

Event

Description:

_____ERV Leaking requires ERV Isolation and entry into TRM 3.4.2 __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 4. IF closing CV-1000 does not stop leak, THEN perform the following:

NOTE Quench Tank volume (L1051) can help determine fill rate.

Steam space leakage of 0.1 gpm will require about 11 amps more to maintain similar conditions.

N/A A. Perform "RCS Leakage Monitoring" section of RCS Leak Detection (1103.013).

B. IF total RCS leakage exceeds limit allowed by Tech Specs, THEN perform Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

1) Notify SM to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

C. IF total PZR steam space leakage is >1 gpm, THEN initiate a Condition Report and perform an operability determination within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

1) IF leakage is evaluated as unsafe, THEN commence plant shutdown per Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016) and Plant Shutdown and Cooldown (1102.010).

D. Monitor Quench Tank (T-42) pressure, level, and temperature.

1) Maintain quench tank parameters within limits described in Pressurizer Operation (1103.005).

Notes:

Page 17 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _2__

Event

Description:

_____ERV Leaking requires ERV Isolation and entry into TRM 3.4.2 __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 5. IF ERV (PSV-1000) is inoperable, OR ERV Isolation Valve (CV-1000) is inoperable, THEN perform the following:

A. Close ERV Isolation.

B. Maintain ERV vent path closed AND refer to TRM 3.4.2.

C. Place caution tag on CV-1000 handswitch stating, "Use as required by EOP and then only as a last resort".

D. Initiate a Condition Report.

CRS 6. IF CV-1000 is closed, THEN perform the following:

A. Assess risk using Risk Assessment Guidelines (COPD-24).

B. Update System Alignments in EOOS to reflect CV-1000 closed.

CRS 7. Refer to RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).

END OF ERV LEAKAGE Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 18 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference ACA 1203.012C for K04-B6.

1. Check the following to determine the point in alarm:

Generator and Coolers Gas Outlet Temperatures (TR-9001)

Plant Monitoring System Dynamic Alarm Display

2. For generator temperature alarms, perform the following as applicable:

A.IF any Gen H2 Cooler Outlet (TR-9001, points 7 thru

10) is >125 F, THEN perform the following:

IF all hydrogen coolers have high or rising temperature, AND Generator H2 Temp Control CV-4018 (TIC-4018) on C19 is NOT at setpoint, THEN place TIC-4018 in M (manual).

(1) Rotate TIC-4018 MAN ADJ knob to adjust total ACW flow to coolers as needed.

(2) Inspect Generator Hydrogen Temperature Control Valve (CV-4018) locally.

BOOTH: Delete malfunction when TIC-4018 is taken to manual to allow control from the control room.

Notes:

Page 19 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Once the BOP takes manual control of the TIC the malfunction will be removed which will allow the BOP to control temperature. The rest of the steps will not be necessary and the next event can be initiated.

Maximize ACW cooling by throttling open the following as needed:

T-G H2 Cooler E-13A ACW Outlet (ACW-20)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13A ACW Outlet (ACW-21)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13B ACW Outlet (ACW-22)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13B ACW Outlet (ACW-23)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13C ACW Outlet (ACW-24)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13C ACW Outlet (ACW-25)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13D ACW Outlet (ACW-26)

T-G H2 Cooler E-13D ACW Outlet (ACW-27)

Maximize H2 purity and pressure per Generator Hydrogen System (1106.002) Exhibit A, Main Generator Pressure And Purity Adjustments.

Coordinate with Unit 2 and LR TOC Dispatcher to reduce VARs to zero to maintain <125 F.

Reduce MWe to maintain <125 F.

Notes:

Page 20 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior B. Verify generator is operating within limits of capability curve (Power Operation 1102.004, Attachment N or Plant Computer GENCAP Diagram or PDS "Generator Capability" Diagram).

C. Check for indications of generator winding degradation:

1) By Plant Computer NOTE The plant computer obtains data from TR-9001 via a serial connection resulting in a finite delay of data from point to point. It should not be relied upon for real time assessment, but as an alternate indication.

Proceed to the next event at the lead examiner discretion.

Notes:

Page 21 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Disc Gas Stator Coil (points 1 thru 6 and 13, TR-9001) or Disc Gas Stator Coil (points 15-32, TR-9001) exceeds either:

1) max temp 160 F or,
2) max T 14 F One or more Gen End Turn Vibration readings 20 mils Gen Radio Frequency Arc Monitor (XI-9003) reading 30%

Gen H2 Condition Monitor (AI-9002) output reading 0.5

2) Check Generator Phase Current Readings on C01:

>26.3 KA or Negative phase sequence current >

5%

Notes:

Page 22 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Where: % Negative phase sequence current =

line current value which deviates most from average line current - average line current

( 100 X

)

average line current A +B +C Average line current =

3 D. IF generator winding degradation is indicated, THEN GO TO Main Generator Winding Trouble (1203.035).

Notes:

Page 23 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior E. Check for indications of generator H2 Cooler problems:

H2 Clr Out (points 7 thru 10 and 14, TR-9001 or PMS) exceeds either:

- max temp 125 F or,

- max T 3.6 F Max difference between Stator Coil Hot Gas Temp (points 1 thru 6) and H2 Cooler Out (points 7-10) does not exceed 50 F.

F. IF H2 Clr Out temperature(s) is in alarm, THEN adjust ACW cooling water flow to affected cooler(s) by adjusting individual outlet valves.

G. Raise generator hydrogen purity or hydrogen pressure or both per Generator Hydrogen System (1106.002) Exhibit A, Main Generator Pressure And Purity Adjustments.

H. IF H2 Clr Out temperature cannot be lowered below 125 F, THEN notify System Engineering to evaluate for additional actions.

Notes:

Page 24 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _3__

Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails __________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE The positioning of Exciter Air Coolers E-14A-D Return Isol (ACW-51) can result in a debris trap. Quickly opening ACW-51 up to 3 turns and then quickly returning it to the previous position can flush the debris clear and greatly improve exciter cooling.

Lake temperature should be considered when determining the amount ACW-51 is to be cycled open.

3. For exciter temperature alarms, raise ACW flow to affected cooler.

A. IF both coolers are affected, THEN perform one or both of the following:

Raise total ACW flow to coolers.

IF debris in ACW-51 is suspected, THEN quickly throttle ACW-51 open up to 3 turns and quickly return it to the previous position.

Notes:

Page 25 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high CRS Reference ICS Abnormal Operations AOP (OP-1203.001)

Section 7, Selected Turbine Header Pressure High

1. Perform the following:

BOP Verify Turbine in OPER AUTO OR TURB MAN control.

- IF Turbine in OPER AUTO, THEN perform the following:

A. While monitoring SG pressure, adjust SETTER as necessary to stabilize steam header pressure and RCS Pressure.

B. Depress GO pushbutton AND release.

C. Verify REFERENCE matches SETTER.

- IF Turbine in TURB MAN, THEN while monitoring SG pressure, operate GV pushbuttons as necessary on C01 Lower Operator Console to stabilize steam header pressure and RCS pressure.

ATC Verify SG/RX Demand H/A station in HAND.

ATC Place BOTH TURB BYP Valve H/A stations in HAND.

Notes:

Page 26 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

2. IF open, THEN while monitoring turbine load and SG ATC pressure close LOOP A and LOOP B TURBINE BYPASS VALVES.
3. Select the good Turbine Header Pressure instrument for ATC indication.

Steam Header A PT-2683 Steam Header B PT-2633 ATC 4. Lower SG/RX Demand H/A station as necessary to stabilize power < 100%.

5. Proceed as directed by CRS/SM.

EXAMINER NOTE: CRS Should direct returning ICS to automatic control. As long as progress is being made, the crew should be allowed to complete the transfer to Auto.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 27 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 9.0 Turbine Control Transfer to Integrated Control 9.1 Verify main steam header pressure is at the setpoint selected on Header Pressure Controlling substation.

9.2 Monitor Governor Valve demand and the following PMS/PDS points for stable conditions:

IC57 TVGV XFER TO SEL HDR PRES (PPAS)

EH02 GOVERNOR VLV DEMAND (PPAS)

ZT6631 GOVERNOR VLV #1 POSITION (PPAS)

ZT6662 GOVERNOR VLV #2 POSITION (PPAS)

ZT6628 GOVERNOR VLV #3 POSITION (PPAS)

ZT6661 GOVERNOR VLV #4 POSITION (PPAS)

CAUTION If Turbine Bypass Valves are open in AUTO and unit load demand rises above 15% (~135 MWe), then the valves will be rapidly closed, possibly creating a significant pressure transient.

Placing the turbine in integrated control with Unit Load Demand <15% can cause turbine oscillations if the turbine bypass valves are not fully closed. This can cause the 50 psig bias to cycle in and out.

Notes:

Page 28 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 9.3 IF Unit Load Demand is approaching 15% (~135 MWe)

AND Turbine Bypass Valves are still open, THEN operate Turbine Bypass Valves manually as follows:

9.3.1 Perform the following for H/A station(s) with open Turbine Bypass Valves:

A. Verify station display selected to POS.

B. Depress Turbine Bypass Valve H/A station HAND pushbutton.

C. Check station output remains steady.

D. Check white HAND lamp lit and red AUTO lamp off.

9.3.2 Continue startup, controlling valve(s) manually until fully closed.

NOTE With header pressure being maintained at 895 psig, MEAS VAR will read ~40% when the 50 psi bias is applied to Turbine Bypass Valves.

N/A 9.3.3 WHEN Turbine Bypass Valves are closed, AND 50 psi bias is applied, THEN return applicable Turbine Bypass Valve H/A station(s) to AUTO.

Notes:

Page 29 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE If header pressure error is >+/-50 psig, then Turbine Control will not transfer into INTEG CONTROL.

When placing the turbine in integrated control, instabilities occurred when Reference Counter was between 60% and 75%.

N/A 9.4 WHEN Turbine Bypass Valves are fully closed AND 50 psi bias is applied, THEN verify Turbine Control in OPER AUTO.

9.4.1 Closely monitor Turbine Header Pressure and PMS/PDS for indications of turbine instability.

N/A 9.5 WHEN turbine header pressure is at setpoint ( 5 psi) AND stable (rate of change <10 psi/minute), THEN transfer turbine controls as follows:

9.5.1 Depress INTEG CONTROL button on C33.

9.5.2 Check OPER AUTO and TURBINE MANUAL lamps off.

9.5.3 Check INTEG CONTROL lamp lit.

9.5.4 IF UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1) is in alarm due to turbine mode only, THEN check UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1) clear.

N/A 9.6 Verify turbine control is steady.

Notes:

Page 30 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 14.0 SG/RX Demand Transfer to Auto NOTE With SG/RX Demand in HAND and when plant efficiency changes occur (such as changes in condenser vacuum or circ water flow), changes in generated megawatts will create a difference between POS and MEAS VAR.

If MW & PRESS COMP ULD (IC01) and SG/RX H/A Station Output (IC03) are approximately equal, then a bumpless transfer should occur when SG/RX Demand is placed into AUTO.

POS reads SG/RX Demand H/A station output (hand demand, analog memory) 0-1000 MWe (IC03).

MEAS VAR reads rate-limited ULD (before calibrating integral) 0-1000 MWe (UL02).

ATC 14.1 Check that POS and MEAS VAR demands are approximately equal (normally 2% or less).

BOP 14.2 IF PDS is available, THEN check that SG/RX Demand the following are within 30 MW of each other:

MW & PRESS COMP ULD, IC01 (input)

SG/RX H/A Station Output, IC03 (output)

Notes:

Page 31 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CAUTION If POS and MEAS VAR differ significantly (>3% or >30 MW),

placing SG/RX Demand in AUTO can cause a plant transient. If deviation cannot be corrected, then an ICS auto-balancing circuit malfunction might exist.

CRITICAL STEP ATC 14.2.1 IF significant error exists, such as one of the following:

>3% between POS and MEAS VAR

>30 MW between IC01 and IC03 THEN perform one of the following:

Notify CRS/SM AND obtain permission prior to proceeding.

Place applicable H/A stations in manual and re-perform applicable sections of this procedure.

EXAMINER NOTE: If there is a significant error between position and measured variable the following step will be required otherwise the previous section would have ICS in full automatic control.

If necessary the ATC will place all major stations in hand to balance the Integrated Control System as follows.

8.0 Transferring Major ICS Control Stations to AUTO Notes:

Page 32 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CAUTION The following section has been determined to have a Reactivity Addition Potential (RAP) and this activity is classified as a Risk Level R2 (<5% power change).

ATC 8.1 Initial conditions:

Diamond Panel in Manual, if applicable RX Demand in HAND Feedwater Demand Loop A in HAND Feedwater Demand Loop B in HAND Load Ratio T-cold in HAND ULD Unit Master Station in HAND Reactivity Management Brief performed per COPD-030 with an SRO NOTE With the major stations in HAND, and the plant in a stable (balanced) condition, aligning all stations prior to returning any station to AUTO will provide a controlled, bumpless return to full automatic.

Description section 3.1 of this procedure contains Expected and normal indications when transferring H/A stations to manual.

Notes:

Page 33 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 8.2 IF MEAS VAR can NOT be aligned, THEN GO TO the appropriate section for transferring station with misaligned MEAS VAR to AUTO.

ATC 8.3 IF SG/RX Demand in AUTO, THEN perform the following:

8.3.1 Verify SG/RX Demand station display selected to POS.

8.3.2 Depress SG/RX Demand station HAND pushbutton.

8.3.3 Check SG/RX Demand station output remains steady.

BOP 8.4 Verify Turbine in INTEG CONTROL, controlling Turbine Header pressure at setpoint.

CAUTION To ensure bumpless transfer, a transfer of H/A station from HAND to AUTO is not made without first minimizing error between:

MEAS VAR and POS on controller for H/A stations other than ULD Current power and PMS CTP input for ULD Notes:

Page 34 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 8.5 Check MEAS VAR on both FW Loop Demand stations on the caret.

8.5.1 IF required, THEN drive SG/RX Demand in HAND until either limit below is met:

MEAS VARs for Feedwater Demand Loop A and Feedwater Demand Loop B are at the caret.

Indicated error is split between the two MEAS VARs.

8.5.2 IF error between the two loops differs, THEN drive Load Ratio T-cold H/A station in HAND to remove difference.

ATC 8.6 Check T-ave is at setpoint.

8.6.1 IF required, THEN perform one or both of the following:

Move rods in MANUAL.

Adjust feedwater flow to bring T-ave to setpoint.

A. Return to step 8.5.

ATC 8.7 Check RX Demand MEAS VAR on the carrot.

Notes:

Page 35 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _4__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue the downpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 8.8 Check SG/RX H/A station POS and MEAS VAR are approximately equal.

ATC 8.9 Place stations in AUTO as follows:

8.9.1 Diamond Panel, if applicable 8.9.2 RX Demand 8.9.3 Feedwater Loop Demands:

Loop A FW Loop Demand Loop B FW Loop Demand 8.9.4 Load Ratio T-cold 8.9.5 SG/RX Demand ATC 8.10 Check UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1) alarm clear.

EXAMINER NOTE: Once the crew has stabilized the plant and returned ICS to auto, ready to proceed to the next event.

Advance to next event Notes:

Page 36 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior RCS Hotleg leak BOP Reference ACA per OP-1203.012I for K10-B2 BOP 1. Check panels C486-2 and C25 (Bays l, 2, 3) to determine which process monitor is in alarm.

A.IF alarm is on RB Atmos Gaseous Monitor (RI-7461),

THEN GO TO step 13.

EXAMINER NOTE: Applicants can also determine cause of alarm using the Plant Computer and may not get into the ACA rather once they determine the alarm is from RI-7460 proceed directly to Excess RCS Leakage AOP (OP-1203.039). Refer to the Entry conditions listed on the next page, which justifies why it is acceptable to skip the ACA guidance of leak investigation per OP-1103.013.

NOTE HIGH alarm condition on RI-7461 is indicated by a red lamp and a flashing "H" on monitor display.

Alarm setpoint is adjustable at RI-7461 on C25 and is set per Radiation Monitoring System Check and Test (1305.001),

Supplement 5.

Alarm setpoint for RI-7461 can be read by repeatedly pressing the MODE key until HighAlm value is displayed.

Notes:

Page 37 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 13. IF RB Atmos Gaseous Monitor (RI-7461) radiation is high, THEN perform the following:

A. Compare counts to High Alarm setpoint by depressing MODE key until HighAlm value is displayed.

B. IF alarm is caused by instantaneous spiking, THEN depress RESET button to clear alarm AND exit this procedure.

C. IF alarm is due to rise in activity and confirmation is warranted, THEN perform the following:

IF reactor building is open for access, THEN notify RP of condition and to sample RB air.

Notify Chemistry to obtain grab sample of RB air.

D. IF alarm is confirmed, THEN perform the following:

IF RCS is > 200°F, THEN perform RCS Leak Detection (1103.013).

IF reactor building is open for access, THEN perform the following:

Assess need to perform localized evacuation of Reactor Building per Evacuation procedure (1903.030).

Notify RP of degrading RB radiological conditions.

E.Monitor RDACs.

IF rising trend is observed, THEN notify Chemistry to perform Offsite Dose Projections (1904.002).

Notify SM to review Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

Page 38 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Excess RCS Leakage AOP (OP-1203.039)

NOTE This procedure is intended for RCS leak rates which pose a threat to plant operations but do not require use of Emergency Operating Procedures. Small RCS leaks which are not an immediate threat to plant operations are addressed in RCS Leak Detection (1103.013).

N/A 1. IF HPI is required to maintain RCS inventory AND SG tube leakage is not indicated, THEN trip the reactor AND perform Reactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.

BOP 2. IF desired, THEN open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to OP HPI pump.

ATC 3. IF desired, THEN perform one of the following:

Reduce letdown flow by closing Orifice Bypass (CV-1223)

Isolate Letdown by closing either:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS):

CV-1214 CV-1216 Notes:

Page 39 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 4. IF location of leak is known, THEN perform the applicable step(s):

RB Sump Inleakage step 5 RCS Leakage into ICW System step 6 through 9 RCP Seal Degradation step 10 Makeup & Purification System Leakage step 11 Quench Tank Inleakage step 12 Primary to Secondary Leakage step 13 RCS Sample Lines step 14 BOP 5. Monitor RB parameters:

Humidity (PMS/PDS M6278, M6278RTD, M6279, M6279RTD)

RB temperature RB pressure RB Sump level A. IF leakage into RB Sump is indicated, THEN perform the following:

1) Consider performing Repetitive Tasks (1202.012),

Maximize RB Cooling (RT-9).

2) Determine RCS Leakrate (Exhibit 1).
3) GO TO step 16.

Notes:

Page 40 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP Determine RCS Leakrate per Exhibit 1 CRS 16. IF total RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by Tech Spec 3.4.13 AND poses an immediate threat to plant operations, THEN perform the following:

A. IF reactor is Critical, THEN commence plant shutdown per Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

B. IF reactor is shutdown, N/A THEN perform RCS cooldown by one of the following:

1) IF RCS is cooling down due to HPI/break flow, independent of SG cooling, THEN perform Small Break LOCA Cooldown (1203.041), while continuing with this procedure.
2) IF any RCP is running, THEN perform Forced Flow Cooldown (1203.040), while continuing with this procedure.
3) IF all RCPs are off, THEN perform Natural Circulation Cooldown (1203.013), while continuing with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 41 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Commence plant shutdown per Rapid Plant Shutdown.

Section 1, Rapid Plant Shutdown Without Small SG Tube Leak NOTE Shutdown rate shall be based on plant conditions and safety considerations. Rate may be raised or lowered at any time as plant conditions necessitate.

Recommended shutdown rates for RCS leaks inside containment with no additional complications are as follows:

- < 50 gpm -- 0.5 to 5% per minute

- 50 gpm -- 5 to 10% per minute Use of this procedure may be terminated at any point if a complete shutdown is not required.

Net Generation can be monitored using PMS point JNETGEN.

Steady state reactivity controls per ANO Reactivity Management Program (COPD-030) are not applicable.

Notes:

Page 42 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 1. Commence power reduction at 0.5 to 10% per minute.

IF power reduction is NOT due to automatic CRS runback, THEN verify ATC has been given a specific end point for the power reduction and rate of desired power change.

IF power reduction is due to automatic runback, N/A THEN verify plant stabilizes at or slightly below the runback setpoint:

- PWR > 75% and loss of 1 RCP:

- PWR > 55% and loss of 1 RCP in each loop:

- PWR > 40% and loss of 1 MFP:

- PWR > 40% and asymmetric rod:

- PWR > 40% and loss of 2 of 3 Condensate Pumps:

CRS Instruct ATC to report power level at CRS directed frequency.

IF power reduction is due to RCS leak or steam leak BOP inside RB, THEN maximize RB cooling per RT-9.

IF necessary to maintain Makeup tank level, BOP THEN open BWST T3 Outlet to operating HPI Pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408)

AND ATC minimize or isolate Letdown.

IF power reduction is due to Dispatcher request, N/A THEN as time allows, refer to Electrical System Operations (1107.001), Attachment L, Transmission Loading Relief Request.

Verify ANO2 informed of Dispatcher request.

Notes:

Page 43 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC / BOP 2. Monitor ICS and EHC subsystems for proper integrated response.

Manual control of ICS or EHC subsystems may be initiated at any time deemed appropriate by the operator.

As MFW Block Valve Closure setpoint is approached (~45% FW Loop Demand),

monitor the following ICS feedwater PDS points (as a minimum):

FW23, MFW VLV CONTROL OUT LPA FW27, MFW VLV CONTROL OUT LPB FW19, LIMITED MFW FLW ERR LPA (MFW flow error Loop A)

FW20, LIMITED MFW FLW ERR LPB (MFW flow error Loop B)

Upon closure of each MFW Block, check ICS feedwater PDS points respond as expected:

FW23 and FW 27 track together and lower with power reduction.

FW19 and FW20 remain near zero.

IF PDS points do NOT respond as expected with MFW Block closed, THEN place BOTH associated Startup and Low Load Control Valves in HAND.

Enter Tech Spec 3.7.3 Condition C (72-hour LCO)

Condition D (72-hour LCO)

Condition E (8-hour LCO)

Control Startup and Low Load Control Valves in HAND to stabilize RCS parameters.

IF desired to restore automatic control of a subsystem, THEN refer to Integrated Control System (1105.004).

IF desired to stop downpower above final ULD setpoint,THEN perform Operations of SG/RX Demand Hand/Auto Station (Exhibit 1)

Page 44 of 82

of this procedure.

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The following step allows for stopping the downpower if cause has been corrected, that is not the case so Step 3 is N/A.

N/A 3. IF plant has been stabilized with the reactor critical, THEN perform the following:

CRS 4. Secure systems as follows:

IF reducing power < 90%,

THEN secure Zinc Injection per one of the following:

Request Chemistry secure Zinc Injection per Unit 1 Reactor Coolant System (RCS) Zinc Control (1052.036).

Perform Chemical Addition (1104.003)

"Securing Zinc Injection" section.

IF reducing power below Heater Drain Pump operation, THEN as time permits, perform MSR Drain Demineralizer Operation (1106.031) "Removing MSR DI From Service" section.

NOTE Heater Drain Pumps (P8A/B) will automatically trip if the associated T-40 pressure drops below 75 psig or associated T-40 level drops below 42 inches. Plant history indicates Heater Drain Pumps can be maintained in operation down to approximately 50% power.

Stopping Heater Drain Pumps (P8A and P8B) helps reduce sodium buildup in secondary chemistry.

Notes:

Page 45 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP IF desired to trip Heater Drain Pumps (P8A and P8B)

AND power is 65%, THEN perform the following:

A. Trip Heater Drain Pumps:

P8A P8B B. Dispatch an operator to perform Annunciator K06 Corrective Action (1203.012E), Exhibits A and B Local Actions for Heater Drain Tank T-40A/T-40B Level Control on High Level Dump.

C. Verify Low Level Condenser Sprays open (HS-2907 on C02).

D. IF Polisher Bypass Valve (CS-27) is NOT closed, THEN notify Auxiliary Operators to operate CS-27 per Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016).

EXAMINER NOTE: Insert next event at lead examiner discretion during the downpower.

The downpower will continue to take the plant off line.

BOOTH: Acknowledge direction to control Heater Drain Tank levels.

Notes:

Page 46 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 5. IF main turbine will be taken off-line AND power is 50%, THEN transfer plant auxiliaries to SU1 per Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

A. IF SU1 is unavailable, N/A THEN perform the following:

EXAMINER NOTE: Step 5.A is not applicable and not included in this guide.

NOTE SU2 is available and not degraded if all the following conditions are met:

SU2 voltage 146KV with SU2 voltage regulator in service (C10 indication) or SU2 voltage 159KV with SU2 voltage regulator out of service Either Russellville East or Pleasant Hill 161KV transmission line in service SU2 load shedding enabled No Unit 2 buses powered from SU2 SU2 voltage regulator 3% reduction disabled N/A 6. IF EC-44152 (NE-0501 Source Range Fission Chamber Bypass) is installed AND desired to bypass half-trip of AMSAC, THEN place DROPS CH.1 AMSAC BYPASS SWITCH (HS-0498-1B) in Bypass.

Notes:

Page 47 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _5__

Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown __

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

7. WHEN Main Generator output 350 MW, AND main turbine will be shutdown, THEN perform the following:

ATC A. Set Lo-Load Limit at minimum.

B. Open Turbine Bypass Condenser Sprays (HS-2858 on BOP C02).

C. Verify HP Turbine Drains open (HS-6627 on C02).

BOP

8. Before lowering power below 270 MWe (30%), perform the following:

ATC A. Verify condenser vacuum > 26.5" Hg.

1) IF vacuum is < 26.5" Hg, N/A THEN perform one of the following:

Delay power reduction until vacuum can be restored.

OR Trip main turbine and perform Turbine Trip Below 43% Power (1203.018).

B. Verify CONDENSER VACUUM LO (K05-B2) alarm BOP setpoints near but below current vacuum reading using Plant Computer points Y2850 and Y2851.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 48 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Large RCS Leak ATC 1. Depress Reactor Trip PB.

A. Verify all rods inserted AND reactor power dropping.

BOP 2. Depress Turbine trip PB.

A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

ATC / BOP 3. Check adequate SCM.

BOP

3. Check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM AND perform the following:

A. IF 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN trip all RCPs:

P32A P32C P32B P32D B. IF > 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN leave currently running RCPs on.

C. Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action CRS Level Classification (1903.010).

D. Perform the following:

1) IF 4160V bus A1 or A2 is energized, N/A THEN GO TO 1202.002, "LOSS OF SUBCOOLING MARGIN" procedure.
2) IF only EDG power is supplying 4160V buses, THEN GO TO 1202.007, "DEGRADED POWER" procedure.

Page 49 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Transition to Loss Of Subcooling Margin EOP CAUTION Tripping all RCPs > 2 minutes after loss of adequate SCM could cause reactor core to become uncovered.

N/A 1. Check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM Already AND completed perform the following:

A. IF 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN trip all RCPs:

P-32A P-32C P-32B P-32D BOP B. Initiate full HPI (RT-3).

1) IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",

THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

ATC C. Verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

CRS D. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating steps.

ATC

2. IF a feed source other than MFW is available, THEN trip both MFW pumps:

A Main Feed Pump B Main Feed Pump Notes:

Page 50 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC

3. Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

ATC

4. Check RCS press 150 psig.

CRS 5. IF RCS T-cold is < 540 F and dropping AND RB and AUX Building Sump levels are stable AND SCM is adequate, THEN GO TO 1202.003, "OVERCOOLING" procedure.

ATC

6. Isolate Pressurizer Spray Line as follows:

A. Place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode in MAN AND verify Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) closed (modulating valve).

B. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

ATC 7. IF both of the following conditions exist:

HPI cooling is not in progress ERV was not opened by procedure to intentionally depressurize the RCS THEN verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

Notes:

Page 51 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 8. Check Nuclear Loop ICW process monitor alarm clear.

N/A 9. IF CET temps are superheated AND moving away from the saturation line, THEN GO TO 1202.005, "INADEQUATE CORE COOLING" procedure.

ATC

10. Check SG tube integrity (RT-18).

ATC

11. IF SCM is adequate, THEN control RCS press low within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

ATC 12. Check RCS press remains 150 psig.

CRS 12. GO TO 1202.010, "ESAS" procedure.

Notes:

Page 52 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6/7__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Transition to ESAS EOP ATC 1. Check adequate SCM.

CRS 2. Direct Control Board Operators to perform the following:

BOP Verify proper ESAS actuation (RT-10)

ATC Monitor floating steps BOP During performance of RT-10 the BOP will identify that CV-1400 has failed to open EXAMINER NOTE: Identification and correction of CV-1400 failure is a critical task that must be completed before announcing RT-10 is complete.

ATC 3. IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",

THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

N/A 4. IF ESAS actuated on high RB press alone AND a steam or feed leak is indicated, THEN perform the following:

A. IF 4160V bus A1 or A2 is energized, THEN GO TO 1202.003, "OVERCOOLING" procedure.

ATC

5. Isolate Pressurizer Spray Line as follows:

A. Place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode in MAN AND verify Pressurizer Spray valve (CV-1008) closed (modulating valve).

B. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

Notes:

Page 53 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 6. IF the following conditions exist:

HPI cooling is not in progress ERV was not opened by procedure to intentionally depressurize the RCS THEN verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

ATC 7. Check NUC ICW Monitor (RI-2236) alarm clear.

ATC 8. Check SG tube integrity (RT-18).

ATC 9. Check RCS press remains > 150 psig.

CRS 9. GO TO step 13.

NOTE Aligning Pressurizer AUX Spray to LPI system before going on sump recirc reduces personnel exposure should the lineup be required for boron precipitation mitigation at a later time. Transfer to RB Sump suction must commence when BWST level reaches 6',

even if this alignment is not complete.

Notes:

Page 54 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS

13. Dispatch an operator to perform Decay Heat Removal Operating Procedure (1104.004), "DH System Aux Spray Alignment Prior to RB Sump Recirc" section.

A. IF BWST level reaches 6' before alignment is complete, THEN notify dispatched operator to exit the Aux Bldg, regardless of alignment status, until transfer to RB sump suction is complete and radiation levels can be determined.

BOP 14. Check LPI flow meets the following criteria:

2 LPI pumps 1 LPI pump

>2800 gpm/pump >3050 gpm/pump A. Override all HPI pumps:

P36A P36B (C18)

P36B (C16)

P36C Notes:

Page 55 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior B. Perform the following to secure HPI:

1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for running HPI pumps:

P36A P36B P36C P64A P64B P64C

2) Stop running HPI pumps:

P36A P36B BOP P36C

3) Override AND close all HPI Block valves.

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

4) Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

Notes:

Page 56 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS C. Dispatch an operator to isolate CFTs as follows:

1) Remove Danger Tag, unlock AND close Core Flood Tank Outlet supply breakers:

B5661 B5545

2) Close Core Flood Tank Outlet valves:

CV-2415 CV-2419

3) Open AND lock Core Flood Tank Outlet supply breakers:

B5661 B5545 BOP D. Verify all RCPs secured.

E. Perform the following to secure EFW:

ATC

1) Place EFW pump (P7B) in PULL-TO-LOCK.
2) Place EFW pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission valves in MANUAL AND close:

CV-2613 CV-2663 Notes:

Page 57 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC F. Close Main Feedwater Isolation valves:

CV-2630 CV-2680 G. Close MSIVs:

ATC CV-2691 CV-2692 H. GO TO step 18.

CRS CAUTION Full flow from both trains of HPI, LPI, and RB Spray can reduce BWST level to 6' within 25 minutes of ESAS actuation.

Notes:

Page 58 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

18. Before BWST level reaches 6', perform the following:

BOP A. Verify RB Sump Outlets open:

CV-1414 CV-1415 CRS B. Evacuate all unnecessary personnel from Auxiliary Building in preparation for RB sump recirculation.

C. IF RB Spray has actuated, BOP THEN verify RB Spray flow throttled to maintain 1050 to 1200 gpm per train.

BOP D. Verify both Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pumps running:

P34A P34B

1) IF either Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat)

Pump is unavailable, THEN stop associated HPI pump.

P34A P34B P36A/B P36B/C Notes:

Page 59 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _6__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

____RCS LOCA results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESAS Actuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig. ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP E. IF HPI is in service, THEN verify both Decay Heat Supply to Makeup Pump Suctions open:

CV-1276 CV-1277

1) IF CV-1276 or CV-1277 fails to open, THEN stop associated HPI pump:

CV-1276 CV-1277 P36A/B P36B/C WARNING If core is significantly damaged, initiation of sump recirculation may cause high radiation in areas near HPI, LPI, and RB Spray system piping.

CAUTION Failure to throttle RB Spray before initiating sump recirc may result in inadequate pump suction press.

Full flow from both trains of HPI, LPI, and RB Spray can remove 6' of water from BWST in 5 minutes.

The next step is a time-critical action. Do not delay performance of this step for administrative reasons.

BOP 19. WHEN BWST level reaches 6',

THEN shift to RB sump suction per Attachment 1.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 60 of 82

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: _3__ Event No.: _8__ Page __ of ___

Event

Description:

___ES Channel 5 and 6 fail to actuate_________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ES Channels 5 and 6 fail to actuate EXAMINER NOTE: ES Channels 5 and 6 actuate based on Reactor Building pressure and should have actuated at 4 psig (18.7 psia).

Crew Recognize that ES Channels 5 and 6 failed to actuate.

ATC Actuate Channels 5 and 6 BOP Perform RT-10 for Channels 5 and 6 components.

EXAMINER NOTE: Manual actuation of ES Channels 5 and 6 is a critical task that must be completed prior to exceeding the setpoint for channels 7 - 10 which is Reactor Building pressure of 44.7 psia.

Freeze at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 61 of 82

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKS ANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input from Operations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The following pages come from that document.

At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1 exam.

Page 62 of 82

CT-4 Initiate LPI CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water mass TBD Description Initiate LPI anytime LPI initiation setpoints are reached.

TBD Conditions LPI initiation setpoints reached.

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

(1) P-34A LPI Pump must be started before commencing sump recirculation alignment. (The sump recirculation alignment will make P-34B not available; therefore, P-34A is required to maintain LPI safety function.)

(2) ESAS Channels 3 and 4 should be manually actuated prior to actuation of ES Channels 7-10 due to Hi-Hi RB Pressure (44 psig).

(3) At least one LPI must be manually started before RT10 is announced as being completed.

SES used Justification for ANO (1) P-34A LPI Pump must be started before commencing sump recirc alignment. (The sump recirc alignment will make P-34B not available; therefore, P-34A is required to maintain LPI safety function.)

(2) Actuation of ES Channels 3&4 prior to reaching the next ESAS actuation set point of 44psig RB pressure provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that proper safety system actuation did not occur and then to manually actuate the failed channels to ensure LPI safety function is met.

(3) The ESAS start signals to P34A/B are failed in this scenario. Starting at least one LPI pump prior to RT-10 being announced as complete provides a reasonable time for the crew to utilize proper procedure guidance to restore LPI safety function.

Page 63 of 82

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (3) is applicable. The failure of CV-1400 to open coupled with the loss of P-34A results in NO LPI being available. The action of opening CV-1400 prior to completing RT-10 is the criteria for acceptable performance.

CT-19 Maintain RB Radiation Boundary (includes SG tubes)

CT based on: Isolate possible RCS leak paths TBD Description Operate RB cooling and spray systems to maintain RB temperature and pressure within normal limits.

TBD Conditions Operation of RB isolation and cooling systems when their respective actuation setpoints are reached or RB atmosphere is being degraded due to HPI cooling.

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

(1) ES channel 3 actuated before RT-10 is reported as complete (2) ESAS should be manually actuated before Reactor Building pressure exceeds 44 PSIA (Prior to ESAS Channels 7 through 10 auto actuating).

(3) ESAS Channels 3 and 4 should be manually actuated within four minutes of ESAS Channels 1 and 2 actuating.

SES used Page 64 of 82

Justification for ANO:

(1) ES Channel 3 will fail to actuate and require operator action to ensure that the RB Radiation boundary is protected. Performing this action prior to announcement of RT-10 complete provides a reasonable time for the crew to utilize procedural guidance to determine that the channel is failed and to implement actions to correct.

(2) Actuation of ES Channels 1-6 is critical to provide the required safety functions associated with those respective channels when automatic actuation fails to occur. Performing this action prior to the next actuation setpoint of 44# provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that the safety functions are not being met and to implement actions to correct.

(3) Actuation of ES Channels 3&4 prior to reaching the next ESAS actuation set point of 44psig RB pressure provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that proper safety system actuation did not occur and then to manually actuate the failed channels to ensure Diverse Containment function is met.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (2) is applicable. The failure of ES Channels 5 & 6 to actuate must be identified and corrected prior to exceeding the next ESAS actuation setpoint of 44 psig RB Pressure, in order to meet the criteria for acceptable performance.

This provides reasonable time for the crew to determine that the safety functions are not being met and to implement actions to correct the issue.

Page 65 of 82

RT-9 MAXIMIZE RB COOLING

1. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D

2. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815

3. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 END Page 66 of 82

Page 1 of 4 RT-5 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

1. Verify EFW actuation indicated on C09:

Train A: Train B:

Bus 1 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 2 NOTE Table 1 contains EFW fill rate and level bands for various plant conditions.

2. Verify at least one EFW pump (P7A or P7B) running with flow to SG(s) through applicable EFW CNTRL valve(s).

SG A SG B CV-2645 P7A CV-2647 CV-2646 P7B CV-2648

3. IF SCM is not adequate, THEN perform the following:

A. Select Reflux Boiling setpoint for the following:

Train A Train B NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.

B. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain SG levels 370 to 410.

Page 67 of 82

Page 2 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

3. (Continued)
1) IF both SGs are available, THEN verify SG level rising and tracking EFIC setpoint until 370 to 410 is established.

a) IF EFW flow is less than adequate, THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND to maintain 340 gpm to applicable SG until level is 370 to 410.

b) IF EFW flow is excessive AND

> 340 gpm to either SG, THEN throttle EFW to applicable SG in HAND to limit SG depressurization.

Do not throttle below 340 gpm on either SG until SG level is 370 to 410.

2) IF only one SG is available, THEN feed available SG in HAND at 570 gpm until SG level is 370 to 410.
3) IF EFW is being controlled in HAND AND SG press drops below 720 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling, THEN continue feeding at required minimum rate AND perform the following:

a) Bypass MSLI by momentarily placing SG Bypass toggle switch on each EFIC cabinet Initiate module in BYPASS.

C37-3 C37-4 C37-1 C37-2 b) Place applicable EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 P7A CV-2647 CV-2646 P7B CV-2648 c) Place applicable EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL.

SG A SG B CV-2627 P7A CV-2620 CV-2670 P7B CV-2626 Page 3 of 4 Page 68 of 82

VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

4. IF SCM is adequate, THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Excessive EFW flow can result in loss of SCM due to RCS shrinkage.

NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.

Expect CETs to rise until natural circ conditions are established. If EFW flow control is in HAND, additional flow may not be necessary to prevent rising CETs until natural circ conditions are established.

A. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain applicable SG level band per Table 1.

1) IF EFW flow is less than adequate OR EFW flow is excessive, THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND as necessary to ensure the following:

Maintain sufficient EFW flow to prevent rise in CET temp.

Maintain continuous EFW flow until applicable level band is reached.

Maintain sufficient EFW flow to ensure SG level is either stable OR rising until applicable level band is reached.

5. IF all RCPs are off, THEN check primary to secondary heat transfer in progress indicated by all of the following:

T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2)

T-hot tracking CET temps T-hot/T-cold T stable or dropping

6. Monitor EMERGENCY FEEDWATER and EFIC alarms on K12.

Page 69 of 82

Page 4 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL Table 1 EFIC Automatic Level Control Setpoints Condition Level Band Automatic Fill Rate Any RCP running 20 to 40 No fill rate limit All RCPs off and Natural Circ selected 300 to 340 2 to 8/min All RCPs off and Reflux Boiling selected 370 to 410 2 to 8/min Table 2 Examples of Less Than Adequate EFW Flow Indications SG level < 20 and no EFW flow indicated All RCPs off and SG level not tracking EFIC calculated setpoint All RCPs off and EFIC level setpoint not trending toward applicable level band Examples of Excessive EFW Flow Indications SG press drops 100 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling SCM approaching minimum adequate due to EFW flow induced overcooling EFW CNTRL valve open with associated SG level > applicable setpoint level band END Page 70 of 82

RT-18 Page 1 of 1 CHECK SG TUBE INTEGRITY

1. Check the following indications:

None of the following radiation monitor indications rising OR in alarm:

- Main Condenser process monitor (RI-3632)

- Either OTSG N-16 Gross Detector:

  • RI-2691
  • RI-2692

- Either Steam Line High Range Radiation Monitor:

  • RI-2681
  • RI-2682 No report from Nuclear Chemistry that SG tube leak exists.

No rise in unidentified RCS leakage accompanied by:

- Higher than expected SG level

- Lower than expected FW flow rate END Page 71 of 82

RT-14 Page 1 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS NOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred:

HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100 F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50 F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control.

When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply.

PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.

1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists, THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.
2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig, THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.
3. IF PZR steam space leak exists, THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. IF SCM is adequate, THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI.

C. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdown per RT-13.

D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 72 of 82

Page 2 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. IF RCS press is high, THEN limit press using one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met:

HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open

2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

3) Throttle HPI.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D. IF PZR AUX Spray is in service, THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.

F. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdown per RT-13.

G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 73 of 82

Page 3 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. (Continued)

H. IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),

THEN perform the following:

1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C P64A P64B P64C

2) Stop desired HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C

3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

5. IF RCS press is low, THEN raise press using one or more of the following:

A. Raise makeup flow.

B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.

D. Reduce Letdown flow.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.

(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 74 of 82

Page 4 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

5. (CONTINUED)

CAUTION If HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPI cooling is no longer required.

F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

CAUTION With RCS solid, 1 F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

6. IF PZR is solid, THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature.

Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS press NOTE Adjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate and cooldown rate.

7. IF normal makeup is in service AND HPI is in service, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale.

END Page 75 of 82

RT-10 Page 1 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION NOTE Obtain Shift Manager/CRS permission prior to overriding ES.

1. Verify BWST T3 Outlets open:

CV-1407 CV-1408 A. IF BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) fails to open, THEN override AND stop associated HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failed valve is opened:

CV-1407 CV-1408 P34A P34B P36A/B P36C/B P35A P35B

2. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open:

CV-3806 CV-3807 Page 76 of 82

Page 2 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

3. IF any RCP is running, THEN perform the following:

A. IF ES Channel 5 or 6 has actuated, THEN perform the following:

1) IF SCM is adequate, THEN trip all running RCPs due to loss of ICW:

P32A P32C P32B P32D

2) IF SCM is not adequate, THEN check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM AND perform the following:

a) IF 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN trip all RCPs:

P32A P32C P32B P32D b) IF > 2 minutes have elapsed, THEN perform the following:

(1) Leave currently running RCPs on.

(2) IF RCS press > 150 psig, THEN notify CRS to GO TO 1202.002, LOSS OF SUBCOOLING MARGIN procedure.

(3) Restore RCP services per RT-8 while continuing.

B. IF neither ES channel 5 nor 6 has actuated, THEN dispatch an operator to perform Service Water And Auxiliary Cooling System (1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW Following ES Actuation" while continuing.

1) WHEN ICW Cooler SW Outlets and Bypasses are aligned per 1104.029, Exhibit B, THEN override AND open one Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply (CV-3811 or CV-3820).

Page 77 of 82

Page 3 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

4. Verify proper ESAS Channels tripped:

Condition Channels Actuated RCS press 1550 psig 1,2,3,4 RB press 18.7 psia 1,2,3,4,5,6 RB press 44.7 psia 7,8,9,10

5. Perform the following:

A. Verify each component properly actuated on C16 and C18, except those overridden in previous steps.

B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.

NOTE During ESAS actuation, low LPI flow is expected until RCS depressurizes below LPI pump shutoff head.

During large break LOCAs, high LPI flow can be experienced. Flow must be throttled to ensure ECCS flows are maintained within assumptions of calculations.

1. IF any of the following conditions exist:

A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4)

B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5)

A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4)

B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B5)

A RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C4)

B RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C5)

THEN use Annunciator K11 Corrective Action (1203.012J) to clear unexpected alarms.

C. IF only one train of HPI is available AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

Page 78 of 82

Page 4 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

6. On C10, perform the following:

Verify DGs operating within normal limits:

DG 1 DG 2 4100 to 4200 V 4100 to 4200 V 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 2750 KW 2750 KW Verify the following breakers open:

A3-A4 Crossties:

A-310 A-410 B5-B6 Crossties:

B-513 B-613 Unit AUX feeds to A1 and A2:

A-112 A-212 Verify the following breakers closed:

A3 Feeds to B5:

A-301 B-512 A4 Feeds to B6:

A-401 B-612

7. On C09, perform the following:

A. Check AUX Cooling Water header depressurized.

B. IF proper EFW actuation and control has not already been verified, THEN verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

Page 79 of 82

Page 5 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

8. On C19, perform the following:

A. Verify LPI (Decay Heat) Room Cooler running in each Decay Heat Room:

P34A Room P34B Room VUC1A or B VUC1C or D B. IF RB Spray has actuated, THEN verify SW to RB Spray P35A and P35B LO CLRs open:

CV-3804 CV-3805

9. IF all RCPs are off AND RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) is closed, THEN place RCP Seal Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE:

SV-1271 SV-1273 SV-1270 SV-1272

10. IF leakage into the RB is indicated, THEN verify RB cooling maximized:

A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D B. Verify RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves open:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815 C. Verify key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers unlatched:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 Page 80 of 82

Page 6 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

11. Initiate RB H2 sampling using Containment Hydrogen Control (1104.031), Exhibit A.
12. Verify each component properly actuated on C26.
13. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26:

Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814)

Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816)

Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)

14. Verify the following High Point Vents closed:

Reactor A Loop B Loop Pressurizer Vessel SV-1081 SV-1091 SV-1071 SV-1082 SV-1092 SV-1072 SV-1077 SV-1083 SV-1093 SV-1073 SV-1079 SV-1084 SV-1094 SV-1074

15. IF AUX Lube Oil pump for running HPI pump fails to stop after 20 second time delay, THEN within one hour of ESAS actuation dispatch an operator to stop AUX Lube Oil pump locally at breaker while continuing:

P64A P64B P64C B5721 B5722/B6515 B6514

16. Place running Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pump (P34A/P34B) hand switches in NORMAL-AFTER-START to enable DECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP (K09-A7) alarm:

P34A P34B

17. Monitor ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM alarms on K11.

Page 81 of 82

Page 7 of 7 VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION

18. IF any of the following components/systems are in service:

Condensate Pumps Condenser Vacuum Pumps Waterbox Vacuum Pumps Seal Oil System Control Room Chillers THEN coordinate with CRS/SM to secure components and/or systems, as time permits.

19. Coordinate with CRS/SM to re-verify component actuation with another operator.

END Page 82 of 82

Appendix D Scenario Outline Form ES-D-1 Facility: __ANO-1_________ Scenario No.: _____4_______ Op-Test No.: _2016-1_

Examiners: _________________________ Operators: _______________ .

Initial Conditions: _99.7% power, P-7B EFW Pump OOS _

Turnover: ____99.7% power, P-7B EFW Pump OOS, Group 7 rods at 96%____________

Event No. Malf. Event Event No. Type* Description 1 ATC R Dilute rods in 2%

2 BOP C CFT Pressure high CRS TS 3 ATC I B Steam Generator S/U Level Fails Low.

BOP 4 ATC C P-8A, Heater Drain Pump,Trips requiring down power to 70%

5 BOP I Turbine stops responding to down power 6 All C RCP Seal Cooler leak TS 7 All M Condensate system leak results in a loss of all MFW and Reactor trip 8 ATC I Failure of EFIC to actuate CT 9 BOP C P-7A, EFW Turbine Trip resulting in transition to Overheating CT EOP

  • (N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical Task Target Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d) Actual Attributes
1. Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2/2/2/2/2
2. Abnormal events (2-4) 4/4/3/4/3
3. Major transients (1-2) 1/1/1/1/1
4. EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 2/1/2/1/1
5. EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1/1/0/1/1
6. EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2/2/2/2/2 Page 1 of 79

NARRATIVE:

This scenario begins with plant power at 99.7% and Group 7 rods at 96%. During turnover the crew is directed to dilute and insert rods 2% (Approximately 4 ppm dilution). ICS will automatically insert rods to maintain RCS Tave at setpoint. The dilution will require a calculation performed on the plant computer and operation of the BATCH Controller to add the DI Water to the Makeup Tank.

After the dilution is started, the B CFT (Core Flood Tank) pressure will rise above the T.S. limit which will require entry into T.S. 3.5.1 Condition B. The BOP will be directed to vent the tank pressure off. The field operators will be dispatched to verify the flowpath of nitrogen to the CFT is isolated. Report from the field will reveal that the lineup was not properly secured by the previous crew.

After venting the CFT, the B Steam Generator S/U Level will fail low. The ATC will have to identify the failure, he will then place the B MFW Pump H/A Station to HAND in accordance with the ICS AOP (Abnormal Operating Procedure), the BOP will verify the other channel reading properly by performing a channel check on the plant computer and then the BOP will select the NNI-Y channel. When the good signal is selected the ATC will return the ICS station to automatic control.

After the MFW Pump control is back in automatic, a Heater Drain Pump (P-8A) will trip which requires a rapid downpower to 70% (10%/min) in accordance with the Rapid Plant Shutdown AOP. During the downpower the Main Turbine will stop responding which will require manual action by the BOP to balance the plant and continue with the downpower.

After the downpower to 70% is complete, an RCP Seal Cooler leak will develop requiring entry into T.S. 3.4.13 for RCS Leakage and performance of Excess RCS Leakage AOP. This will result in taking the unit off line.

The major event will begin, during the final downpower, with a large Condensate System leak.

A report from the field will let the crew know that it is an unrecoverable leak and will result in the loss of all Main Feedwater Pumps including the Auxiliary Feedwater Pump (P-75).

A loss of all Feedwater should cause an EFIC actuation however, EFIC will fail to actuate EFW requiring the ATC to complete the actuation (critical task). This will result in P-7A being the only source of feed since P-7B was out of service as indicated in the initial conditions. The controlling procedure at this time is the Reactor Trip EOP. (PRA)

The final event is a trip of the steam driven EFW pump P-7A. The CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP which will require a critical action of the BOP to initiate HPI Cooling. Once control is established with HPI Cooling in progress the scenario is complete. (PRA)

PRA / IPE explanation:

Key equipment for potential risk increase includes Feedwater Control System, Emergency Feedwater System, and Makeup and Purification.

Key Operator actions include initiating HPI Cooling.

Initiating events include a Loss of Feedwater.

Page 2 of 79

Page 3 of 79 List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 4 On At Time Action Description Event Insert remote A311OP to A311OP RACK DOWN A311 P7B EFW 00:00:00 None DOWN PUMP Insert remote N2_2 to 00:00:00 None N2_2 HIGH PRESS N2 SPLY 0.50000 EFIC CHANNELS A,B,D INITIATE 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction FW621 MODULE OUTPUT FAILURE Insert remote N2_5 to None 1 N2_5 T2B CFT N2 SPLY 0.50000 Insert malfunction TR575 to 0 B OTSG STARTUP LEVEL (LT2613)

None 2 in 60 {NNIX} 0-250 IN.

None 3 Insert malfunction FW086 P8A MOTOR WINDING HEATUP FREEZE ICS SIGNAL TO EHC AT None 4 Insert malfunction RX150 CURRENT VALUE Insert malfunction RC456 to LEAK IN RCP COOLER E25C 0-70 None 5 25.00000 in 180 GPM Insert malfunction FW091 to A CONDENSATE LINE LEAK 0-12000 None 6 12000.00000 in 180 GPM Insert remote TRPP7A to None 7 TRPP7A P7A TURB LOCAL TRIP TRIP delete in 10 Insert remote RESP7A to None 8 RESP7A P7A TURB TRIP RESET RESET Page 4 of 79

Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 4 Event 1

1. 1103.004, Soluble Poison Concentration Control (NOP)

Event 2

1. 1203.012I, ACA for K10-B5
2. 1104.001, Core Flood System Operating Procedure (NOP)

Event 3

1. 1203.001, Integrated Control System (AOP)
2. 1105.004, Integrated Control System (NOP)

Event 4

1. 1203.012E, ACA for K06-A8
2. 1203.0454, Rapid Plant Shutdown (AOP)

Event 5

1. 1203.012G, ACA for K07-A1 Event 6
1. 1203.012G, ACA for K08-C7
2. 1203.031, Reactor Coolant Pump & Motor Emergency (AOP)
3. 1203.039, Excess RCS Leakage (AOP)
4. 1203.0454, Rapid Plant Shutdown (AOP)

Event 7

1. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-F7
2. 1203.054, Internal Flooding (AOP)
3. 1202.001, Reactor Trip (EOP)
4. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-5 (EOP)
5. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-19 (EOP)

Event 8 and 9

1. 1202.004, Overheating (EOP)
2. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-14 (EOP)
3. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-4 (EOP)

EOP - Emergency Operating Procedure AOP - Abnormal Operating Procedure ACA - Annunciator Corrective Actions NOP - Normal Operating Procedure Page 5 of 79

Appendix D Required Operator Actions Form ES-D-2 Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 Dilution

- Manual Batch Feed_____________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference OP-1103.004 CAUTION The following section has been determined to have a Reactivity Addition Potential (RAP). This activity is classified as a Risk Level R2 if dilution >3 ppm is planned or Risk Level R3 if dilution <3 ppm is planned.

N/A brief 12.1.1 IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT been conducted conducted, prior to THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief per taking the COPD-030 with an SRO.

watch NOTE Since Letdown 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) allows all three of its flowpaths to be open to each other momentarily during stroke, some flow from Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250) can go directly to the bleed flowpath, reducing expected reactivity effects. Rods will not move in as far as expected when diluting with high boron concentrations early in core life, up to ~0.6% less inward motion can occur.

T=0 ATC 12.1.2 Dilution is required for boron concentration change during normal operation to maintain required control rod configuration.

ATC 12.1.3 Makeup and purification system in operation per Makeup & Purification System Operation (1104.002),

"System Startup" section.

Notes:

Page 6 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 Dilution

- Manual Batch Feed_____________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 12.1.4 Chemical addition system aligned per Conduct of Operations (1015.001), "System Alignment Verification" section.

N/A 12.1.5 IF manual bleed is to be initiated, THEN verify the following:

Vacuum degasifier either bypassed or in-service per Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016).

Clean liquid waste system in operation per Clean Waste System Operation (1104.020), "Initial Startup" section.

N/A 12.1.6 Sample RCS to determine boron concentration as needed.

A. IF dilution is for other than normal activities (e.g.,

significant dilution to maintain rod position following power change), THEN notify chemistry of dilution and direct chemistry to evaluate the potential affect of the shift in boron on lithium control band.

Notes:

Page 7 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 Dilution

- Manual Batch Feed_____________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE When using the BORON program, any operating conditions may be input.

"Mass of Reactor Coolant vs. Pressurizer Level", Attachment C and the BORON program automatically add 167,000 pounds to the reactor coolant mass when RCS temperature is 250.0°F, to account for the decay heat system.

BOP / ATC 12.1.7 Perform the following calculations:

A. Use "Feed Volume for Batch Boration or Dilution", Attachment A.3 OR Plant Monitoring System BORON program to determine volume of DI water needed.

B. Record volume of batch to be added on "RCS Liquid Addition Data Sheet", Attachment B.

C. Obtain an RO/SRO independent review of calculation and record on "RCS Liquid Addition Data Sheet",

Attachment B.

ATC 12.1.8 Ensure adequate storage availability exists for any waste to be generated, if applicable.

Compare volume of feed calculated in above step vs. available Clean Waste Receiver Tanks (T-12s) and any excess letdown due to heatup if applicable.

IF Clean Waste Receiver Tanks (T-12s) cannot receive required volume, THEN transfer applicable Clean Waste Receiver Tanks (T-12s) to Unit 2 per Clean Waste System Operation (1104.020).

Notes:

Page 8 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 Dilution

- Manual Batch Feed_____________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 12.1.9 IF dilution >3 ppm is planned, THEN verify reactor power 99.75%.

CAUTION Proper batching of DI water to the Makeup Tank (T-4) during high Condensate Transfer System usage can require two Condensate Transfer Pumps (P-9A, P-9B) in-service to provide adequate pressure. (CR-ANO-1-2012-1045)

BOP 12.1.10 Verify at least one Condensate Transfer Pump (P-9A, P-9B) in-service.

BOOTH: Report that P-9A is in service.

ATC 12.1.11 IF desired, THEN GO TO "Batch Controller Operation" Attachment H of this procedure and exit this section.

EXAMINER NOTE: Operation of the BATCH Controller can be performed from the step by step procedure or by following Attachment H which is a checklist of actions that can be utilized by an operator with experience setting up the BATCH Controller either way is acceptable in this case. The initial condition of Attachment H are a repeat of the previous steps and are not duplicated below ATC / BOP 2.1 Verify Batch Controller set up for required batch size and flowrate.

2.1.1 Obtain Licensed Operator verification of required batch size.

Notes:

Page 9 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 Dilution

- Manual Batch Feed_____________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 2.2 Verify both Makeup Filters in-service:

Makeup Filter (F-3A)

Makeup Filter (F-3B)

ATC 2.3 IF dilution with Manual Batch Feed, THEN perform the following:

2.3.1 Open Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251).

2.3.2 Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).

2.3.3 Start Batch Controller by depressing RUN.

2.3.4 IF desired to reduce inventory, THEN place Letdown 3-way valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

A. WHEN no longer desired to BLEED, THEN verify Letdown 3-way valve (CV-1248) in LETDOWN.

2.3.5 IF desired, THEN adjust Batch Controller Flow Control Valve (CV-1249) to regulate flow.

Notes:

Page 10 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __1__

Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 Dilution

- Manual Batch Feed_____________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior 2.3.6 WHEN batch completes OR must be stopped, THEN verify the following valves closed:

Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250)

Batch Controller Flow Control Valve (CV-1249) 2.3.7 Close Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251).

2.3.8 IF desired, THEN perform one of the following to remove extra Makeup Filter (F-3A/B) from service:

Place Makeup Filter F-3A handswitch (HS-1246) to CLOSE.

Place Makeup Filter F-3B handswitch (HS-1247) to CLOSE.

2.3.9 Update "RCS Liquid Addition Data Sheet",

Attachment B as appropriate.

2.3.10 IF reactor power was reduced 99.75%, AND dilution reactivity effects have occurred, THEN may raise power as desired.

ATC Monitor for expected reactivity effects of the dilution Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 11 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___B Core Flood Tank Pressure high resulting in a T.S. entry ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=20 Reference ACA OP-1203.012I for K10-B5 BOP 1. Determine whether CFT (T-2B) pressure is high or low from Core Flood Tank "B" (PI-2419, PI-2418) Press on C16 and C18.

NOTE TS 3.5.1 band for Core Flood Tank pressure is 600 +/- 40 psig (560 to 640 psig). Instrument uncertainties require maintaining CFT pressure within a narrower band.

CRS 2. IF pressure is outside of band 572 to 628 psig, THEN declare CFT inoperable, write a Condition Report and enter TS 3.5.1 Condition B.

BOOTH: Once the CFT pressure exceeds 630 psig, set Remote for N2-5 back to 0. This will stop the pressurization and allow for lowering pressure back to within band.

BOP 3. IF pressure is high, THEN lower pressure using Core Flood System Operating Procedure (1104.001), "Venting and Depressurizing Core Flood Tanks (CFTs)" section.

A.Do NOT allow pressure to exceed band of 572 to 628 psig.

BOP Reference OP-1104.001, Venting and Depressurizing Core Flood Tanks (CFT) section CAUTION Vented gas can be radioactive.

When RCS is >800 psig, CFT admin limits for pressure 580-620 psig must be observed to avoid violating limits of TS 3.5.1.

BOOTH: When dispatched report back that N2-5 was found partially open and N2-2 was found with N2 aligned.

Notes:

Page 12 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __2__

Event

Description:

___B Core Flood Tank Pressure high resulting in a T.S. entry ___

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE If depressurizing for refueling shutdown and performance of Supplements 2 and 3 of this procedure is required, CFT pressure of 60 to 70 psig will be needed.

N/A 14.1 IF lowering CFT T-2A pressure, THEN open Core Flood Tank T2A Vent (CV-2417) handswitch HS-2417.

14.1.1 WHEN desired pressure is reached, THEN close CV-2417 handswitch HS-2417.

BOP 14.2 IF lowering CFT T-2B pressure, THEN open Core Flood Tank T2B Vent (CV-2420) handswitch HS-2420.

14.2.1 WHEN desired pressure is reached, THEN close CV-2420 handswitch HS-2420.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 13 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump to HAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump to automatic.___________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=30 CRS Reference OP-1203.001, ICS Abnormal Operations ATC

1. Place affected MFW Pump H/A to HAND.

N/A 2. IF Main Feedwater Block Valve(s) closed, THEN place associated Startup and Low Load Control Valves in HAND.

NOTE Placing both Feedwater Loop Demand H/As in HAND will result in an ICS tracking condition which will ensure ICS follows generated megawatts potentially allowing for more stable transient recovery.

ATC 3. IF desired, THEN place the following in HAND:

Feedwater Loop A Demand H/A Feedwater Loop B Demand H/A Notes:

Page 14 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump to HAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump to automatic.___________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 4. Perform the following to stabilize RCS parameters:

IF Main Feedwater Block Valve(s) closed, THEN operate associated Startup and Low Load Control Valves in HAND.

Lower affected MFW Pump H/A as necessary N/A 5. IF in Modes 1, 2 or 3 AND Startup or Low Load Control Valve(s) placed in HAND, THEN enter associated condition per TS 3.7.3.

BOP 6. Select the good SG Startup Level instrument for indication.

STM GEN A:

LT-2664 LT-2653 STM GEN B:

LT-2613 LT-2614 Notes:

Page 15 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump to HAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump to automatic.___________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 7. Proceed as directed by CRS/SM.

CRS Direct returning MFW Pump to Automatic per OP-1105.004 18.0 Main Feedwater Pump Transfer to Auto CAUTION If reactor power ~20%, then placing MFW Pump H/A stations in AUTO could result in erratic feedwater control.

With both MFW Pumps in manual and the Feedwater Pumps Disch Crosstie (CV-2827) open, placing B MFW Pump in AUTO with a significant difference in demand signals between A and B MFW Pumps will cause a feedwater transient.

NOTE POS reads MFW pump speed demand(3000-5900 RPM). If Main FW Block Valve is closed, then MEAS VAR reads valve P (0-100 PSI). If Main FW Block Valve is open, then MEAS VAR reads flow error (50% = null).

Notes:

Page 16 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump to HAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump to automatic.___________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The guidance below assumes that the failure was noticed and the B MFW Pump was taken to hand prior to any changes in FW flow. If the crew was slow and actual FW flow changes occurred, then additional stations would have been taken to manual prior to restoring the MFW Pump to automatic.

N/A 18.1 IF in P control (Main FW Block Valve closed),

THEN transfer as follows:

18.1.1 While monitoring feedwater flow AND Startup Valve (CV-2623, CV-2673) position AND Low Load Valve (CV-2622, CV-2672) position, slowly adjust pump speed using MFW Pump H/A station until ~70 psi P is obtained.

18.1.2 IF placing B MFW Pump in AUTO AND Feedwater Pumps Disch Crosstie (CV-2827) is open, THEN verify at least one of the following conditions:

A MFW Pump is in AUTO.

A and B MFW Pump demands approximately equal A MFW Pump is tripped 18.1.3 Place MFW Pump H/A station in AUTO.

Notes:

Page 17 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __3__

Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump to HAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump to automatic.___________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 18.2 IF in flow control (Main FW Block Valve open),

THEN transfer as follows:

18.2.1 Null flow error by performing either or both of the following:

Adjust associated Feedwater Demand H/A in HAND.

Slowly adjust pump speed/auto demand using MFW Pump H/A station to null flow error.

18.2.2 Place MFW Pump H/A station in AUTO.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 18 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

__P-8A Heater Drain Pump trips requiring a down power to 70% at a rate of 10%/min.___________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=40 CRS Reference ACA OP-1203.012E for K06-A8, P8A/P8B FLOW LO ATC 1. Monitor MFWP suction pressure and feedwater flow very closely for adverse effect on feedwater flow.

2. IF either heater drain pump tripped, THEN perform the following: OTHERWISE GO TO step 3 for P-8A low flow with pump running OR GO TO step 4 for P-8B low flow with pump running.

BOP A.Verify standby Condensate Pump (one of P-2A thru P-2C) has auto started.

ATC B.Commence reducing power at rate up to 10%/minute to within the capacity of T-40 high level dump (~ 630 MW or ~70% power).

Notes:

Page 19 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

__P-8A Heater Drain Pump trips requiring a down power to 70% at a rate of 10%/min.___________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CAUTION Severe water hammer can result if Moisture Separator Drain Tank (T-40) empties.

While the manual High Level Dump Bypass (HD-19, HD-20) is open, any evolution that reduces flow to the Moisture Separator Drain Tank (T-40), e.g., turbine trip, RCP trip, power reduction, can cause the Moisture Separator Drain Tank (T-40) to drain. After a turbine trip, the Moisture Separator Drain Tank (T-40) can drain in less than 5 minutes.

While High Level Dump Bypass (HD-19 or HD-20) is open, an extra operator must be available to operate High Level Dump Bypass (HD-19 or HD-20) and each shift briefed on contingency actions.

NOTE Heater Drain Pump trip at power levels above 70% requires prompt action to open the Htr Drn Tk Hi Lvl Dump Control Valve Bypass Valve for the affected Heater Drain Pump in order to maintain Heater Drain Tank level on scale.

BOP C. IF Heater Drain Pump P-8A tripped, THEN inform Auxiliary Operator Heater Drain Pump P-8A tripped AND to perform Local Actions for Heater Drain Tank T-40A Level Control On High Level Dump Exhibit A of this procedure. (Exhibit A is located at T-40 level instrument rack R43.)

N/A D. IF Heater Drain Pump P-8B tripped, THEN inform Auxiliary Operator Heater Drain Pump P-8B tripped AND to perform Local Actions for Heater Drain Tank T-40B Level Control On High Level Dump Exhibit B of this procedure. (Exhibit B is located at T-40 level instrument rack R43.)

BOOTH: When dispatched acknowledge that T-40 level will be maintained per local exhibit.

Notes:

Page 20 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __4__

Event

Description:

__P-8A Heater Drain Pump trips requiring a down power to 70% at a rate of 10%/min.___________________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP E. Place Low Level Condenser Spray CV-2907 AND CV-2868 into service by placing HS-2907 on C02 in OPEN.

N/A F. IF necessary, THEN place E-1A/E-1B Dump Line to E-11A/E-11B Control Valves (CV-3027/CV-3024) on the handjack and throttled open as necessary to reduce drain flow to T-40s. (Requires 1.25 inch or suitable wrench for locknut.)

BOP G. Verify the following Polisher parameters are maintained per Condensate Demineralizer System Operation and Regeneration (1106.024):

Polisher P (63 psid max)

Polisher flow (1500 to 3550 gpm)

Polisher Resin Trap P (10 psid)

BOP H. WHEN practicable, THEN perform the following:

1) Refer to "Heater Drain Pump (P-8A and P-8B)

Shutdown" section of Condensate, Feedwater, and Steam System Operation (1106.016) to place the tripped Heater Drain Pump in a shutdown lineup.

2) Refer to "Power Escalation" section of Power Operation (1102.004) for guidance on operation with one Heater Drain Pump in-service.

I. Refer to Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers section of Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

EXAMINER NOTE: Once a controlled down power has been established AND before the down power is complete, initiate failure on the Main Turbine.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Page 21 of 79

Notes:

Page 22 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __5__

Event

Description:

__Turbine EHC stops responding during down power. ___________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=45 CRS Reference ACA 1203.012F for K07-A1 OR ATC/BOP 1. Determine cause of tracking.

85%

Power BOP 2. IF Unit Master in track is a result an ICS failure OR an ICS input signal failure, THEN take manual control of affected ICS station(s)

AND return plant to steady-state condition.

A.Refer to ICS Abnormal Operation (1203.001).

BOP 3. IF caused by EHC in manual, THEN perform the following:

A.Verify that NSSS stabilizes.

B.Operate EHC system OR ICS in manual until problem has been corrected.

EXAMINER NOTE: The rest of the procedure is N/A. In fact the crew may not reference the ACA since the only action to take is to operate the Turbine in manual to stabilize the plant OR they could catch the failure before the alarm comes in. The crew may choose to also take the SG/RX station to HAND. IF so, the ATC will control the rate of the down power and the BOP will maintain header pressure within the given band. The following step assumes the turbine is in Operator Auto at a selected rate of change and is leading the down power.

INFORMATION: There are three modes of operation on the Main Turbine. ICS Auto which is the normal automatic control for the turbine. Operator Auto which requires the BOP to manually change the SETTER and then select GO after which the turbine REFERENCE will change at the rate selected to the SETTER value. Turbine Manual which gives the BOP direct control of the Throttle Valves.

ATC / BOP Continue down power with the Turbine in manual control (Operator Auto) to <70% power.

EXAMINER NOTE: Once power is reduced to <70% the next event can be initiated. This will conclude both of the previous two malfunctions.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 23 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=50 RCP Seal Cooler Leak CRS Reference ACA OP-1203.012G for K08-C7 BOP 1. At C13, check bleedoff temperature from each RCP on RCP P-32A thru D Seals recorders, to determine which pump is in alarm.

CRS 2. IF RCP SEAL COOLING FLOW LO (K08-E7) is alarmed, THEN GO TO K08-E7.

CRS 3. Refer to "Seal Degradation" section of Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergencies (1203.031).

CREW 4. Determine cause of problem.

CRS Reference OP-1203.031, Seal Degradation Section BOP 1. Verify the following valves are open:

RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) Return (CV-1274)

RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32D (CV-1270)

RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32C (CV-1271)

RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32B (CV-1272)

RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32A (CV-1273)

A. IF RCP seal bleed off was inadvertently isolated on a running RCP, THEN immediately restore seal bleed off.

1) Verify seal parameters return to normal.

Notes:

Page 24 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CAUTION Loss of seal injection to an idle RCP will result in RCP seal bleed off temperature >180°F within a few minutes.

ATC 2. Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) open.

A. Verify RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) maintaining 32 to 40 gpm.

B. Verify individual seal injection flow rates 8 to 10 gpm.

C. IF one RCP seal injection flow is abnormally high (RCS leak into seal cooler is indicated),

THEN GO TO Excess RCS Leakage (1203.039).

D. IF seal injection is lost to an idle RCP, THEN seal bleed off should be isolated by performing Exhibit A of this procedure.

CRS Reference OP-1203.039 EXAMINER NOTE: Crew may proceed directly to OP-1203.039 when they have identified the RCP Seal Cooler leak based on Seal Injection flowrates.

N/A 1. IF HPI is required to maintain RCS inventory AND SG tube leakage is not indicated, THEN trip the reactor AND perform Reactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 25 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 2. IF desired, THEN open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to OP HPI pump.

ATC 3. IF desired, THEN perform one of the following:

Reduce letdown flow by closing Orifice Bypass (CV-1223)

Isolate Letdown by closing either:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS):

CV-1214 CV-1216 CRS 4. IF location of leak is known, THEN perform the applicable step(s):

RB Sump Inleakage step 5 RCS Leakage into ICW System step 6 through 9 RCP Seal Degradation step 10 Makeup & Purification System Leakage step 11 Quench Tank Inleakage step 12 Primary to Secondary Leakage step 13 RCS Sample Lines step 14 Notes:

Page 26 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CREW 6. Check any of the following for indications of RCS leakage into ICW system:

Nuclear Loop ICW activity rising Indication of Letdown Cooler RCS leak into ICW:

- Letdown Cooler ICW Outlet temp rising on PMS:

8P ICW trend T2214 for E29A T2215 for E29B Indication of RCP Seal Cooler RCS leak into ICW:

- RCP Seal Temp rising

- RCP Seal Bleedoff Temp rising

- Skewed RCP Seal Injection Flows NOTE ICW Surge Tank T-37B Level (PDIS 2229) 0.5 to 2.7 psid (1 psid =

333 gallons)

CRS / BOP A. Dispatch an operator to determine Nuclear Loop ICW Surge Tank (T37B) level trend.

BOOTH: Report rate of change in T-37B EXAMINER NOTE: Step 7 is N/A, proceed to Step 8.

Notes:

Page 27 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 8. IF RCP Seal Cooler RCS to ICW leak is indicated OR RCS leak into Letdown Cooler can not be isolated, THEN perform the following:

NOTE Minimum seal injection flow for each RCP is 2.5 gpm.

ATC A. IF seal injection is available, THEN verify 2.5 gpm seal injection flow per RCP.

B. IF seal injection is not available N/A AND RCP(s) are operating, THEN perform the following:

1) IF the Reactor is critical, THEN trip the reactor AND perform Reactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.
2) Actuate EFW AND verify proper actuation and control (RT-5).
3) Trip running RCPs.
4) Perform "RCP Seal Bleedoff Isolation", Exhibit A of Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency (1203.031) for ALL RCPs.

C. Place RCP Seal Cooling pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

ATC P-114A P-114B BOP D. Verify Letdown isolated.

Notes:

Page 28 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE After ICW to and from the RB is isolated, RCS leakage into the RCP Seal Cooler will be relieved through the RCP Seal Cooler relief valve and will eventually reach the RB Sump.

BOP E. Close Nuclear ICW RB Inlet (CV-2233).

F. Close both Nuclear ICW RB Outlets:

BOP CV-2214 CV-2215 NOTE If RCS leakage into the RCP Seal is greater than the seal injection flowrate then it is expected that RCP seals will heat up rapidly on the affected Reactor Coolant Pump.

Notes:

Page 29 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP G. Monitor RCP Seal temperatures to ensure adequate cooling from seal injection.

1) IF required for adequate RCP seal cooling, THEN perform the following:

a) Verify RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207) in HAND.

b) Raise seal injection flow.

H. Notify Radiation Protection to implement Unit 1 Off-CRS Normal Operations (1601.307) for primary to ICW leak.

CRS I. Close ICW Surge Tank Crossconnect Isol (ICW-165).

N/A J. IF RCP Seal temperatures rise indicating inadequate seal cooling due to RCS leakage greater than seal injection flow, THEN perform step 9 for inadequate seal cooling.

K. IF Nuc ICW Feed and Bleed in progress, N/A THEN as time allows, secure Feed and Bleed per ICW System Operating Procedure (1104.028).

CRS L. GO TO step 15.

BOOTH: Acknowledge and report that ICW-165 is closed Notes:

Page 30 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Step 9 is only applicable if RCP Seal temperatures rise indicating inadequate seal cooling otherwise the CRS will proceed to Step 15 N/A 9. IF RCP seals temperatures rise indicating inadequate seal cooling due to RCS leakage greater than seal injection flow, THEN perform the following:

NOTE Flux/ Flux/Flow 2 pump reactor trip setpoint is 52%. With high imbalance, e.g. 20%, refer to COLR Figure 8-C.

High power/pumps reactor trip setpoints are:

One pump per loop 55%

Zero pumps in one loop 0%

Tripping 1 RCP with reactor power > 92% could result in reactor trip on high power/imbalance/flow.

Notes:

Page 31 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A A. IF tripping the affected RCP(s) will result in automatic reactor trip, THEN perform the following:

1) Trip reactor.
2) Trip affected RCP(s).
3) Perform Reactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.

B. IF tripping the affected RCP(s) will not cause an automatic reactor trip, THEN perform the following:

1) Trip affected RCP(s).
2) Verify proper ICS response.
3) IF only one RCP is in operation per loop, THEN refer to Tech Spec 3.4.4.

NOTE Reverse rotation is indicated by the following:

Computer alarm based on reverse lube oil flow RCP high vibration RCP motor bearing high temperature Notes:

Page 32 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP C. IF RCP was stopped, THEN monitor affected RCP for reverse rotation using any of the following:

Associated RCS loop flow indicates lower than expected Plant computer reverse rotation alarm on idle RCP (not applicable for P-32B)

- RCP P32-A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

- RCP P32-C REVERSE ROTATION (FS6512)

- RCP P32-D REVERSE ROTATION (FS6513)

Loss of zero speed indication on idle RCP (Indicated by portable instrumentation)

D. IF RCP reverse rotation is indicated, N/A THEN GO TO Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency (1203.031), "RCP Reverse Rotation" section.

CAUTION Closing the seal bleed off path on a running RCP will cause seal damage due to overheating.

NOTE Closing the seal bleed off valves after the RCP is tripped limits the heatup rate of the seal.

Notes:

Page 33 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP E. For any RCP tripped due to inadequate seal cooling, perform "RCP Seal Bleedoff Isolation", Exhibit A of Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency (1203.031) for applicable RCP.

N/A 10. Check RCP seals for proper staging.

A. IF seal degradation OR seal failure is indicated, THEN GO TO Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency (1203.031) procedure.

NOTE Recommended shutdown rates for RCS leaks inside containment with no additional complications are as follows:

< 50 gpm -- 0.5 to 5% per minute 50 gpm -- 5 to 10% per minute ATC / BOP 15. IF not previously determined, THEN determine RCS Leakrate (Exhibit 1).

Notes:

Page 34 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 16. IF total RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by Tech Spec 3.4.13 AND poses an immediate threat to plant operations, THEN perform the following:

ATC A. IF reactor is Critical, THEN commence plant shutdown per Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

B. IF reactor is shutdown, N/A THEN perform RCS cooldown by one of the following:

1) IF RCS is cooling down due to HPI/break flow, independent of SG cooling, THEN perform Small Break LOCA Cooldown (1203.041), while continuing with this procedure.
2) IF any RCP is running, THEN perform Forced Flow Cooldown (1203.040),

while continuing with this procedure.

3) IF all RCPs are off, THEN perform Natural Circulation Cooldown (1203.013), while continuing with this procedure.

EXAMINER NOTE: Once T.S. 3.4.13 is entered all intended aspects of this event are complete.

N/A 17. IF total RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by Tech Spec 3.4.13 AND poses no immediate threat to plant operations, THEN perform the following:

A. Bring reactor to cold shutdown per Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016) and Plant Shutdown and Cooldown (1102.010).

Notes:

Page 35 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __6__

Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE Non-isolable RCS to ICW leaks should be considered pressure boundary leakage.

After ICW to and from the RB is isolated, RCS leakage into the RCP Seal Cooler will be relieved through the RCP Seal Cooler relief valve and will eventually reach the RB Sump.

CRS 18. Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

N/A 19. IF leakage is within Tech Spec 3.4.13 limits, THEN continue with efforts to locate and isolate the leak using RCS Leak Detection (1103.013) and proceed as directed by Senior Manager, Operations.

N/A 20. IF leak is isolated, THEN proceed as directed by Senior Manager, Operations.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 36 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=70 CREW Reference ACA 1203.012D for K05-F7 NOTE Main Turbine L.O. Conditioner (M-207) equipment drains are routed to the T-27 tank room floor drain system which drain to the NE (#3) oil sump.

The drain line from the T-27 tank room to the NE (#3) oil sump leaks into the surrounding soil. Consequently, Turbine Lube Oil Tank T-27 Rm Floor Drn (FYD-138) is throttled open 1/2 turn (should not be closed), in order to allow oil to drain freely into the NE oil sump and not remain standing in the drain line. Maintaining only 1/2 turn open allows the sump pump to keep up with any drain flow.

CRS 1. IF caused by flooding, THEN GO TO Internal Flooding (1203.054).

EXAMINER NOTE: The next page starts the guidance from 1203.054. Either the current path OR 1203.054 will complete the necessary actions, anticipate the CRS going to 1203.054.

N/A 2. Dump sump using Turbine Building Draining System (1104.044), "Turbine Building Oil Sump Dump" section.

N/A 3. IF oil leakage, THEN secure source of leak.

CRS 4. IF condensate leak is suspected, THEN GO TO Annunciator K06 Corrective Action (1203.012E) and perform actions for Hotwell Level Low (K06-F7).

Notes:

Page 37 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1203.054, Internal Flooding CREW 1. Determine leaking system:

A. IF indications of Aux Building flooding exist, THEN perform Attachment 5 in conjunction with this procedure.

B. IF indications of Diesel Fuel Vault flooding exist, THEN perform Attachment 6 in conjunction with this procedure.

C. GO TO appropriate step for leaking system:

Circ Water step 2 Condensate/Feedwater step 3 Service Water step 4 Fire Water step 5 Other source step 6 N/A 3. IF Hotwell level is stable, THEN perform the following:

3. GO TO Attachment 2.

Notes:

Page 38 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference Attachment 2

1. IF hotwell level is low AND level can NOT be recovered, THEN perform the following:

A. Manually trip the reactor and perform Reactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.

B. Manually actuate EFW.

C. Trip both Main Feed Pumps:

A Main Feed Pump B Main Feed Pump D. Place Condensate Pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK:

P2A P2B P2C E. Perform RT-5.

F. GO TO step 6.

Notes:

Page 39 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Returned to Step 6 of 1203.054. However EOP takes precedence and these would be considered follow-up actions after the plant is stabilized.

6. WHEN leak source is known, THEN perform the following:

A. Isolate leak with local isolations.

1) Verify appropriate configuration control for local isolation valves.

B. De-energize wetted electrical components.

C. Utilize available sump pumps to dewater the area.

D. IF leakage occurred in Controlled Access, THEN perform the following:

Request assistance from Radiation Protection.

Verify RBS/DH Room Drain Isols (ABS-13 and ABS-14) closed, except only one valve may be open at a time to drain vault.

Verify DH Vault Doors dogged shut.

E. Refer to applicable TS/TRM for isolated portion of applicable system.

Notes:

Page 40 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

7. Notify Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).
8. Inspect flood-affected areas for impact to equipment.

EXAMINER NOTE: Proceed to page 42 for Reactor Trip actions.

Notes:

Page 41 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 5. Note in station log which sump was at high level.

CRS Reference ACA 1203.012E for K06-F7 EXAMINER NOTE: Once the field operator is asked to investigate the cause of the alarm, he will report back that there is a large Condensate System leak in the bowling alley near the polishers. This report will que the crew to trip the reactor.

N/A 1. IF hotwell level high, THEN perform the following:

NOTE Cond E-11A Hotwell Level Lo (LS-2872) actuation prevents start of Condensate Pumps.

2. IF hotwell level low, THEN perform the following:

BOP A.Verify Condensate Makeup (CV-2873) open.

N/A B.IF valve does NOT open automatically, THEN check Makeup Valve from CST CV-2873 breaker (B2255) status.

C. IF breaker thermal overload is tripped, THEN refer to Reclosing Tripped Individual Load Supply Breakers section of Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

1) Reset thermal overload and open CV-2873.

D. IF CV-2873 still does NOT function, THEN open CV-2873 manually (Location:

B MFP Recirc Mezzanine).

E. WHEN level rises to ~51%,

THEN verify CV-2873 closed.

Notes:

Page 42 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE Condensate Pumps (P-2A thru C) need 17' submergence at full vacuum for NPSH at 8400 gpm. The pump suction up to the bottom of the Condenser hotwell provides 22' submergence.

3. IF hotwell level is low AND can NOT be recovered, THEN perform the following prior to the hotwell going empty:

CREW A.Verify the reactor tripped, initiate EFW and perform Reactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing here.

ATC B.IF any Main Feedwater Pump or the Aux Feed Pump is running, THEN verify EFW initiated AND trip the running feedwater pump(s).

C. Trip all running Condensate Pumps BOP (P-2A thru C).

EXAMINER NOTE: EFIC is defeated and will not automatically actuate. It is a Critical Task that the ATC manually actuates EFW. P-7A will be the only available EFW Pump since P-7B was initially OOS.

CRS Reference EOP 1202.001, Reactor Trip ATC 1. Depress Reactor Trip PB.

A. Verify all rods inserted AND reactor power dropping.

BOP

2. Depress Turbine trip PB.

A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

ATC / BOP

3. Check adequate SCM.

Notes:

Page 43 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss of suction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 4. Perform the following:

Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating steps ATC 5. Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) demand adjusted to zero.

BOP 6. Open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operating HPI pump.

ATC 7. IF Emergency Boration is not in progress, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint to 100".

ATC 8. Control RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

BOP 9. Check for proper electrical response (RT-19).

EXAMINER NOTE: RT-19 guidance is located at the end of this exam guide.

ATC 10. Check OP HPI pump supplying normal Makeup and Seal Injection.

EXAMINER NOTE: After EFW is actuated, continue in Reactor Trip until you are satisfied with the crews performance, and then proceed to the next event.

Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Notes:

Page 44 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=75 CRS Reference Overheating EOP CREW Entry Conditions RCS temp rising above either:

580 F T-hot with any RCP on OR 610 F CET temp with all RCPs off, following a Reactor trip Loss of all feedwater (MFW and EFW) following a Reactor trip ATC / CRS 1. IF any of the following criteria is met before overheating is corrected:

ERV opens in AUTO RCS press 2450 psig RCS press approaches NDTT Limit (Figure 3)

Overheating causes SCM to become inadequate THEN GO TO step 5.

Notes:

Page 45 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior

2. Perform the following:

ATC Verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

Direct Control Board Operators to monitor Floating CRS Steps.

N/A 3. IF EFW cannot be placed in service, THEN perform the following:

A. IF Main or Aux Feedwater Pump is available, THEN refill SG using RT-16.

1) GO TO step 5.

B. Restore EFW using Annunciator K12 Corrective Action (1203.012K), while continuing with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 46 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A C. Place EFW CNTRL valves in HAND AND close:

SG A SG B CV-2645 CV-2647 CV-2646 CV-2648 D. Place EFW Pump P7B in PULL-TO-LOCK.

E. Verify EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission Valves in MANUAL AND closed:

CV-2613 CV-2663 BOP 4. Reduce running RCPs to one per loop.

A. IF SG Tube-to-Shell T reaches 60 F (tubes hotter)

AND SCM is adequate, THEN trip running RCP(s).

1) Do not restart an RCP until SG Tube-to-Shell T is 50 F (tubes hotter).

Notes:

Page 47 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 5. IF overheating has been corrected, THEN GO TO 1202.001, "REACTOR TRIP" procedure.

EXAMINER NOTE: Overheating is not corrected.

5. IF any of the following criteria is met:

ATC ERV opens RCS press 2450 psig RCS press approaches NDTT Limit (Figure 3)

Secondary feed not expected to become available Overheating causes SCM to become inadequate THEN while continuing attempts to restore secondary feed, perform the following:

A. Initiate HPI cooling (RT-4).

BOP

1) Record time full HPI flow initiated for reference in step 11: ____________

Notes:

Page 48 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A B. IF no HPI pumps are available, THEN perform the following:

1) IF SCM is adequate THEN trip the running RCP.
2) Perform the following to manually cycle ERV, while continuing with this procedure:

a) IF SCM is not adequate, THEN perform the following:

(1) Open ERV until RCS press 1650 psig.

(2) WHEN RCS press 1650 psig, THEN return ERV to AUTO.

(3) Repeat this step as necessary to maintain RCS press < 2400 psig.

Notes:

Page 49 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A b) IF SCM is adequate, THEN perform the following:

(1) Open ERV.

(2) WHEN SCM approaches minimum adequate, THEN return ERV to AUTO.

(3) Repeat this step as necessary to maintain RCS press < 2400 psig.

3) IF ERV fails open, THEN close Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).
4) Continue efforts to restore feedwater AND GO TO step 19.

Notes:

Page 50 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A C. IF ERV cannot be opened, THEN perform the following:

1) IF necessary to prevent violating NDTT Limit of Figure 3, THEN throttle HPI as below.

OTHERWISE allow PZR Code Safeties to lift.

a) IF OP or STBY HPI pump is in service, THEN open HPI RECIRC Blocks:

CV-1300 CV-1301 b) IF ES HPI pump is the only HPI pump running OR HPI pump recirc flow path to Makeup Tank is unavailable, THEN maintain HPI pump flow 90 gpm.

c) Throttle HPI Blocks as necessary:

CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285 Notes:

Page 51 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior D. IF SG Tube-to-Shell T reaches 60 F (tubes hotter)

AND SCM is adequate, THEN trip the running RCP(s).

1) Do not restart an RCP until SG Tube-to-Shell T is 50 F (tubes hotter).

E. Continue efforts to restore feedwater AND continue with this procedure.

ATC 6. Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

ATC 7. Check adequate SCM.

ATC 8. IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",

THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

ATC 9. Check Letdown in service.

ATC 10. Control RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

ATC 11. Check CET temps stable or dropping.

Notes:

Page 52 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The following step describe the BOP actions for RT-4. Once HPI cooling is in service, the scenario is complete at the discretion of the lead examiner.

CET temperatures should be stabilized with the BOP actions in RT-4. RT-4 is a critical task.

BOP Initiate HPI Cooling per RT-4 ATC 1. IF RCP Seal Injection is in service, THEN place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD. OTHERWISE verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

BOP 2. Open both BWST T3 Outlets:

CV-1407 CV-1408 ATC 3. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) open.

BOP 4. IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running, THEN perform the following:

A. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285 Notes:

Page 53 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 5. Prevent dead heading HPI pumps by verifying one of the following:

Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301 OR Open HPI Block valve(s) as follows:

Fully open one HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off, THEN fully open one HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

BOP 6. Place ES HPI pump in service as follows:

A. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

B. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN start ES HPI pump.

C. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

D. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A P36C .

CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285 E. IF ERV opens in auto, THEN perform step 11 while continuing.

Notes:

Page 54 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 7. IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off, THEN place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:

A. IF HPI Pump (P36B) will be used, THEN verify the following selected to energized bus:

P36B/P64B Bus Select MOD Control P64B Transfer Switch B. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

C. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN start OP or STBY HPI pump.

D. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

E. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285 N/A 8. IF no HPI pumps are available, THEN notify CRS to perform Contingency Actions for no HPI pumps available AND GO TO step 12.

BOP 9. Close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).

Notes:

Page 55 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 10. IF only one train of HPI is available AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

ATC 11. Perform the following to manually cycle ERV AND continue with this procedure:

A. Open ERV.

B. WHEN either of the following criteria is met, THEN place ERV in AUTO:

RCS press drops to 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM approaches minimum adequate CAUTION Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) is left open until HPI cooling is no longer required to maximize HPI cooling flow.

Notes:

Page 56 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 1) IF ERV fails open, THEN do not close Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

C. WHEN RCS press reaches 2400 psig OR approaches NDTT Limit on Figure 3, THEN repeat step 11 until ERV can remain open with the following criteria met:

RCS press > 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM adequate D. IF ERV is closed AND CET temp rise causes adequate SCM to be lost, without a drop in RCS press, THEN open ERV AND leave open to maximize cooling.

ATC 12. Turn off all Pressurizer Heaters.

BOP 13. Trip all but one RCP.

Notes:

Page 57 of 79

Op-Test No.: _2016-1 Scenario No.: __4__ Event No.: __8__

Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition to the Overheating EOP.___________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 14. Maximize RB cooling as follows:

A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D B. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815 C. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 BOP 15. Isolate possible RB leak paths as follows:

A. IF RB Sump draining is in progress, THEN close RB Sump to AUX Sump valves:

CV-4400 CV-4446 B. On C25, depress STOP for RB Leak Detector RX-7460 Sample Pump Control (PB-7462).

C. On C26, close RB Leak Detector Isolations (SV-7454 and SV-7456) by placing HS-7454 in CLOSE BOTH.

FREEZE AT THE DISCRETION OF THE LEAD EVALUATOR Notes:

Page 58 of 79

Page 59 of 79 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKS ANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input from Operations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The following pages come from that document.

At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1 exam.

Page 60 of 79

CT-10 Establish FW Flow and Feed SG(s)

CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water mass CT based on: Mitigate inadequate and maintain adequate heat flow from core to heat sinks TBD Description Feed available SG(s) using primary or alternate pumps and control SG level at LOSM setpoint.

TBD Conditions Anytime SCM is lost PSHT is lost; SCM may or may not exist. FW flow control must be controlled to maintain/initiate PSHT.

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

(1) EFW should be restored to establish PSHT prior to loss of adequate SCM at <30°F due to CET temperature rise.

(2) EFW should be manually started within five minutes of tripping the reactor.

(3) Bus 1 and Bus 2 EFW pushbuttons on Train A and Train B Remote Matrices depressed within five minutes of tripping A and B Main Feedwater Pumps.

(4) EFW should be manually started to establish the preferred method of core cooling (PSHT).

This should be accomplished within five minutes of the LOOP.

(5) Manually actuate EFW before A OTSG level indicates 6 inches (dry).

(6) Prompt identification of the loss of NNI power should be accomplished with 5 minutes of receipt of the loss of NNI Power. To assure the RCS is being cooled using the EFW.

SES used Page 61 of 79

Justification for ANO:

(1) In both of these scenarios, all feedwater sources have been lost and the capability to restore EFW is subsequently restored to the crew. The criterion to establish feedwater flow from the restored source before SCM is lost provides reasonable time for the crew to reestablish PSHT before core safety is challenged.

(2)(3)(4) In these scenarios, Reactor Trip Immediate Actions are occurring at the same time feedwater sources are lost, 5 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that the safety function has not been met and to initiate appropriate actions to restore the safety function.

(5) Manually actuating EFW before the A OTSG indicates dry keeps the OTSG available as a heat removal source once the MSIV has been closed to isolate the overcooling. If the SG is allowed to boil dry, it will require a lengthy restoration of level to return it to available status.

(6) The 5 minute criterion is consistent with (2), (3), and (4) above. Identification of the loss of NNI power allows for the crew to transition to appropriate procedural guidance and to assure RCS cooling is accomplished using EFW.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (5) above, is the acceptance criteria for initiating EFW. Acceptable performance is to initiate EFW prior to the Steam Generator going dry as indicated by a steady level of 6 inches.

Page 62 of 79

CT-14 Initiate HPI Cooling CT based on: Mitigate inadequate and maintain adequate heat flow from core to heat sinks TBD Description Maintain adequate core cooling when 10 to 20 heat transfer is not adequate or will be intentionally terminated.

TBD Conditions Mitigating a Loss of Heat Transfer when there is no feedwater or SCM is lost Mitigating Excessive Heat Transfer and SGTR and 10 to 20 heat transfer is intentionally terminated LOSM when 10 to 20 heat transfer is not adequate and SCM has not been restored Associated GEOG Bases:

Page 63 of 79

ANO Version(s)

At least one HPI pump operating at full flow (its four HPI nozzles full open) and the ERV cycled open within 20 minutes of P-7A EFW pump tripping.

SES used Justification for ANO:

The 20 minutes for this criterion is from the basis document analysis that shows that initiation from at least one HPI pump within 20 minutes of the loss of feedwater, in conjunction with only Pzr safety valves lifting, was sufficient to cool the core.

Page 64 of 79

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam, the criterion above is the acceptance criteria for initiating HPI Cooling. Acceptable performance is to initiate HPI Cooling within 20 minutes of the loss of all Feedwater and Emergency Feedwater. This time begins when P-7A trips.

Page 65 of 79

RT-5 Page 1 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

1. Verify EFW actuation indicated on C09:

Train A: Train B:

Bus 1 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 2 NOTE Table 1 contains EFW fill rate and level bands for various plant conditions.

2. Verify at least one EFW pump (P7A or P7B) running with flow to SG(s) through applicable EFW CNTRL valve(s).

SG A SG B CV-2645 P7A CV-2647 CV-2646 P7B CV-2648

3. IF SCM is not adequate, THEN perform the following:

A. Select Reflux Boiling setpoint for the following:

Train A Train B NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.

B. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain SG levels 370 to 410.

(3. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 66 of 79

Page 2 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

3. (Continued)
1) IF both SGs are available, THEN verify SG level rising and tracking EFIC setpoint until 370 to 410 is established.

a) IF EFW flow is less than adequate, THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND to maintain 340 gpm to applicable SG until level is 370 to 410.

b) IF EFW flow is excessive AND

> 340 gpm to either SG, THEN throttle EFW to applicable SG in HAND to limit SG depressurization.

Do not throttle below 340 gpm on either SG until SG level is 370 to 410.

2) IF only one SG is available, THEN feed available SG in HAND at 570 gpm until SG level is 370 to 410.
3) IF EFW is being controlled in HAND AND SG press drops below 720 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling, THEN continue feeding at required minimum rate AND perform the following:

a) Bypass MSLI by momentarily placing SG Bypass toggle switch on each EFIC cabinet Initiate module in BYPASS.

C37-3 C37-4 C37-1 C37-2 b) Place applicable EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG B CV-2645 P7A CV-2647 CV-2646 P7B CV-2648 c) Place applicable EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL.

SG A SG B CV-2627 P7A CV-2620 CV-2670 P7B CV-2626 Page 67 of 79

Page 3 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL

4. IF SCM is adequate, THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Excessive EFW flow can result in loss of SCM due to RCS shrinkage.

NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.

Expect CETs to rise until natural circ conditions are established. If EFW flow control is in HAND, additional flow may not be necessary to prevent rising CETs until natural circ conditions are established.

A. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain applicable SG level band per Table 1.

1) IF EFW flow is less than adequate OR EFW flow is excessive, THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND as necessary to ensure the following:

Maintain sufficient EFW flow to prevent rise in CET temp.

Maintain continuous EFW flow until applicable level band is reached.

Maintain sufficient EFW flow to ensure SG level is either stable OR rising until applicable level band is reached.

5. IF all RCPs are off, THEN check primary to secondary heat transfer in progress indicated by all of the following:

T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2)

T-hot tracking CET temps T-hot/T-cold T stable or dropping

6. Monitor EMERGENCY FEEDWATER and EFIC alarms on K12.

Page 68 of 79

Page 4 of 4 VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL Table 1 EFIC Automatic Level Control Setpoints Condition Level Band Automatic Fill Rate Any RCP running 20 to 40 No fill rate limit All RCPs off and Natural Circ selected 300 to 340 2 to 8/min All RCPs off and Reflux Boiling selected 370 to 410 2 to 8/min Table 2 Examples of Less Than Adequate EFW Flow Indications SG level < 20 and no EFW flow indicated All RCPs off and SG level not tracking EFIC calculated setpoint All RCPs off and EFIC level setpoint not trending toward applicable level band Examples of Excessive EFW Flow Indications SG press drops 100 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling SCM approaching minimum adequate due to EFW flow induced overcooling EFW CNTRL valve open with associated SG level > applicable setpoint level band END Page 69 of 79

RT-14 Page 1 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS NOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred:

HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100 F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50 F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control.

When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply.

PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.

1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists, THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.
2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig, THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.
3. IF PZR steam space leak exists, THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. IF SCM is adequate, THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI.

C. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdown per RT-13.

D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 70 of 79

Page 2 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. IF RCS press is high, THEN limit press using one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met:

HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open

2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

3) Throttle HPI.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D. IF PZR AUX Spray is in service, THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.

F. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdown per RT-13.

G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 71 of 79

Page 3 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. (Continued)

H. IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),

THEN perform the following:

1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C P64A P64B P64C

2) Stop desired HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C

3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

5. IF RCS press is low, THEN raise press using one or more of the following:

A. Raise makeup flow.

B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.

D. Reduce Letdown flow.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.

(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 72 of 79

Page 4 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

5. (CONTINUED)

CAUTION If HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPI cooling is no longer required.

F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

CAUTION With RCS solid, 1 F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

6. IF PZR is solid, THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature.

Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS press NOTE Adjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate and cooldown rate.

7. IF normal makeup is in service AND HPI is in service, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale.

END Page 73 of 79

RT-19 Page 1 of 2 CHECK PROPER ELECTRICAL RESPONSE

1. Check 125 V DC Bus D01 energized:

Turbine Trip Solenoid Power Available light lit Breaker position indications available on left side of C10 A. IF 125 V DC Bus D01 is de-energized, THEN inform CRS to perform Loss of D01 section of Loss of 125 V DC (1203.036) in conjunction with Reactor Trip procedure, while continuing.

2. Check Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers open.

5114 5118 Exciter Field breaker A. IF Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers are closed, THEN perform the following:

1) IF 125 V DC Bus D01 is energized, THEN perform the following:

a) Inform the CRS.

b) Manually trip Main Generator breakers:

5114 5118 c) Manually trip Exciter Field breaker.

2) IF 125 V DC Bus D01 is de-energized, THEN leave Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers closed.

Page 74 of 79

Page 2 of 2 CHECK PROPER ELECTRICAL RESPONSE

3. Check DGs off:

DG1 DG2 A. IF DG is running, THEN perform the following:

Verify associated SERV WTR to DG CLRs open:

DG1 DG2 CV-3806 CV-3807 Inform CRS that DG is running

4. Check vital 4160 V buses energized:

A3 A4 A. IF either 4160 V bus A3 or A4 is de-energized, THEN inform CRS.

5. Check non-vital 4160 V buses energized:

A1 A2 A. IF either 4160 V bus A1 or A2 is de-energized, THEN inform CRS.

END Page 75 of 79

RT-4 Page 1 of 4 INITIATE HPI COOLING

1. IF RCP Seal Injection is in service, THEN place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD.

OTHERWISE verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

2. Open both BWST T3 Outlets:

CV-1407 CV-1408

3. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) open.
4. IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running, THEN perform the following:

A. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

5. Prevent dead heading HPI pumps by verifying one of the following:

Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301 OR Open HPI Block valve(s) as follows:

Fully open one HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off, THEN fully open one HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

Page 76 of 79

Page 2 of 4 INITIATE HPI COOLING

6. Place ES HPI pump in service as follows:

A. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

B. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN start ES HPI pump.

C. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

D. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A P36C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285 E. IF ERV opens in auto, THEN perform step 11 while continuing.

7. IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off, THEN place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:

A. IF HPI Pump (P36B) will be used, THEN verify the following selected to energized bus:

P36B/P64B Bus Select MOD Control P64B Transfer Switch B. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

C. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN start OP or STBY HPI pump.

D. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

E. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285 Page 77 of 79

Page 3 of 4 INITIATE HPI COOLING

8. IF no HPI pumps are available, THEN notify CRS to perform Contingency Actions for no HPI pumps available AND GO TO step 12.
9. Close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).
10. IF only one train of HPI is available AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.
11. Perform the following to manually cycle ERV AND continue with this procedure:

A. Open ERV.

B. WHEN either of the following criteria is met, THEN place ERV in AUTO:

RCS press drops to 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM approaches minimum adequate CAUTION Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) is left open until HPI cooling is no longer required to maximize HPI cooling flow.

1) IF ERV fails open, THEN do not close Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

C. WHEN RCS press reaches 2400 psig OR approaches NDTT Limit on Figure 3, THEN repeat step 11 until ERV can remain open with the following criteria met:

RCS press > 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM adequate D. IF ERV is closed AND CET temp rise causes adequate SCM to be lost, without a drop in RCS press, THEN open ERV AND leave open to maximize cooling.

Page 78 of 79

Page 4 of 4 INITIATE HPI COOLING

12. Turn off all Pressurizer Heaters.
13. Trip all but one RCP.
14. Maximize RB cooling as follows:

A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D B. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815 C. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413

15. Isolate possible RB leak paths as follows:

A. IF RB Sump draining is in progress, THEN close RB Sump to AUX Sump valves:

CV-4400 CV-4446 B. On C25, depress STOP for RB Leak Detector RX-7460 Sample Pump Control (PB-7462).

C. On C26, close RB Leak Detector Isolations (SV-7454 and SV-7456) by placing HS-7454 in CLOSE BOTH.

END Page 79 of 79

Appendix D Scenario Outline Form ES-D-1 Facility: __ANO-1_________ Scenario No.: _____5_______ Op-Test No.: __2016-1_

Examiners: ___________________________ Operators: ____________________________

Initial Conditions: _60% power, ICS runback defeated, EH Oil Pump auto start defeated _

Turnover: ____60% Power, Complete #2 EDG Surveillance _______________________________

_____________P-28A - A MFWP Emergency Lube Oil Pump OOS.________________________

Event Malf. Event Event No. No. Type* Description 1 BOP N Unload and secure #2 EDG 2 ATC C Dropped rod in Group 6 CRS TS 3 ATC I ICS signal to A MFW Pump fails low 4 BOP C EH Oil Pump trips with failure of the standby pump to auto start 5 BOP I Gland Steam Pressure Controller fails closed 6 All C / TS SG Tube Leak requiring shutdown 7 All M / CT SG Tube Rupture 8 ATC C / CT 2 Stuck Rods post trip 9 ATC C / CT TBVs close due to loss of vacuum interlock

  • (N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical Task Target Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d) Actual Attributes
1. Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2/2/2/2/2
2. Abnormal events (2-4) 4/4/3/4/3
3. Major transients (1-2) 1/1/1/1/1
4. EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 2/2/2/2/1
5. EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1/1/0/1/1
6. EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2/2/2/2/2 Page 1 of 66

NARRATIVE This scenario starts with plant power at 60%. During turnover the BOP will be directed complete the #2 EDG Surveillance. This will require him to unload and secure the diesel generator.

Following the completion of the surveillance, a rod will drop in (Group 6 Rod 3) which should result in a plant runback to 40% but the automatic runback fails which will require the ATC to manually lower power to 40% using the SG/RX station.

After power is reduced to 40%, the ICS signal to the A MFW Pump will fail low which will lower Feedwater flow to the A SG. The ATC will trip the A MFW Pump and verify flow to both s.

Next, the running EH Oil Pump will trip with a failure of the standby pump to automatically start.

The BOP will be able to manually start the standby EH Oil Pump from the control room to prevent a turbine trip.

Next, the Gland Sealing Steam Pressure Controller will fail closed resulting in lowering condenser vacuum. The BOP will throttle open the pressure regulator bypass valve to regain sealing steam to the main turbine.

Then a small tube leak will develop in excess of the T.S. limit requiring a plant shutdown. The major event will be an escalation of the tube leak to a Tube Rupture.

Post trip there will be two stuck rods which will require emergency boration, commencing /

performing an emergency boration is a critical task for the ATC. The second critical task is to commence a cooldown and depressurization. Initially the TBVs will be utilized for the cooldown.

The cooldown is a critical task since lowering the dp between the RCS and the secondary side of the will reduce the tube leak rate. Once the cooldown is in progress Condenser Vacuum will degrade to the point where the Turbine Bypass Valves (TBVs) are interlocked closed, this will require a transition to the Atmospheric Dump Valves (ADVs) in order to continue the cooldown.

The scenario will complete once the cooldown is re-established on the ADVs.

PRA / IPE explanation:

(OE) ANO has had a MFWP Control Signal fail without a pump trip.

(OE) Industry events include Tube leak / rupture.

Page 2 of 66

List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 5 On At Time Action Description Event 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction RD351 STUCK ROD GROUP 3 ROD 1 00:00:00 None Insert malfunction RD355 STUCK ROD GROUP 4 ROD 7 Insert remote CO_P28A to CO_P28A A MAIN FEEDWATER 00:00:00 None OFF PUMP K2A EMERGENCY OIL P28A Insert override DO_PB6704G 00:00:00 None GRN LP,OIL PP,TEST START,P28A to Off None 4 Insert malfunction MS140 GLAND SEAL FAILURE DROP ROD GROUP 6 ROD 3 140-0 None 1 Insert malfunction RD294 to 0 INCHES Insert remote ICSRBD to ICSRBD DISABLE ICS RUNBACK None 1 DISABLE SIGNALS Insert malfunction RX598 to 0 A MFW SPEED DEMAND TO None 2 in 10 LOVEJOY Insert remote CO_P14B to CO_P14B MAIN TURBINE EH FLUID None 3 OFF PUMP Insert override None 3 STOP,EH OIL PUMPS P14A,HS-9201 DI_HS9201STOP to TRUE Insert malfunction RC001 to OTSG A TUBE RUPTURE 0-40 None 5 0.00500 in 300 TUBES Insert malfunction RC001 to OTSG A TUBE RUPTURE 0-40 None 6 0.30000 in 300 TUBES Insert malfunction MC088 to CONDENSER VACUUM LEAK 0-6000 None 7 6000.00000 in 480 SCFM Delete override None 8 STOP,EH OIL PUMPS P14A,HS-9201 DI_HS9201STOP to TRUE None None Run Event File P14A START Page 3 of 66

Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 5 Event 1

1. 1104.036, Emergency Diesel Generator Operation, Supplement 2 (NOP)

Event 2

1. 1203.012F, ACA for K07-B3
2. 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action, Section 2 (AOP)
3. 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown (AOP)
4. T.S. 3.1.4 Event 3
1. 1203.027, Loss of Feed (AOP)

Event 4

1. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-C3 & K05-B7 Event 5
1. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-B4 through C4
2. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-B2
3. 1203.016, Loss of Condenser Vacuum (AOP)
4. 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown (AOP)

Event 6

1. 1203.012F, ACA for K07-A5
2. 1203.023, Small Tube Leak, Section 1 SG-A Tube Leak (AOP)
3. 1203.014, Control of Secondary System Contamination (AOP)
4. T.S. 3.4.13
5. T.S. 3.7.5 Event 7
1. 1202.006, Tube Rupture (EOP)
2. 1107.001, Electrical System Operations (NOP)
3. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-12 (EOP)
4. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-14 (EOP)
5. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-2 (EOP)

Event 8

1. 1202.006, Tube Rupture (EOP)
2. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-12 (EOP)

Event 9

1. 1202.006, Tube Rupture (EOP)

EOP - Emergency Operating Procedure AOP - Abnormal Operating Procedure ACA - Annunciator Corrective Actions NOP - Normal Operating Procedure Page 4 of 66

Appendix D Required Operator Actions Form ES-D-2 Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _1___

Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 starting at Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior T=0 BOP Reference 1104.036 Supplement 2 2.18.4 Perform the following to remove DG2 from parallel operation:

A. Record Time/Date at which load reduction is commenced:

Time/Date _______/________

CAUTION A delay in opening output breaker at 100 KW when unloading diesel can result in generator motoring which causes lockout relay to actuate and trip DG output breaker and shutdown the engine.

NOTE Gradual and uniform load changes minimize engine wear and internal stresses. A 100% load change typically takes ~90 sec.

Longer unloading times are acceptable when delays are caused by reactive load adjustments or equipment monitoring.

BOP B. Perform the following to unload DG2:

Using DG2 voltage regulator, minimize KVARs.

Using DG2 governor control, gradually (~90 seconds) unload DG2 to ~100 KW.

Notes:

Page 5 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _1___

Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 starting at Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP C. Open DG2 Output Breaker (A-408).

D. Record Time/Date (A-408) opened:

Time/Date ______/________

N/A E. IF an Extended Load Run was NOT performed, THEN subtract time recorded in step 2.13.9 from time recorded in step 2.18.4A to determine DG2 Initial Time.

Record result in Table 2 as DG2 Initial Time.

NOTE Additional Run Time between 2625 and 2750 KW can be requested by Systems and Components Engineering in step 2.18.2I or DG2 Endurance Test step 2.8.10.

N/A F. IF an Extended Load Run was performed, THEN determine DG2 Additional Time between 2625 and 2750 KW.

Record results in Table 2 as DG2 Additional Time.

Notes:

Page 6 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _1___

Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 starting at Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A G. IF an Extended Load Run was performed, THEN add DG2 Initial Time and DG1 Additional Time.

Record result in Table 2 as DG2 Total Time.

H. Review all calculations AND verify correct.

Reviewed and verified by (SRO)

BOP 2.18.5 Perform the following to stop diesel:

A. Using DG2 governor control, adjust frequency to ~60 Hz.

B. Using DG2 voltage regulator, adjust voltage to ~4160 volts.

C. WHEN DG2 has run 17 minutes unloaded AND as soon as practicable, THEN at C10, depress DG2 STOP pushbutton.

Notes:

Page 7 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _1___

Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 starting at Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP D. Record Time/Date DG2 stopped:

Time/Date ______/_______

NOTE The following Functional Capability Test (Optional) is performed at the request of Systems and Components Engineering.

Being prepared to obtain elapsed time from start signal until DG2 AC voltage exceeds 4000 volts is essential to properly capture data.

N/A 2.19 IF Functional Capability Test has NOT been performed AND requested by Systems and Components Engineering, THEN within 5 minutes, perform the following:

EXAMINER NOTE: The rest of the surveillance is mostly administrative in nature and not all the panels / readings are modeled in the simulator. The only switch manipulation would be to stop the EDG Room Exhaust Fans after 20 minutes and to verify K01-C4 and K01-D4 are clear. Recommend inserting next malfunction at this time.

Proceed at the discretion of the Lead Examiner Notes:

Page 8 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _1___

Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 starting at Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 2.20 Restoration 2.20.1 At C108, record DG2 ENGINE TOTAL HRS:

C108 is not ________ hrs.

modeled 2.20.2 Verify the following valves closed:

Field K-4B Crankcase Pressure PI-5244B Isol Operator (FO-5244B)

K-4B Air box Pressure PI-5245B Isol (FO-5245B) 2.20.3 At C20, record DG2 Watt-hour meter:_______

C20 is not KWH modeled 2.20.4 IF Excitation Cabinet E21 Cooling Fan (VSF-21)

Field is running, THEN at C108C, place Operator Excitation Cabinet Cooling Fan VSF-21 (HS-5284) to OFF.

2.20.5 Check associated critical AND non-critical BOP alarms clear:

EDG2 CRITICAL TROUBLE (K01-C4)

EDG2 NON-CRITICAL TROUBLE (K01-D4)

Notes:

Page 9 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _1___

Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 starting at Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE EDG EXHAUST FAN TROUBLE (K01-F1) will alarm if respective room temperature is above 90°F when placing DG Exhaust Fans (VEF-24A/VEF-24C) in AUTO or when above 105°F and placing DG Exhaust Fans (VEF-24B/VEF-24D) in AUTO.

BOP 2.20.6 WHEN ONE of the following sets of conditions are met:

Outside ambient temperature is 40 F AND diesel has been stopped for at least 5 minutes Outside ambient temperature is >40 F AND diesel has been stopped for at least 20 minutes AND conditions allow, THEN return DG2 Room Exhaust Fans to AUTO as follows:

A. IF desired, THEN verify DG2 Room Exhaust Fan (VEF-24C) HS in AUTO.

B. IF desired, THEN verify DG2 Room Exhaust Fan (VEF-24D) HS in AUTO.

Proceed at the discretion of the Lead Examiner Notes:

Page 10 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Reference 1203.012F, ACA for K07-B3 ATC 1. Verify ICS in track AND running back.

2. IF asymmetric rod runback clearly caused by an ICS failure N/A OR an ICS input signal failure, THEN take manual control of affected ICS station(s)

AND return plant to steady-state condition.

A.Refer to ICS Abnormal Operation (1203.001).

3. IF necessary, N/A THEN take manual control of the diamond station.

A. Reduce reactor power until unit load demand

<40%.

CRS 4. GO TO Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003).

EXAMINER NOTE: It is not necessary to take the diamond station to hand, but the ATC will have to take the SG/Rx to hand and lower power. With ICS in TRACK the ULD is not available for the down power.

CRS may go directly to 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action.

CRS Reference 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction, Section 2 Notes:

Page 11 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CAUTION Recovery of dropped rod/rods from a subcritical condition can result in uncontrolled criticality and unanalyzed control rod configurations.

NOTE Per Reactor Engineering, a dropped rod is defined as a rod that has sudden, instantaneous inward motion of greater than 6.5%

from its previous position.

N/A 1. IF either of the following conditions exist:

dropped rod(s) exist control rod(s) did not latch and failed to withdraw resulting in asymmetric conditions AND NI power is <2%,

THEN perform the following:

A. Shutdown the reactor by inserting all regulating control rods in SEQ.

B. Place plant in Mode 3, >525 F per the applicable steps of Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016) or Plant Startup (1102.002).

Notes:

Page 12 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A 2. IF more than one rod drops AND NI power is 2%,

THEN trip the reactor and perform Reactor Trip (1202.001).

CREW 3. IF a single rod drops, THEN verify ICS runback to 40% of 902 MWe (~360 MWe)

OR current generator output is 40% of 902 MWe (~360 MWe).

NOTE Instructions in CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009) prefer NI power level <37% for recovery of a dropped rod.

CRS A. Perform Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045) in conjunction with this procedure.

B. Adjust ICS demand as needed to reduce AND maintain ATC the following conditions to clear the CRD Withdrawal Inhibited condition, and prevent Out Inhibit condition:

<360 MWe

<40% NI power C. Operate as follows:

N/A 1) Operate IN LIMIT BYPASS when required to insert affected group.

2) IF dropped safety rod AND required to place Letdown 3-way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED, THEN verify Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250) closed.

Notes:

Page 13 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE Technical Specifications defines an inoperable rod as follows:

- Safety Rod that is not fully withdrawn within one hour, except during performance of rod exercise surveillance (TS 3.1.5). If the Safety Rod is declared inoperable in TS 3.1.5, then TS 3.1.4 must also be entered.

- Inability to move control rod (SR 3.1.4.2) or APSR (TS 3.1.6).

- Rod can not be located with API, RPI or limit lights (TS 3.1.7).

Not meeting TS 3.1.7 results in not meeting either TS 3.1.4 or 3.1.6.

If the inoperable control rod is fully inserted, then it is not necessary to consider it inoperable for the purposes of shutdown margin calculations because it has inserted its negative reactivity.

A control rod is considered to be inoperable if it is not free to insert into the core within the required insertion time, or does not have at least one position indicator channel operable, i.e., cannot be located. (Ref. TS 3.1.4 Bases).

CRS 4. IF rod is declared inoperable OR rod is misaligned >6.5% from its group average (misaligned rod position is not used in the rod group average calculation),

THEN within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> AND once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter, either verify 1.5% available shutdown margin per Reactivity Balance Calculation (1103.015) OR initiate boration to restore SDM to be within COLR limit within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

Notes:

Page 14 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A A. IF control rod is not fully inserted, OR the control rod can not be located, THEN use "Calculation of Shutdown Margin for Shutdown Conditions (Also Reactor Critical with an inoperable control rod)" Worksheet 4 and use "with a known inoperable rod" option (does not apply to APSRs).

B. IF rod is fully inserted, BOP THEN use "Calculation of Shutdown Margin for Shutdown Conditions (Also Reactor Critical with an inoperable control rod)" Worksheet 4 and use "with no known inoperable rod" option.

NOTE Control Rod Tech Spec Application Examples (Attachment B) contains information concerning Tech Spec application associated with different control rod failures.

Notes:

Page 15 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 5. IF rod is declared inoperable OR rod is misaligned >6.5% from its group average (misaligned rod position is not used in the rod group average calculation),

THEN perform one of the following:

A. IF a safety rod, THEN enter TS 3.1.4 and TS 3.1.5.

B. IF a regulating rod, THEN enter TS 3.1.4.

EXAMINER NOTE: Once the rod is declared inoperable and power reduced to <40%, ready to insert next malfunction at the discretion of the Lead Examiner.

CREW 6. Within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, perform one of the following:

A. Restore control rod alignment AND verify control rod is within 6.5% of group alignment.

B. Reduce reactor thermal power to 60%

of the allowable thermal power (TS 3.1.4)

AND perform the following:

1) Contact Reactor Engineering AND verify the potential ejected rod worth is within the assumptions of the rod ejection analysis within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.
2) IF thermal rated power is >20%,

THEN perform Power Peaking Check (1103.019) within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

Notes:

Page 16 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 7. Consult Senior Manager, Operations and Reactor Engineering personnel.

ATC 8. Monitor core quadrant tilt for limits specified in COLR, and TS 3.2.4.

NOTE PMS turn on codes RIS1, RIS2 and RIS3 indicate SPND output versus SPND string number and core location. The Uncorrected and Corrected SPND reports only indicate SPND output and SPND string. In order to determine a given core location then RIS1, RIS2 or RIS3 may be used.

BOP 9. Perform the following:

A. Collect the following plant computer printouts from NASP menu, "OPS Procedure 1203.003" selection:

Uncorrected SPND Signals Imbalance, Tilt and Rod Index Corrected SPND Signals Notes:

Page 17 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A B. IF OUT INHIBIT exists AND it is required to withdraw rods, THEN perform the following to operate rods in MANUAL as required:

1) Place the following in HAND:

Feedwater Loop A Demand H/A Feedwater Loop B Demand H/A

2) Place the following in HAND:

Diamond Panel RX Demand H/A

3) Adjust the following as necessary, Diamond Panel Feedwater Loop A Demand H/A Feedwater Loop B Demand H/A to stabilize at the following conditions:

RCS temp ~579 F

<360 MWe

<40% NI power

4) IF it is desired to give T-ave control to Feedwater (not preferred),

THEN perform "Feedwater Demand Hand-Auto Transfer" section of Integrated Control System (1105.004) to place Feedwater Loop demands in AUTO.

Notes:

Page 18 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _2___

Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled _______________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CREW C. Recover dropped rod per "Recovery of a Dropped Safety Group Rod" or "Recovery of a Dropped Regulating Group Rod" section of CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009), while observing the following limits:

1) IF recovery attempt is within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of rod drop, THEN rod may be recovered at run speed with subsequent power escalation within reactor maneuvering limits of Attachment L to Power Operation (1102.004).
2) IF recovery attempt is >8 and 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> after rod drop, THEN rod may still be recovered at run speed, but subsequent power escalation is limited as follows:

0 to 60%, 30%/hr 60 to 90%, 15%/hr 90 to 100%, 5%/hr

3) IF recovery attempt is >24 hours after rod drop, THEN rod should be recovered gradually (e.g.,

in 10% increments spaced 30 minutes apart) and subsequent power escalation is limited to 3%/hr.

END OF EVENT Notes:

Page 19 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _3 __

Event

Description:

__ICS Signal to A MFW Pump fails low. _____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Expect the crew to identify malfunction prior to any alarms. The expected alarms would be; MFW A/B DELTA P LO (K07-D7), REACTOR IS FEEDWATER LIMITED (K07-C1) and UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1). However guidance for the condition is contained in 1203.027 Loss of Feed.

CRS Reference 1203.027, Loss of Feed N/A 1. IF either of the following conditions apply:

SG level is <15" with no indication of recovery, or Main feedwater flow is lost to either SG with no indication of recovery and power is >7%.

THEN trip the reactor AND follow Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.001).

ATC 2. IF both MFWPs are running AND 1 MFWP has failed without tripping, THEN manually trip the bad MFWP.

ATC 3. IF only one MFWP is operating, THEN verify that Feedwater Pumps Disch Crosstie (CV-2827) is open.

ATC 4. Verify ICS reduces power OR manually reduce power to within capacity of available feedwater.

A. Perform Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045) in conjunction with this procedure.

Notes:

Page 20 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _3 __

Event

Description:

__ICS Signal to A MFW Pump fails low. _____________________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC 5. Open Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) in MAN as necessary.

ATC 6. WHEN RCS pressure starts to drop, THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch in AUTO.

ATC 7. Verify CV-1008 closes per one of the following setpoints OR isolate it, as necessary, by closing the Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

Normal operation: Closes - 2155 psig Power >80% AND MFWP trip: Closes - 2030 psig CREW 8. Attempt to determine cause of loss of feed and correct it.

BOOTH: If directed report no obvious problems at the A MFW Pump.

NOTE A feedwater line rupture in the reactor building may be indicated by rising reactor building temperature, pressure or sump level.

CRS 9. IF feedwater flow to both SGs is restored AND is sufficient for present power level, THEN stabilize plant AND continue operation as directed by Operations Manager.

END OF EVENT Notes:

Page 21 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _4___

Event

Description:

_EH Oil Pump trips with failure of the standby pump to auto start. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1203.012D, ACA for K05-C7 and K05-B7 FYI Instruction per K05-B7 starting at Step 2 BOP 2. IF EH pressure low, THEN perform the following:

NOTE When the EH Oil system is in-service, the pressure should be

>1500 psig even when the turbine is tripped.

BOP A. Manually start the standby EH Oil Pump (P-14A or P-14B) or verify auto start at 1400 psig.

B. IF EH pressure low AND holding constant, THEN immediately initiate steps to determine cause of low pressure.

C. Adjust EH Pump compensator adjustment to establish 1850 to 1900 psig.

Notes:

Page 22 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _4___

Event

Description:

_EH Oil Pump trips with failure of the standby pump to auto start. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior Instruction per K05-C7 ATC 1. IF EH Fluid Lockout Relay (286/LFT) is tripped, THEN GO TO EH PUMP L.O. RELAY TRIP (K05-A7).

BOP 2. IF 286/LFT is not tripped, THEN either manually start standby EH Oil Pump (P-14A or P-14B)

OR verify auto start at 1400 psig.

B.IF P-14B is tripped, THEN go to P-14B breaker (B-4225).

1. Reset per "Reclosing Individual Load Supply Breakers" section of 1107.001.

C. Place handswitch for tripped pump in normal-after-stop or PULL-TO-LOCK.

CREW 3. Initiate steps to determine cause of trip.

BOOTH Report that there is no obvious problem at the pump, but the breaker thermals are tripped.

END OF EVENT Notes:

Page 23 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _5___

Event

Description:

__Gland Seal Steam Pressure Controller fails closed. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1203.012D ACA for K05-B4 - E4 EXAMINER NOTE: This event will also cause a lowering in condenser vacuum which will require the ATC to adjust power due to the inefficiencies occurring.

BOP 1. IF Gland Seal Steam Header Press <75 psig, THEN at C12, slowly open Gland Sealing Steam Main Regulator Bypass (CV-6606).

ATC 2. Check the status of the following alarms:

A.GS PRESS #4 BRG LO (K05-C4)

B.GS PRESS #5 BRG LO (K05-D4)

C. GS PRESS #6 BRG LO (K05-E4)

NOTE LPT A Brg #3 GS Supply regulator (CV-6823) and Brg #3 GS Supply Regulator CV-6823 Bypass (GS-6823-3) are located in the East door of the HP Turb Housing.

Adjusting Gland Seal Steam Regulators Attachment B of Gland Seal Steam System (1106.013) contains instructions for regulator operation.

N/A 3. IF this is the only GS PRESS BRG LO alarm in, THEN adjust the LPT A Brg #3 GS Supply regulator (CV-6823) OR open Brg #3 GS Supply Regulator CV-6823 Bypass (GS-6823-3) until alarm clears.

Notes:

Page 24 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _5___

Event

Description:

__Gland Seal Steam Pressure Controller fails closed. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1203.012D, ACA for K05-B2 CRS 1. IF vacuum continues to degrade, THEN refer to Loss of Condenser Vacuum (1203.016).

BOP 2. IF cause of degraded vacuum is known, AND either,

  • MWe is <270 AND vacuum stabilizes >26.5" Hg, OR
  • MWe is >270 AND vacuum stabilizes >24.5" Hg, THEN adjust alarm setpoints to near but below current vacuum reading using Plant Computer points Y2850 and Y2851 per Plant Computer Operation (1105.010).

OTHERWISE refer to Loss of Condenser Vacuum (1203.016).

CRS Reference 1203.016, Loss of Condenser Vacuum ATC 1. Commence reducing turbine load to stabilize vacuum.

IF MWe is >270 and vacuum is <24.5" Hg THEN trip the turbine.

IF MWe is <270 and vacuum is <26.5" Hg, THEN trip the turbine.

Notes:

Page 25 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _5___

Event

Description:

__Gland Seal Steam Pressure Controller fails closed. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 2. Refer to Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

BOP 3. Verify proper condenser vacuum pump operation as follows:

A. Condenser Vacuum Pumps (C-5A and C-5B on C02) running.

1) IF Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5A/B) autostarts, THEN place handswitch in normal after start.

B. Adequate Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5A/B)

Separator Tank (T-75A, T-75B) water level.

C. Condenser Vacuum Pump Cooler (E-46A/B) ACW Outlet Temperature (TI-4020, TI-4022) normal.

NOTE Under ideal conditions, the condenser vacuum pumps can only achieve approximately 26" Hg in the hogging mode of operation.

BOP D. IF Main Condenser vacuum continues to degrade below 26" Hg, THEN consider placing the local Condenser Vacuum Pump AUTO-HOG handswitches (HS-3636 and HS-3638) in HOG position, prior to going below 25" Hg.

Notes:

Page 26 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _5___

Event

Description:

__Gland Seal Steam Pressure Controller fails closed. _

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior N/A E. IF outside ambient temperature is below freezing, THEN check ambient temperature at the vacuum pumps is above freezing.

1) IF ambient temperature at the vacuum pumps is NOT above freezing, THEN align vacuum pumps to the separators per Exhibit A and B of Vacuum System Operations (1106.010).

NOTE The following step automatically sets the CONDENSER VACUUM LO (K05-B2) alarm setpoints to 24.7 or 26.7" Hg, depending upon MWe output to PMS.

BOP 4. From PMS Alarm menu, set the Transient Low Vacuum Alarm:

"Y", Enter, F3 (save).

EXAMINER NOTE: When the gland sealing steam PCV bypass is controlling gland steam pressure, proceed to the next event.

Proceed to the next event at the discretion of the Lead Examiner.

Notes:

Page 27 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _6___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1203.012F, ACA for K07-A5 EXAMINER NOTE: The ACA is written for small slow developing tube leaks, the CRS may elect to go directly to the AOP. The following steps are from the ACA.

BOP 1. Observe RI-2691 to determine alarm mode.

2. IF the reactor is critical with RI-2691 in Alert or High alarm, BOP OR alarm is suspected to be a spike, THEN verify Gross/Analyzer switch in the Analyzer (left) position, located inside the drawer on the right side, second card from the front. (Rate meter will now show N16 gamma only.)
3. IF OTSG tube leak is indicated by rising N-16 levels, CRS THEN perform the following:

A.Direct Chemistry to sample secondary system for activity CREW B.Determine primary system leak rate.

4. IF OTSG tube leak validated by any of the following CRS - Chemistry Sample

- Main Condenser Radiation Process Monitor (RI-3632) rising

- RCS leak rate is rising as indicated by Makeup Tank (T-4) level dropping THEN GO TO Small Tube Leak Procedure (1203.023):

Notes:

Page 28 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _6___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS Reference 1203.023, Small Tube Leak Section 1, SG-A Tube Leak NOTE Due to lower flow rates and pressure differentials, leak rates at low power (<20%) may not be accurately represented when using either N-16 Radiation Monitoring System.

The MGP N-16 Radiation Monitoring System can detect leaks up to 156 gpm.

CREW 1. Determine Primary to Secondary leak rate using Attachment 1.

CRS 2. Notify Chemistry personnel to perform Primary to Secondary Leakage (1602.001) without delay. (Reference TR 3.7.7.1)

NOTE It is necessary to continue to monitor for changes in leak rates and leak rate rate-of-change to determine if additional actions are required to be performed for higher leak rates.

CRS 3. WHEN Primary to Secondary leak rate has been determined, THEN GO TO the applicable step per the table below:

EXAMINER NOTE: Based on the table the CRS should go to Step 4 Notes:

Page 29 of 66

ATTACHMENT 1 PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE ESTIMATION 1.0 Estimate primary to secondary leakrate using one or more of the following:

Use the following formula to perform mass balance estimate for leak rates >5 gpm.

( ) + ( ) - ( ) - ( ) = ( )

Makeup Seal Injection Letdown Seal Bleedoff Leak Rate IF the reactor is critical, THEN use PMS indications for SG Leak Rate and Rate of Change.

SG-A SG-B N-16 AVG Leakrate GPM N-16 AVG Leakrate GPM (SGALRGPM) ( ) (SGBLRGPM) ( )

N-16 AVG Leakrate GPD N-16 AVG Leakrate GPD (SGALRGPD) ( ) (SGBLRGPD) ( )

N-16 Leakrate ROC GPM/HR N-16 Leakrate ROC GPM/HR (SGAROC1) ( ) (SGBROC1) ( )

N-16 Leakrate ROC GPD/HR N-16 Leakrate ROC GPD/HR (SGAROC2) ( ) (SGBROC2) ( )

NOTE N-16 detectors RI-2691 and RI-2692 have a GROSS/ANALYZER switch located inside the drawer on the right side, second card from the front.

The correlation between cpm and gpd in the table below is based on 100% Rx power N-16 production and steam flow. The same countrate at <100% is indicative of a larger leak.

IF the reactor is critical, THEN place the applicable OTSG N-16 Detector in ANALYZER mode and estimate leak rate.

A OTSG N-16 Detector (RI-2691)

B OTSG N-16 Detector (RI-2692)

IF OTSG N-16 Detector reading in THEN SG Tube Leak Rate is:

ANALYZER mode is:

2 x 103 cpm 30 gpd 5 x 103 cpm 75 gpd 1 x 104 cpm 150 gpd Perform RCS Leak Detection (1103.013).

Page 30 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _6___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE To avoid an unnecessary plant shutdown, tube leaks >75 gpd should be qualitatively confirmed prior to declaration. Leakage is qualitatively confirmed when two independent radiation monitors trend in the same direction with the same order of magnitude. If only one radiation monitor is functional, then shutdown shall be based on the indication of the one monitor.

CRS 4. IF total SG tube leakage (both SGs) is 1 gpm (1,440 gpd),

THEN perform the following:

A. IF turbine trips, THEN immediately trip the reactor AND GO TO Tube Rupture (1202.006).

B. IF reactor trips, THEN GO TO Tube Rupture (1202.006).

N/A 5. Reduce reactor power to <50% within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> at 1.0%/minute per Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

Place unit in Mode 3 within the next 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> by continuing shutdown at 0.5%/minute per Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045).

GO TO step 10 while continuing with plant shutdown and cooldown.

Notes:

Page 31 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _6___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown.

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 10. Perform Control of Secondary System Contamination (1203.014).

NOTE Only the MGP N-16 Radiation Monitoring System is qualified to meet the minimum requirements specified by EPRI Guidelines.

N/A 11. IF the MGP N-16 Radiation Monitoring System is or becomes unavailable to SG-A, THEN perform Attachment 2, "No Operable Continuous Radiation Monitor" section.

BOP 12. Raise monitoring of radiation monitors to once every 15 minutes using Attachment 3.

NOTE Steam Line High Range Radiation Monitors (RI-2682 and RI-2681) readings may be inconclusive due to inadequate shielding.

CREW 13. Unless already determined, determine affected SG using one or more of the following:

ATC 14. IF shutdown is required, THEN place SG-A EFW Pump Turbine (K3) Steam Supply (CV-2667) valve in MANUAL AND close:

CRS A. Refer to TS 3.7.5 Condition A.

EXAMINER NOTE: Once the T.S. has been entered for the tube leak T.S.. 3.4.13 OR the EFW valve T.S.. 3.7.5, ready to proceed to the Tube Rupture at the discretion of the Lead Examiner.

Notes:

Page 32 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A Steam Generator Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: Per the table in Step 3 of the Tube Leak AOP, when STEAM GENERATOR leakage is >10 gpm, the crew should transition to the Tube Rupture EOP.

CRS

1. IF reactor or turbine has tripped OR trips during plant runback OR PZR level drops below 100" during plant runback, THEN perform the following:

A. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor Floating Steps.

B. GO TO step 11.

CRS 2. Perform the following:

A. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor Floating Steps.

B. Advise Shift Manager to perform BOTH of the following:

Notify Nuclear Chemistry to begin off-site dose projections.

Implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

Notes:

Page 33 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP 3. Open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operating HPI pump.

ATC 4. Perform the following:

A. IF SGs are above LOW LEVEL LIMIT, THEN verify Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235) maintains PZR level 200".

B. IF SGs are at LOW LEVEL LIMIT, THEN verify Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235) maintains PZR level > 100".

ATC 5. IF Reactor power is > 20%,

THEN begin controlled plant shutdown at 5% per minute.

Notes:

Page 34 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CREW

6. Determine bad SG using one or more of the following:

OTSG N-16 Gross Detectors:

SG A SG B RI-2691 RI-2692 SGTR display on SPDS Plant Monitoring System Alarms Steam Line High Range Radiation Monitors:

SG A SG B RI-2682 RI-2681 Local steam line radiation survey Nuclear Chemistry sample At low FW flow rates:

Higher than expected SG level Lower than expected FW flow rate Lower than expected MFW pump speed Notes:

Page 35 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CRS 7. Verify Control of Secondary System Contamination (1203.014) being performed in conjunction with this procedure.

ATC

8. WHEN bad SG is known, THEN place bad SG EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply valve in MANUAL AND close:

SG A SG B CV-2667 CV-2617 BOP 9. Perform the following during power reduction (Refer to Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016) if needed):

A. At 70%, trip Heater Drain Pumps:

P8A P8B B. At 50%, transfer plant auxiliaries to SU1 per Electrical System Operations (1107.001).

Notes:

Page 36 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC C. WHEN Main Generator output 350 MW AND both MFW pumps are operating, THEN perform the following:

1) Check Main Feedwater Block valves closed:

CV-2625 CV-2675

2) Open Feedwater Pumps DISCH Crosstie (CV-2827).
3) Trip Main Feed Pump supplied from bad SG:

SG A SG B B MAIN FEED A MAIN FEED PUMP PUMP D. Set Lo-Load Limit at minimum.

E. Verify HP Turbine Drains open on C02.

BOP F. Verify Gland Sealing Steam Spillover Regulator Bypass (CV-6640) closed.

Notes:

Page 37 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior NOTE When both SGs are on LO LEVEL LIMIT, further power reduction will result in lowering Tave and pressurizer level. Slowing down the rate of power change can help achieve more precise control of RCS inventory.

ATC G. WHEN both SGs are on LO LEVEL LIMIT (20 to 40"),

THEN perform the following:

1) Place Feedwater Demand H/A stations in HAND AND adjust demand to zero:

Feedwater Demand Loop A Feedwater Demand Loop B

2) Place Reactor Demand H/A station in HAND AND adjust as necessary to control reactor power below 20%.
10. WHEN reactor power is below 20%,

THEN perform the following:

A. Verify plant auxiliaries aligned to SU1.

BOP B. IF Main Turbine is in service, THEN place in TURBINE MANUAL.

C. Adjust Header Pressure Controlling setpoint to 45.

Notes:

Page 38 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC

11. Depress Reactor Trip PB.

A. Verify all rods inserted AND reactor power dropping.

ATC A. Perform the following:

1) IF Reactor fails to trip, THEN depress CRD Power Supply Breaker Trip PBs on C03:

A-501 B-631 a) IF A-501 or B-631 fails to trip, THEN manually insert rods at C03 AND dispatch an operator to open CRD AC Power Supply breakers.

2) IF more than one rod fails to fully insert OR reactor power is not dropping, THEN perform Emergency Boration (RT-12).
3) Do not continue until Reactor is shutdown.

EXAMINER NOTE: The two stuck rods represent Event 8 and the performance of RT-12 is a Critical Task.

RT-12 is located at the end of this exam guide.

Notes:

Page 39 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP

12. Verify Turbine tripped.

A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

BOP

13. Check adequate SCM.

BOP

14. Verify Header Pressure Controlling setpoint adjusted to 45.

A. Check TURB BYP Valves controlling SG press 950 to 990 psig in AUTO OR

< 990 psig with TURB BYP Valves in HAND.

B. Check MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) alarm clear.

CRS 15. Verify Shift Manager advised to perform BOTH of the following:

Notify Nuclear Chemistry to begin off-site dose projections.

Implement Emergency Action Level Classification (1903.010).

Notes:

Page 40 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC

16. Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) closed.

BOP

17. Verify BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operating HPI pump open.

N/A

18. IF only DG power is available, THEN GO TO 1202.007, "DEGRADED POWER" procedure unless entry was from that procedure.

BOP

19. Check Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers open:

5114 5118 Exciter Field breaker NOTE PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply during SGTR.

ATC 20. Operate Pressurizer Heaters AND Pressurizer Spray valve (CV-1008) to maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

A. IF RCS press drops below 1700 psig AND SCM is adequate AND RCS press is controlled, THEN bypass ESAS.

Notes:

Page 41 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A Steam Generator Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP

21. Stabilize PZR level 55" as follows:

A. IF Emergency Boration is not in progress, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint to 100".

B. IF HPI is in service, THEN adjust HPI flow as necessary to maintain PZR level 55 AND RCS press low within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

C. IF PZR level is < 55, OR if PZR level is predicted to drop below 55, THEN initiate HPI (RT-2).

BOP

22. Verify OTSG N-16 Gross Detectors selected to GROSS:

RI-2691 RI-2692 Notes:

Page 42 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior CREW

23. Verify bad SG determined using one or more of the following:

EXAMINER NOTE: The bad SG was previously determined, so the bulleted guidance has not been included here.

CRS

24. Verify Control of Secondary System Contamination (1203.014) being performed in conjunction with this procedure.

ATC

25. Verify bad SG EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply valve in MANUAL AND closed:

SG A SG B CV-2667 CV-2617 N/A

26. IF bad SG level is approaching 410" due to leakage OR dose rate Alert criteria is projected at Site boundary, THEN establish emergency cooldown rate of 240 F/hr

( 4 F/min) to 500 F T-hot as follows:

EXAMINER NOTE: Emergency Cooldown rates are not applicable for the given scenario.

Notes:

Page 43 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior ATC

27. IF emergency cooldown rate is not required OR RCS T-hot is 500 F, THEN establish RCS cooldown rate of 100 F/hr as follows:

A. For good SG, place TURB BYP Valves in HAND AND adjust to maintain cooldown rate 100 F/hr.

EXAMINER NOTE: Commencing the cooldown is one of the Critical Tasks.

Once a cooldown has been established insert malfunction to cause a loss of condenser vacuum which will require transition to the ADVs for the cooldown.

ATC B. IF RCS press drops below 1700 psig AND SCM is adequate AND RCS press is controlled, THEN bypass ESAS.

C. IF only one SG is bad, THEN steam bad SG only as necessary to maintain Exhibit 1 limits.

Proceed to the next event at Lead Examiner discretion.

Notes:

Page 44 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _7___

Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior BOP

28. Perform the following to place AUX Feedwater Pump (P75) in service:

A. Dispatch an operator to open AUX FW Pump RECIRC to E-11A Isolation (FW-1).

B. Verify Feedwater Pumps Discharge Crosstie (CV-2827) open.

C. WHEN FW-1 is open, THEN start P75.

ATC

29. IF MFW pump(s) operating, THEN perform the following:

A. Place operating MFW Pump H/A station(s) in HAND AND adjust demand to zero:

MFW Pump Loop A MFW Pump Loop B

1) Check P75 maintains 70 psid across Startup valves.
2) Check good SG Startup valve maintains SG level 20 to 40".
3) Check bad SG Startup valve maintains SG level 20 to 40" OR closed if SG level > 40".

B. Trip Main Feed Pump(s).

Notes:

Page 45 of 66

Op-Test No.: _2016-1_ Scenario No.: __5__ Event No.: _9___

Event

Description:

__ TBVs Close due to loss of vacuum. ____________

Time Position Applicants Actions or Behavior EXAMINER NOTE: The following step is the contingency action for Step 27, which establishes the cooldown.

ATC A. IF TURB BYP Valves are not available, THEN operate ATM Dump Control System for good SG in HAND to maintain cooldown rate 100 F/hr.

SG A SG B CV-2376 ATM DUMP CV-2619 ISOL CV-2668 ATM DUMP CV-2618 CNTRL

1) IF both SGs are bad, THEN steam both SGs.

EXAMINER NOTE: Once the cooldown is re-established with ADVs, the scenario is completed.

FREEZE AT LEAD EXAMINERS DISCRETION Notes:

Page 46 of 66

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKS ANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input from Operations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The following pages come from that document.

At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1 exam.

Page 47 of 66

CT-23 Establish and Maintain Reactor Shutdown Requirements CT based on: Reactivity control to provide adequate shutdown margin TBD Description When reactor trip occurs or should occur, the operator must initiate rod insertion signals and maintain decreasing reactor power. If more than one rod remains stuck out, the operator should begin boration to increase the shutdown margin.

During cooldown, due to Excessive Heat Transfer or SGTR, shutdown margin must be maintained by adding boron to the RCS as necessary.

TBD Conditions Reactor trip is required and during cooldown due to Excessive Heat Transfer or SGTR mitigation.

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

(1) Emergency Boration should be directed and started within 15 minutes of the reactor trip.

(2) The manual trip should occur before the ERV opens or the Pressurizer exceeds 290 inches.

(3) The reactor should be tripped before one train of HPI is fully in service (four HPI nozzles full open).

(4) The reactor should be tripped within two minutes after any crew member identifies a second dropped rod.

(5) Emergency boration should be restarted within 15 minutes after the Operating HPI pump trips.

(6) The reactor should be manually tripped before PZR level reaches 100 inches.

(7) Reactor shall be tripped within five minutes of the sheared shaft malfunction becoming active.

SES used Page 48 of 66

Justification for ANO:

(1) Per the Unit 1 TS Bases, 15 minutes provides an adequate time for an operator to correctly align and start the required systems and components necessary to ensure that adequate SDM exists in Modes 3, 4, and 5.

(2) With RPS failed and no automatic actions to trip the reactor on a closed MSIV, operator action is required to place the plant in a safe, analyzed condition. Accomplishing this task prior to the ERV lift setpoint (> RPS High Pressure trip) and High Pzr level requiring manual trip, provides adequate time for the crew to diagnose the unanalyzed condition (reactor critical with closed MSIV) and trip the reactor. Due to the degraded heat sink, RCS pressure and Pzr level will be quickly rising providing indications to the crew that this event has occurred.

(3) Tripping the reactor before a full train of HPI is in service provides a reasonable time for the crew to diagnose the need to initiate HPI to make up for RCS inventory loss and to trip the reactor appropriately.

(4) 2 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew to diagnose the condition of 2 dropped control rods and to trip the reactor as required.

(5) Same justification in (1) above.

(6) A large LOCA is in progress for this scenario. 100 Pzr level as a criterion provides adequate time for the crew to determine that RCS makeup capacity is exceeded and to trip the plant prior to reaching the 100 Rx Trip EOP requirement.

(7) 5 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew to diagnose the sheared shaft condition and implement the proper actions IAW appropriate procedural guidance to protect the core from a reduced flow condition.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criterion (1) is applicable. The initiation of emergency boration must occur within 15 minutes of the reactor trip.

Page 49 of 66

CT-7 Minimize SCM CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water mass CT based on: Maintaining acceptable limits of radiation releases due to SGTR induced RB bypass TBD Description Maintain RCS pressure close to but above minimum allowable SCM and, if applicable, the RCP NPSH limit.

TBD Conditions SGTR mitigation when SCM is greater than the minimum allowable.

Associated GEOG Bases:

ANO Version(s)

The PZR cooldown/RCS cooldown should be commenced before the X SG reaches 400 inches based upon limiting the off-site release and the need for future steaming of the bad SG.

The PZR cooldown should be commenced by minimizing SCM IAW RT-14 (Pzr Spray Valve full open and all pzr heaters off).

ANO Basis Commencing a PZR cooldown and RCS cooldown on a tube rupture is critical to minimize the leak flow rate and minimize the duration of the transient before the leak flow is terminated.

SES used Justification for ANO Commencing the Pressurizer and RCS Cooldown is critical to lower the RCS to OTSG D/P, which reduces the RCS leak rate, sometimes by as much as a factor of 2. Accomplishing this action before the affected (bad) SG reached 400 provides 2 functions:

Page 50 of 66

Prevents challenging the 410 criteria which would result in the need to perform an Emergency C/D or HPI cooldown (if the other SG is affected) to reduce the SG pressure below the MSSV safety valve setpoint to facilitate isolation of the affected SG. The Emergency C/D can challenge operator control of the plant, while the HPI cooldown can challenge the MSSV safety valve setpoint, resulting in an unnecessary steam release.

1. Prevents the need to isolate the affected SG until procedurally directed. This maintains the bad SG available should subsequent issues occur in the other SG.
2. Prevents the need to isolate the affected SG until procedurally directed. This maintains the bad SG available should subsequent issues occur in the other SG.

For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria, an RCS cooldown must be commenced prior to the ruptured STEAM GENERATOR reaching 400 inches which could result in increased exposure to the public.

Page 51 of 66

RT-2 Page 1 of 6 INITIATE HPI

1. IF HPI initiation is for any reason other than Emergency Boration (RT-12),

THEN isolate Letdown by closing either:

Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS):

CV-1214 CV-1216

2. IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running, THEN perform the following:

A. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

B. IF RCP Seal Injection is in service, THEN place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD.

C. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN open HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) to maintain PZR level and RCS press.

D. IF initiating HPI for Emergency Boration only, THEN GO TO RT-12 step 2.B.

E. IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop, THEN open additional HPI Block valves associated with OP or STBY HPI pump:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1278 CV-1228 CV-1279 CV-1284 Page 52 of 66

Page 2 of 6 INITIATE HPI

3. IF either OP or STBY HPI pumps are available AND both pumps are off, THEN place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:

A. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP and STBY HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

B. Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

C. Close RCS Makeup Block (CV-1233 or CV-1234).

D. Prevent dead heading pump by verifying one of the following:

Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301 OR One HPI Block valve associated with OP HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) fully open.

E. IF HPI Pump (P-36B) will be used, THEN verify the following selected to energized bus:

P36B/P64B Bus Select MOD Control P64B Transfer Switch F. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

G. Start OP or STBY HPI pump.

H. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

(3. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 53 of 66

Page 3 of 6 INITIATE HPI

3. (Continued)

I. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN open HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) to maintain PZR level and RCS press.

1) IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop, THEN open additional HPI Block valves associated with OP or STBY HPI pump:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1278 CV-1228 CV-1279 CV-1284

2) Monitor Makeup Tank level and control per step 10 as necessary.

J. IF initiating HPI for Emergency Boration only, THEN GO TO RT-12 step 2.B.

4. IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop, THEN place ES HPI pump in service as follows:

A. Open BWST T3 Outlet to ES HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408).

B. Prevent dead heading pump by verifying one of the following:

Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301 OR One HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) fully open.

C. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

D. IF OP and STBY pumps are both off, THEN verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 54 of 66

Page 4 of 6 INITIATE HPI

4. (Continued)

E. WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open, THEN start ES HPI pump.

F. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

G. Open HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) to maintain PZR level and RCS press.

1) IF initiating HPI for Emergency Boration only, THEN GO TO RT-12 step 2.B.
2) IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop, THEN open additional HPI Block valves associated with ES HPI pump:

P36A P36C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1278 CV-1228 CV-1279 CV-1284

3) Monitor Makeup Tank level and control per step 10 as necessary.
5. IF all HPI Block valves are fully open AND additional HPI flow is required, THEN close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).
6. IF only one train of HPI is available AND RCS press is > 600 psig, THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

Page 55 of 66

Page 5 of 6 INITIATE HPI

7. IF leakage into the RB is indicated, THEN maximize RB cooling as follows:

A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running:

VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D B. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves:

CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815 C. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers:

SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413

8. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26:

Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814)

Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816)

Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)

9. Verify the following High Point Vents closed, except when another procedure directs otherwise:

Reactor A Loop B Loop Pressurizer Vessel SV-1081 SV-1091 SV-1071 SV-1082 SV-1092 SV-1072 SV-1077 SV-1083 SV-1093 SV-1073 SV-1079 SV-1084 SV-1094 SV-1074 Page 56 of 66

Page 6 of 6 INITIATE HPI

10. IF Makeup Tank level is rising AND it is necessary to control Makeup Tank level, THEN perform one or more of the following:

Verify all running HPI pump flow(s) 90 gpm/pump AND close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).

1) Maintain running HPI pump flow 90 gpm/pump.

IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off, THEN start OP or STBY pump per step 3.

IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running, THEN perform the following:

1) Verify HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Transfer HPI flow from ES pump to OP or STBY pump as necessary to control Makeup Tank level.
3) IF total HPI flow is within capacity of OP or STBY HPI pump, THEN perform the following:

a) Transfer remaining HPI flow to OP or STBY HPI pump.

b) Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

c) Stop ES HPI pump.

d) Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.

END Page 57 of 66

RT-14 Page 1 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS NOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred:

HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100 F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50 F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control.

When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply.

PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.

1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists, THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.
2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig, THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.
3. IF PZR steam space leak exists, THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. IF SCM is adequate, THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI.

C. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdown per RT-13.

D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 58 of 66

Page 2 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. IF RCS press is high, THEN limit press using one or more of the following:

A. Throttle makeup flow.

B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:

1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met:

HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open

2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

3) Throttle HPI.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D. IF PZR AUX Spray is in service, THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.

F. Raise Letdown flow.

1) IF ESAS has actuated, THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdown per RT-13.

G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)

AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 59 of 66

Page 3 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

4. (Continued)

H. IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),

THEN perform the following:

1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C P64A P64B P64C

2) Stop desired HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36C

3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A/B P36B/C CV-1219 CV-1227 CV-1220 CV-1228 CV-1278 CV-1284 CV-1279 CV-1285

5. IF RCS press is low, THEN raise press using one or more of the following:

A. Raise makeup flow.

B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C. IF RCP is running, THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.

D. Reduce Letdown flow.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.

(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 60 of 66

Page 4 of 4 CONTROL RCS PRESS

5. (CONTINUED)

CAUTION If HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPI cooling is no longer required.

F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.

CAUTION With RCS solid, 1 F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.

6. IF PZR is solid, THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature.

Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS press NOTE Adjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate and cooldown rate.

7. IF normal makeup is in service AND HPI is in service, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale.

END Page 61 of 66

RT-12 Page 1 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION NOTE If an unexpected delay occurs in implementation of Step 1, then promptly initiate Emergency Boration using HPI per step 2.

1. IF Boric Acid pump (P39A or P39B) and Batch Controller are available, THEN perform the following:

A. IF both OP and STBY HPI Pumps are off OR Letdown is isolated, THEN GO TO step 2.

B. Set Batch Controller for maximum batch size as follows:

1) Depress lower DISPLAY.
2) Depress TOTAL.
3) Depress TOTAL RESET.
4) Depress BATCH SET.
5) Depress 9, six times.
6) Depress ENTER.
7) Depress lower DISPLAY.

C. Verify Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251) closed.

D. Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).

E. Verify both Makeup Filters in service:

F3A F3B F. Record initial BAAT (T-6) level ____________ in.

G. Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).

(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 62 of 66

Page 2 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

1. (Continued)

H. Start Batch Controller by depressing RUN key.

I. Adjust Batch Controller Flow CNTRL VLV (CV-1249) to 100% open as follows:

1) Depress VALVE SET.
2) Depress numbers: 1, 0, 0.
3) Depress ENTER.
4) Depress lower DISPLAY.
5) Depress RATE.

J. IF Batch Controller output rate < 5 gpm, THEN perform the following:

1) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s):

P39A P39B

2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).
3) Stop Batch Controller by depressing STOP key.
4) GO TO step 2.

K. Adjust Pressurizer Level Control Setpoint to 220".

L. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

M. WHEN PZR level is 100",

THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and component limitations.

(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 63 of 66

Page 3 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

1. (Continued)

N. Perform the following as necessary to maintain Makeup Tank level 55 to 86":

1) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).
2) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s):

P39A P39B

3) Place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.
4) WHEN Makeup Tank level is lowered to desired level, THEN perform the following:

a) Return 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) to LETDOWN.

b) Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).

c) Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).

O. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:

1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book. PPM
2) Calculate batch add required using Plant Computer OR Soluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.3, "Feed Volume For Batch Boration or Dilution". gal
3) Use 1103.004, Attachment D, "Volume of BAAT Vs. Depth of Liquid to determine desired final BAAT level.

(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 64 of 66

Page 4 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

1. (Continued)

P. WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added per step 1.O.

OR as determined by Reactor Engineering, THEN perform the following:

1) Stop Boric Acid pump(s):

P39A P39B

2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).
3) Verify Makeup Tank level 55 to 86".
4) Close BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408).
5) Adjust Letdown flow to desired rate.

Page 65 of 66

Page 5 of 5 EMERGENCY BORATION

2. IF HPI will be used for emergency boration, THEN perform the following:

A. Initiate HPI per RT-2.

B. Verify HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) associated with running HPI pump open.

C. IF Letdown is in service, THEN place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

D. WHEN PZR level is 100",

THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and component limitations.

E. Maintain PZR level 200 to 220" as follows:

1) Verify both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open:

CV-1300 CV-1301

2) Throttle HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) as necessary.

F. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:

1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book. PPM
2) Calculate final BWST level for required boron addition using Plant Computer OR Soluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.6, "Continuous Feed and Bleed from BWST". ft G. WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added per step 2.F.

OR as determined by Reactor Engineering, THEN perform the following:

1) Operate HPI as directed by CRS.
2) Adjust Letdown flow as directed by CRS.

END Page 66 of 66

ES-301 Transient and Event Checklist Form ES-301-5 Facility: ANO UNIT 1 Date of Exam: 8/23/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A E Scenarios P V 1 2 3 4 T M P E O I L N CREW CREW POSITION CREW POSITION CREW POSITION T N I T POSITION I

C A S A B S A B S A B S A B M A T L R T O R T O R T O R T O U N Y O C P O C P O C P O C P M(*)

T P E R I U RX 2 1 2 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 I/C 3,4,5, 2,3,4, 12 4 4 2 U1 / U2 6,8,9 5,7,8 MAJ 7 6 2 2 2 1 TS 4,5 3,4 4 0 2 2 RX 2 1 1 1 0 NOR 0 1 1 1 R1 / R2 I/C 3,4 2,3,4 5 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 2 2 2 1 TS 0 0 2 2 RX 1 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 R5 / R6 I/C 5,6 2,3 5 4 4 2

,5 MAJ 7 6 2 2 2 1 TS 0 0 2 2 RX 1 1 1 1 0 NOR 0 1 1 1 I/C 2,3,4, 2,4,5 2,5,6 12 4 4 2 I1 / I2 5,7,8 MAJ 6 6 7 3 2 2 1 TS 3,4 2 0 2 2 Instructions:

1. Check the applicant level and enter the operating test number and Form ES-D-1 event numbers for each event type; TS are not applicable for RO applicants. ROs must serve in both the at-the-controls (ATC) and balance-of-plant (BOP) positions. Instant SROs (SRO-I) must serve in both the SRO and the ATC positions, including at least two instrument or component (I/C) malfunctions and one major transient, in the ATC position. If an SRO-I additionally serves in the BOP position, one I/C malfunction can be credited toward the two I/C malfunctions required for the ATC position.
2. Reactivity manipulations may be conducted under normal or controlled abnormal conditions (refer to Section D.5.d) but must be significant per Section C.2.a of Appendix D. (*) Reactivity and normal evolutions may be replaced with additional instrument or component malfunctions on a one-for-one basis.
3. Whenever practical, both instrument and component malfunctions should be included; only those that require verifiable actions that provide insight to the applicants competence count toward the minimum requirements specified for the applicants license level in the right-hand columns.
4. For licensees that use the ATC operator primarily for monitoring plant parameters, the chief examiner may place SRO-I applicants in either the ATC or BOP position to best evaluate the SRO-I in manipulating plant controls.

ES-301 Transient and Event Checklist Form ES-301-5 Facility: ANO UNIT 1 Date of Exam: 8/23/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A E Scenarios P V 1 2 3 4 T M P E O I L N CREW CREW POSITION CREW POSITION CREW POSITION T N I T POSITION I

C A S A B S A B S A B S A B M A T L R T O R T O R T O R T O U N Y O C P O C P O C P O C P M(*)

T P E R I U RX 2 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 2 1 1 1 I/C 3,4,5 2,3,4 12 4 4 2 U3 / U4

,6,8, ,5,7, 9 8 MAJ 7 6 2 2 2 1 TS 4,5 2,5 4 0 2 2 RX 2 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 R3 / R4 I/C 3,4 3,4 4 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 2 2 2 1 TS 0 0 2 2 RX 0 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 I/C 5,6 2,4,5 5 4 4 2 R7 / R8 MAJ 7 6 2 2 2 1 TS 0 0 2 2 RX 1 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 2 1 1 1 I/C 2,3, 3,4 2,3,4 11 4 4 2 I3 5 ,5,8, 9

MAJ 6 6 6 3 2 2 1 TS 2,5 2 0 2 2 Instructions:

1. Check the applicant level and enter the operating test number and Form ES-D-1 event numbers for each event type; TS are not applicable for RO applicants. ROs must serve in both the at-the-controls (ATC) and balance-of-plant (BOP) positions. Instant SROs (SRO-I) must serve in both the SRO and the ATC positions, including at least two instrument or component (I/C) malfunctions and one major transient, in the ATC position. If an SRO-I additionally serves in the BOP position, one I/C malfunction can be credited toward the two I/C malfunctions required for the ATC position.
2. Reactivity manipulations may be conducted under normal or controlled abnormal conditions (refer to Section D.5.d) but must be significant per Section C.2.a of Appendix D. (*) Reactivity and normal evolutions may be replaced with additional instrument or component malfunctions on a one-for-one basis.
3. Whenever practical, both instrument and component malfunctions should be included; only those that require verifiable actions that provide insight to the applicants competence count toward the minimum requirements specified for the applicants license level in the right-hand columns.
4. For licensees that use the ATC operator primarily for monitoring plant parameters, the chief examiner may place SRO-I applicants in either the ATC or BOP position to best evaluate the SRO-I in manipulating plant controls.

ES-301 Transient and Event Checklist Form ES-301-5 Facility: ANO UNIT 1 Date of Exam: 8/23/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A E Scenarios P V 1 2 3 4 T M P E O I L N CREW CREW POSITION CREW POSITION CREW POSITION T N I T POSITION I

C A S A B S A B S A B S A B M A T L R T O R T O R T O R T O U N Y O C P O C P O C P O C P M(*)

T P E R I U RX 1 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 2 1 1 1 I/C 2,3, 2,3,4 2,3,4 15 4 4 2 I4 5 ,5,7, ,5,8, 8 9 MAJ 6 6 6 3 2 2 1 TS 2,5 2,5 4 0 2 2 RX 1 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 I/C 2,3,4 2,3,4 3,4,6 12 4 4 2 I5 ,5,7, 8

MAJ 6 6 7 3 2 2 1 TS 2,5 2 0 2 2 RX 1 1 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 I/C 2,3,4 3,4 3,4,6 8 4 4 2 R9 MAJ 6 6 7 3 2 2 1 TS 0 0 2 2 Instructions:

1. Check the applicant level and enter the operating test number and Form ES-D-1 event numbers for each event type; TS are not applicable for RO applicants. ROs must serve in both the at-the-controls (ATC) and balance-of-plant (BOP) positions. Instant SROs (SRO-I) must serve in both the SRO and the ATC positions, including at least two instrument or component (I/C) malfunctions and one major transient, in the ATC position. If an SRO-I additionally serves in the BOP position, one I/C malfunction can be credited toward the two I/C malfunctions required for the ATC position.
2. Reactivity manipulations may be conducted under normal or controlled abnormal conditions (refer to Section D.5.d) but must be significant per Section C.2.a of Appendix D. (*) Reactivity and normal evolutions may be replaced with additional instrument or component malfunctions on a one-for-one basis.
3. Whenever practical, both instrument and component malfunctions should be included; only those that require verifiable actions that provide insight to the applicants competence count toward the minimum requirements specified for the applicants license level in the right-hand columns.
4. For licensees that use the ATC operator primarily for monitoring plant parameters, the chief examiner may place SRO-I applicants in either the ATC or BOP position to best evaluate the SRO-I in manipulating plant controls.

ES-301 Transient and Event Checklist Form ES-301-5 Facility: ANO UNIT 1 Date of Exam: 8/23/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A E Scenarios P V 5 T M P E O I L N CREW CREW POSITION CREW POSITION CREW POSITION T N I T POSITION I

C A S A B S A B S A B S A B M A T L R T O R T O R T O R T O U N Y O C P O C P O C P O C P M(*)

T P E R I U RX 0 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 1 1 1 I/C 2,3,4 2,3,6 4,5, 5 4 4 2 SPARE

,5,6, 6 8,9 MAJ 7 7 7 1 2 2 1 TS 2,6 2 0 2 2 RO RX 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 SRO-I I/C 4 4 2 SRO-U MAJ 2 2 1 TS 0 2 2 RO RX 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 SRO-I I/C 4 4 2 SRO-U MAJ 2 2 1 TS 0 2 2 RO RX 1 1 0 NOR 1 1 1 SRO-I I/C 4 4 2 SRO-U MAJ 2 2 1 TS 0 2 2 Instructions:

1. Check the applicant level and enter the operating test number and Form ES-D-1 event numbers for each event type; TS are not applicable for RO applicants. ROs must serve in both the at-the-controls (ATC) and balance-of-plant (BOP) positions. Instant SROs (SRO-I) must serve in both the SRO and the ATC positions, including at least two instrument or component (I/C) malfunctions and one major transient, in the ATC position. If an SRO-I additionally serves in the BOP position, one I/C malfunction can be credited toward the two I/C malfunctions required for the ATC position.
2. Reactivity manipulations may be conducted under normal or controlled abnormal conditions (refer to Section D.5.d) but must be significant per Section C.2.a of Appendix D. (*) Reactivity and normal evolutions may be replaced with additional instrument or component malfunctions on a one-for-one basis.
3. Whenever practical, both instrument and component malfunctions should be included; only those that require verifiable actions that provide insight to the applicants competence count toward the minimum requirements specified for the applicants license level in the right-hand columns.
4. For licensees that use the ATC operator primarily for monitoring plant parameters, the chief examiner may place SRO-I applicants in either the ATC or BOP position to best evaluate the SRO-I in manipulating plant controls.

ES-301 Competencies Checklist Form ES-301-6 Facility: ANO Unit 1 Date of Examination: 8/22/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 APPLICANTS RO R1 / R2 R5 / R6 U1 / U2 SRO-I ATC / BOP BOP / ATC SRO-U Competencies SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 Interpret/Diagnose 3,4,5,6, 2,3,4,5, 3,4,7, 2,3,4,6, 5,6,7 2,3,5, Events and Conditions 7,8,9 6,7,8 8,9 7 6,8 Comply With and 1,2,3,4, 1,2,3,4, 2,3,4, 2,3,4,6, 1,5,6, 1,2,3, Use Procedures (1) 5,6,7,8, 5,6,7,8 7,8,9 7 7 5,6,8 9

Operate Control 2,3,4, 2,3,4,6, 1,5,6, 1,2,3, Boards (2) 7,8,9 7 7 5,6,8 Communicate 1,2,3,4, 1,2,3,4, 2,3,4, 2,3,4,6, 1,5,6, 1,2,3, and Interact 5,6,7,8, 5,6,7,8 7,8,9 7 7 5,6,8 9

Demonstrate 1,2,3,4, 1,2,3,4, Supervisory Ability (3) 5,6,7,8, 5,6,7,8 9

Comply With and 4,5 3,4 Use Tech. Specs. (3)

Notes:

(1) Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2) Optional for an SRO-U.

(3) Only applicable to SROs.

Instructions:

Check the applicants license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow the examiners to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all rating factors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1 and ES-303-3.)

ES-301 Competencies Checklist Form ES-301-6 Facility: ANO Unit 1 Date of Examination: 8/22/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 APPLICANTS RO R3 / R4 R7 / R8 U3 / U4 SRO-I ATC / BOP BOP / ATC SRO-U Competencies SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 2 3 4 Interpret/Diagnose 3,4,5,6, 1,2,3,4, 3,4,7, 1,3,4,6, 5,6,7 2,4,5, Events and Conditions 7,8,9 5,6,7,8 8,9 7 6,8 Comply With and 1,2,3,4, 1,2,3,4, 2,3,4, 1,3,4,6, 1,5,6, 2,4,5, Use Procedures (1) 5,6,7,8, 5,6,7,8 7,8,9 7 7 6,8 9

Operate Control 2,3,4, 1,3,4,6, 1,5,6, 2,4,5, Boards (2) 7,8,9 7 7 6,8 Communicate 1,2,3,4, 1,2,3,4, 2,3,4, 1,3,4,6, 1,5,6, 2,4,5, and Interact 5,6,7,8, 5,6,7,8 7,8,9 7 7 6,8 9

Demonstrate 1,2,3,4, 1,2,3,4, Supervisory Ability (3) 5,6,7,8, 5,6,7,8 9

Comply With and 4,5 2,5 Use Tech. Specs. (3)

Notes:

(1) Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2) Optional for an SRO-U.

(3) Only applicable to SROs.

Instructions:

Check the applicants license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow the examiners to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all rating factors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1 and ES-303-3.)

ES-301 Competencies Checklist Form ES-301-6 Facility: ANO Unit 1 Date of Examination: 8/22/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 APPLICANTS I1 / I2 I3 I4 I5 SRO/ATC/BOP ATC/BOP/SRO ATC/SRO/SRO BOP/SRO/ATC Competencies SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 Interpret/Diagnose 2,3, 2,4, 2,3, 2,3, 1,3, 2,3, 2,3, 1,2, 2,3, 2,3, 1,2, 3,4, Events and Conditions 4,5, 5,6, 5,6, 5,6, 4,6, 4,5, 5,6, 3,4, 4,5, 4,6, 3,4, 6,7, 6,7, 8 7,9 8 7 6,7, 8 5,6, 6,7, 7 5,6, 8 8 8,9, 7,8 8,9, 7,8 Comply With and 1,2, 2,4, 2,3, 1,2, 1,3, 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 2,3, 1,2, 1,3, Use Procedures (1) 3,4, 5,6, 5,6, 3,5, 4,6, 3,4, 3,5, 3,4, 3,4, 4,6, 3,4, 4,6, 5,6, 8 7,9 6,8 7 5,6, 6,8 5,6, 5,6, 7 5,6, 7,8 7,8 7,8, 7,8 7,8, 7,8 9, 9, Operate Control 2,4, 2,3, 1,2, 1,3, 1,2, 2,3, 1,3, Boards (2) 5,6, 5,6, 3,5, 4,6, 3,5, 4,6, 4,6, 8 7,9 6,8 7 6,8 7 7,8 Communicate 1,2, 2,4, 2,3, 1,2, 1,3, 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 2,3, 1,2, 1,3, and Interact 3,4, 5,6, 5,6, 3,5, 4,6, 3,4, 3,5, 3,4, 3,4, 4,6, 3,4, 4,6, 5,6, 8 7,9 6,8 7 5,6, 6,8 5,6, 5,6, 7 5,6, 7,8 7,8 7,8, 7,8 7,8, 7,8 9, 9, Demonstrate 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 1,2, Supervisory Ability (3) 3,4, 3,4, 3,4, 3,4, 3,4, 5,6, 5,6, 5,6, 5,6, 5,6, 7,8 7,8, 7,8 7,8, 7,8 9, 9, Comply With and 3,4 2,6 2,5 2,6 2,5 Use Tech. Specs. (3)

Notes:

(1) Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2) Optional for an SRO-U.

(3) Only applicable to SROs.

Instructions:

Check the applicants license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow the examiners to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all rating factors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1 and ES-303-3.)

ES-301 Competencies Checklist Form ES-301-6 Facility: ANO Unit 1 Date of Examination: 8/22/2016 Operating Test No.: 2016-1 APPLICANTS R9 SRO/ATC/BOP BOP/BOP/ATC Competencies SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO SCENARIO 2 3 4 5 5 5 Interpret/Diagnose 2,3, 1,3, 3,4, 2,3, 2,3, 4,5, Events and Conditions 4,6, 4,6, 6,7, 4,5, 6,7, 6,7, 7 7 8 6,7, 8,9 8 8,9 Comply With and 2,3, 1,3, 1,3, 1,2, 2,3, 1,4, Use Procedures (1) 4,6, 4,6, 4,6, 3,4, 6,7, 5,6, 7 7 7,8 5,6, 8,9 7,8 7,8, 9

Operate Control 2,3, 1,3, 1,3, 2,3, 1,4, Boards (2) 4,6, 4,6, 4,6, 6,7, 5,6, 7 7 7,8 8,9 7,8 Communicate 2,3, 1,3, 1,3, 1,2, 2,3, 1,4, and Interact 4,6, 4,6, 4,6, 3,4, 6,7, 5,6, 7 7 7,8 5,6, 8,9 7,8 7,8, 9

Demonstrate 1,2, Supervisory Ability (3) 3,4, 5,6, 7,8, 9

Comply With and 2,6 Use Tech. Specs. (3)

Notes:

(1) Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2) Optional for an SRO-U.

(3) Only applicable to SROs.

Instructions:

Check the applicants license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow the examiners to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all rating factors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1 and ES-303-3.)